THERMOGUARD

µP-IV Multi- Temp

Microprocessor Controller
Revision 20xx Software
TK 50033A-2-OD (Rev. 7, 10-01)

Diagnostic Manual
Part 1 — (Sections 1-7)
Part 2 — (Sections 8-9)
Used on:
SB-III DE
SB-III & Super-II TC/TCI
SB-III & Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
SB-III & Super-II TC/TCI Parallel Evaporators
SB-III DE Whisper with TLE Evaporators
SB-III & Super-II TC/TCI Whisper with TLE Evaporators
SB-III DE SR EC
SMX-II SR TCI
SL TCI SR with TLE Evaporators
Tesco
Spectrum™ SB
Spectrum™ DE
Spectrum™ Super-II
Spectrum SL

Copyright© 1999, 2000, 2001 Thermo King Corp., Minneapolis, MN, USA
Printed in USA
Printing History
This manual replaces TK 41107 all revisions
Original TK 50033-2-OD (06-97)
First Revision TK 50033-1-2-OD (07-97) Changes Section 8
Second Revision TK 50033-2-2-OD (01-98) Rev 2003 Software
Third Revision TK 50033-3-2-OD (07-98) SL TCI & Rev 2004 Software
Fourth Revision TK 50033-2-OD (Rev 4, 03-01) Through Revision 2013 Software
Fifth Revision TK 50033-2-OD (Rev 5, 03-01) Split Manual into Two Manuals
Sixth Revision TK 50033-2-OD (Rev 5, 05-01) Convert files to FrameMaker 6.0
Seventh Revision TK 50033-2-OD (Rev. 7, 10-01) Spectrum and Revision 2020 Software
 About This Manual
Since not everyone is familiar with Section 5 - Diagnostics
microprocessor based control systems, please take
a few minutes to read this page. It explains the This section shows you how to diagnosis
content and structure of this manual. This will problems. It includes both Alarm Code
make it easier for you to find the information you Diagnostics and Other Symptom Diagnostics.
need.
Section 6 - Service Procedures
Section 1 - Safety Information This section includes step by step procedures to
This section contains the Safety Precautions, repair and program the THERMOGUARD µP-IV
Safety Decals and Locations and Microprocessor Multi-Temp microprocessor control system. They
Cautions. You should read this material carefully are referenced by the Diagnostics section.
before working on the unit.
Section 7 - Service Information
Section 2 - Hardware This section includes information about the parts
Description of the THERMOGUARD µP-IV Multi-Temp
control system, including identifying components.
This section includes a complete system hardware
It also includes an explanation of Temperature
description including special features and
Differential.
sequence of operation. It shows you how the
system works in different modes and under
various conditions. Section 8 - Refrigeration
Principals, Service Procedures
Section 3 - Software and Diagrams
Description
This section discusses the operation of the
Section 9- Schematic and
software and the programmable features. Each Wiring Diagrams
programmable feature is discussed individually to These sections are included in Part 2 of the
show you how each works and how to change the manual (TK50033B-2-OD).
settings.

Section 4 - Operation
This section shows you how to operate the
THERMOGUARD µP-IV Multi-Temp
microprocessor control system.
Section 1
Safety Precautions
General Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Auto Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Refrigeration Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Electrical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Microprocessor Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Electrical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Low Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
µP-IV Multi-Temp Special Considerations . .1-2
First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
First Aid–Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
First Aid–Refrigeration Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
First Aid—Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Safety Precautions
General Practices Refrigerant
1. Always wear goggles or safety glasses. When removing refrigerant from a unit, a
Refrigerant and battery acid can permanently recovery process that prevents or minimizes
damage the eyes. refrigerant loss to the atmosphere is required by
law. When refrigerants are exposed to the
2. Never close the compressor discharge service atmosphere in liquid form, they evaporate rapidly,
valve with the unit running. Never operate the freezing anything they contact. If they contact the
unit with the discharge service valve closed. skin severe frostbite can result. In the event of
3. Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of fans frostbite, the objectives of first aid are to protect
and belts when the unit is running. the frozen area from additional injury and to warm
it rapidly.
4. Be sure gauge manifold hoses are in good
condition. Never let them come in contact
Refrigeration Oil
with belts, fans, pulleys or hot surfaces.
Avoid contact with the eyes. Avoid prolonged
5. Never apply heat to a sealed refrigeration contact with the skin or clothing. Wash hands
system or container. thoroughly after handling refrigeration oil to
6. Fluorocarbon refrigerants in the presence of prevent skin irritation.
an open flame produce toxic gases. These
gases are severe respiratory irritants capable Electrical
of causing death.
7. Be sure all mounting bolts are the correct Microprocessor Service
length for the application and are securely Precautions must be taken to prevent electrostatic
tightened. discharge when the servicing the microprocessor
8. Use extreme caution when drilling holes in the and related components. A potential difference
unit. Holes may weaken structural less than that required to produce a small spark
components. Holes drilled in wiring can cause between a finger and a doorknob can cause severe
fire or explosion. Holes drilled into the damage to solid state components. Refer to the
refrigeration system will release refrigerant. T.I.P. material in this manual and the Electrostatic
Discharge Training Guide (TK 40282-1) for
9. Use caution when working around exposed additional information.
coil fins. The fins can cause painful
lacerations. Welding
10. Use caution when working with refrigerant in Precautions must be taken before welding on the
a closed or confined area with a limited air unit. Refer to the T.I.P. materials in this manual
supply such as a trailer, container or hold of a for additional information.
ship. Refrigerant tends to displace air and can
cause oxygen depletion. This may result in
unconsciousness or death due to suffocation.

Auto Start/Stop
The unit may start automatically and at any time
when the ZONE 1/HOST switch is in the "on"
position. Be sure to turn the ON/OFF switch "off"
before opening doors or inspecting or working on
any part of the unit.

18 October 2001 1-1

Safety Precautions

Electrical Hazards • If the Controller ON/OFF switch is turned

"off" and/or the battery is disconnected, an
High Voltage Alarm Code 50 is generated and the
Clock/Calendar must be reset as shown in
Units with optional Electric Standby utilize high Service Procedure A05A.
voltage 3 phase AC power any time the unit is
operating in Electric mode. This voltage potential • Any time a Return Air or Discharge Air sensor
is also present any time the unit is connected to is changed, it must be calibrated as shown in
standby power. Extreme care must be used when Service Procedure A15A.
working on the unit, as these voltages are capable • Any time the relay board is removed or
of causing serious injury or death. replaced the ammeter must be calibrated as
1. When working on the high voltage circuits, do shown in Service Procedure B04A.
not make any rapid movements. Unplanned • Any time the microprocessor is replaced,
movements can cause contact with high these Service Procedures must be used:
voltage.
• A02A Recording Existing
2. Use tools with insulated handles that are in Microprocessor Setup
good condition. Never hold metal tools in
your hand if exposed high voltage conductors • A12A ESD Procedures
are within reach. • A03A Microprocessor Removal and
3. Treat all wires as high voltage wires. Replacement
4. Never work alone on high voltage circuits. • A04A Microprocessor Setup
Another person should be nearby in case of • A05A Clock/Calendar Setup
accident.
• A20A Communications/Data Logger
Low Voltage Setup
Control circuits are 12 volt dc. The large amount • Any time the relay board is replaced, Service
of current available can cause severe burns if Procedure B02A must be followed.
shorted to ground. • Any time welding is to be done on the unit or
Do not wear jewelry, watches or rings when trailer, Service Procedure A26A must be
working on the unit. If these items contact an followed.
electrical circuit severe burns may result. • Alarm codes that cannot be cleared normally
may clear by first entering Super Guarded
µP-IV Multi-Temp Special Access using Service Procedure A04A and
Considerations then pressing the code and clear keys.
The following procedures are not readily
apparent, but must be followed when working on
units equipped with µP-IV Multi-Temp
microprocessors.
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a
light bulb to test circuits on any
microprocessor based equipment.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the
battery, the Controller ON/OFF switch must be
turned "off".

1-2 18 October 2001

 Safety Precautions

First Aid First Aid—Low Voltage

Immediate action must be taken after a person has
First Aid–Refrigerant received an electrical shock. Medical attention
1. Warm the frozen area by immersing it in should be summoned as soon as possible.
luke-warm (not hot) water or by covering the The source of electricity must be immediately
area with warm blankets. removed, either by shutting down the power or
2. Obtain medical assistance as soon as possible. removing the victim from the source. If the victim
must be removed from a live circuit, pull the
3. If refrigerant contacts the eyes, flush them victim off with a non-conductive material. Use the
with water immediately and obtain medical victim’s clothing, a rope, wood or your belt. After
assistance as soon as possible. separating the victim from the power source,
immediately check for pulse and respiration. If a
First Aid–Refrigeration Oil pulse is not present, start CPR (Cardio-Pulmonary
In case of eye contact, flush immediately with Resuscitation) immediately. If a pulse is present,
water for at least 15 minutes. Obtain medical respiration may be restored by mouth to mouth
assistance as soon as possible. resuscitation. Obtain emergency medical
assistance as soon as possible.

18 October 2001 1-3

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section 2
System Description
Multi-Temp µP IV-Block Diagram . . . . . . . . .2-1
Multi-Temp µP-IV
Unit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Multi-Temp µP-IV
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Microprocessor Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Electro Static Discharge (ESD) . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Relay Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
I/O Module and Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Shunts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Configuration Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Additional Control Box Devices . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Switch Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Controller ON/OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Refrigeration System Components . . . . . . .2-6
Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Solenoids and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Transducers and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Engine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
 System Description
Multi-Temp µP IV-Block Diagram
OPTIONAL REMOTE PANEL

MULTI-TEMP µP-IV SENSORS

MICROPROCESSOR Return Air Sensors—All Zones
Keypad Discharge Air Sensor—Zone 1 (Zone 2—DE)
Display Ambient Air Sensor
Software Coil Temperature Sensor—All Zones
Memory Water Temperature Sensor
Oil Pressure Sensor (Except Spectrum)
Discharge Pressure Transducer
Flywheel Sensor

µP POWER SWITCH

RELAY BOARD ENGINE SECTION

and Oil Level Sensor
Oil Pressure Switch
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
Glow Plugs
Control Relays
Coolant Level Sensor
Shunt Resistors
Throttle Solenoid
Fuses
Fuel Solenoid
LEDs
Starter
Autostart Buzzer
Alternator
Configuration Jumpers
Security Code Jumper
Cold Start Jumper CONDENSER SECTION
Condenser Inlet Solenoid
Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
Condenser Purge Valve
High Pressure Cutout
High Pressure Switch

ZONE 1/HOST UNIT EVAPORATOR

Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1 (TCI Only)
Damper Solenoid Zone 1
Optional Door Switch

ZONE 2 EVAPORATOR
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 2
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 2
Damper Solenoid/Fan Motor Zone 2
Optional Door Switch

ZONE 3 EVAPORATOR
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3
Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 3
Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3
Fan Motor Zone 3
Optional Door Switch

18 October 2001 2-1

System Description

Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessor

Unit Description The Multi-Temp µP-IV is a microprocessor based
Multi-Temp µP-IV controllers are one piece, self control system for transport refrigeration systems.
contained temperature control units designed for The Multi-Temp µP-IV integrates the following
multiple zone trailer applications. functions: return, discharge, coil and condenser
temperature sensors; hourmeters; oil pressure
On TC and TCI units, the host unit (Zone 1) can gauge; water temperature gauge; ammeter;
support one or two remote zones (Zones 2 and 3). voltmeter; tachometer; mode indicators;
The remote zones are served by either wall or refrigeration system controller and alert system.
ceiling mounted remote evaporators. SB-III DE
units feature a split evaporator coil that serves two CYCLE-SENTRY operation is a standard feature.
longitudinal compartments (Zone 1 and 2). A When selected, the CYCLE-SENTRY system
third zone with a ceiling or wall mounted remote automatically starts the unit on microprocessor
evaporator is also available. demand and shuts the unit down when all
demands are satisfied. As well as maintaining the
The units are powered by a 4 cylinder diesel box temperature, engine block temperature and
engine. The diesel engine drives the compressor battery charge levels are monitored and
directly. The unit mounts on the front of the trailer maintained. If the block temperature falls below
and the evaporator extends slightly into the trailer. 30 F (-1 C) and Diesel CYCLE-SENTRY mode is
The condenser and evaporator fans are driven by selected, the engine will start and run until the
belts. Defrost is accomplished by means of hot block temperature is above 90 F (32 C). If the
gas. battery voltage falls below the programmed limit
selected by CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Voltage
Multi-Temp µP-IV (typically 12.2 volts) and Diesel
Control System CYCLE-SENTRY mode is selected the engine
will start and run until the charge rate falls below
The main components of the microprocessor that programmed by CYCLE-SENTRY Amps
control system are as follows: (typically 5 amperes).
• Microprocessor An internal data logger or an external DAS data
• Relay Board logger is available as an option.
• Switch Panel
• Refrigeration System Sensors and Control
Components
• Engine Components

2-2 18 October 2001

 System Description

Removing a small access panel at the center rear

of the microprocessor allows access to the IC
"chip" that contains the microprocessor software.

Operation
The microprocessor is the heart of the control
system. It consists of the actual microprocessor,
software, memory, display screen, keypad, inputs
and outputs.
The microprocessor works together with the
software loaded into it to provide the required
operating and control functions. The memory is
used by the microprocessor to perform its work
and is also used to store data logger information.
The display screen is used by the microprocessor
to provide visual information to the operator, such
as operating mode, setpoint and operating
conditions of the engine.
The keypad is used by the operator to provide
information to the microprocessor, such as a new
setpoint or a request to display water temperature
or engine oil pressure.
Inputs are used to supply power and system
information to the microprocessor. For example,
the sensor inputs supply temperature information
to the microprocessor. Keypad requests are treated
Figure 1: Microprocessor Front View
as inputs by the microprocessor.
Location Outputs are used by the microprocessor to control
The Microprocessor is mounted on the weather the operation of the unit components. The display
tight control box cover. The microprocessor front segments are also controlled by outputs from the
panel consists of an LCD display screen viewed microprocessor.
through a clear viewing window on the
microprocessor bezel and a keypad accessible by Microprocessor Power
opening a door on the microprocessor bezel. Power is supplied to the microprocessor via the
Four multi-pin connectors are located on the rear Microprocessor ON/OFF switch. This switch must
of the microprocessor. All connections to the be in the off position when changing the
microprocessor are made via these connectors. microprocessor or the software IC.

The 37 pin connector and 14 pin connector attach The switch should also be placed in the off
the microprocessor to the relay board. The 19 pin position before the battery is connected or
connector attaches the microprocessor to the disconnected from the unit. The sparking and
sensors. The 9 pin connector attaches the resulting intermittent voltages applied to the
microprocessor to the optional data logger and microprocessor when the cables are removed or
satellite ports as well as the optional remote replaced on the battery can result in an inadvertent
control panel. Alarm Code 74. If this happens all programmable
features must be reprogrammed.

18 October 2001 2-3

System Description

NOTE: If an Alarm Code 74 is present, the I/O Module and Relays

microprocessor has been reset to all standard
The microprocessor controls the operation of the
(default) settings. All programmable features
unit through the I/O module. The module
must be reprogrammed using the appropriate
energizes the control relays and other inputs and
Service Procedures.
outputs on the relay board. These in turn activate
high current functions such as preheat. Each relay
Electro Static Discharge (ESD) is individually fuse protected. An LED next to
As with other similar solid state devices, the each relay or the I/O module is illuminated when
microprocessor is vulnerable to damage from the relay is energized by the microprocessor.
Electro Static Discharge (ESD). This damage is Relay functions are shown in the following table.
not always immediately apparent. As a result of
ESD, a circuit can be damaged but still continue Relay Description
to operate, only to fail later.
K2 High Speed Relay
A grounded wrist strap should always be used
when handling a microprocessor that is not K3 Damper Relay Zone 1
connected to the unit by its connectors or when K4 Preheat Relay
changing the software "chip". The microprocessor
should always be stored and shipped in the K5 Starter Relay
anti-static bag and protective packaging. K7 Run Relay
For information on software and programmable
DFR Damper/Fan Relay Zone 2
features see Section 3.
FR3 Fan Relay Zone 3
Relay Board Relay Board Relay Functions
The relay board acts as the interface between the
microprocessor and the unit components such as Shunts
fan motors, solenoids and valves. It also provides The ammeter shunt is a low value precision
multiple levels of fuse protection for the system resistor attached to the relay board. Current flow
and it’s components. Spare fuses are located at the through the shunt is used to measure the current
lower right corner of the relay board. flow to and from various circuits. The
microprocessor calculates current flow by
Location measuring the voltage drop across the shunt and
The relay board is located on the rear surface of calculating the current flow using Ohm’s Law.
the control box and the I/O module is mounted on Any time the relay board is replaced or the relay
the lower portion of the relay board. The primary board connectors are disturbed, the shunt should
features on the relay board are the I/O module, be re-calibrated. There are two shunt resistors
control relays, fuses, LED’s to indicate relay located on the upper left corner of the relay board.
states, ammeter shunts, CYCLE-SENTRY buzzer, The top shunt resistor R36 is currently used and
jumpers and wire harness connectors. the bottom shunt resistor R37 is reserved for
future applications.

2-4 18 October 2001

 System Description

Fuses
A number of fuses are located on the relay board.
The sizes and functions are shown in the
following table. Spare fuses are located in the
lower right corner of the relay board.

Fuse Size Function

F1 3 Zone 1 Electric Heat

F2 5 Electric Motor Contactor

F3 15 Zone 1 Damper

F4 15 High Speed Solenoid

F5 3 Not Used

F6 15 Zone 1 Controls

F7 3 Alternator Resistor Bypass

F8 3 Not Used

F10 3 Microprocessor Power

F11 3 Zone 3 Electric Heat

F12 25 Zone 3 Fan Motors

F13 10 Zone 3 Controls

F14 3 Zone 2 Electric Heat

F15 25 Zone 2 Fan Motor or Damper

F16 10 Zone 2 Controls

F17 3 Shunt 1

F18 3 Shunt 2

F19 3 Shunt 3

F20 40 Control Circuit Power

Figure 2: Multi-Temp µP-IV Relay Board F21 3 Oil Level Switch/Door Switches

F22 15 Unit Controls

F23 40 Starter Circuit

F32 3A Spare

F33 5A Spare

F34 15A Spare

F35 25A Spare

F36 40A Spare

F37 10A Spare

18 October 2001 2-5

System Description

Configuration Jumpers NOTE: Failure to turn both the unit ON/OFF

switch and the Microprocessor ON/OFF switch
These jumpers are used to perform a cold start,
"off" before the microprocessor connectors are
enable or disable a Security code and to configure
removed or the software "chip" is changed may
the unit. For details on setting the jumpers see the
cause damage to the microprocessor. This
Service Procedures in Section 6.
damage may not be immediately apparent. In
addition, connecting or disconnecting the unit
Additional Control Box Devices battery without turning both switches "off" can
Units equipped with TLE evaporators have result in an inadvertent microprocessor reset due
several additional relays and circuit breakers to arcing at the battery terminals when the
located in the unit control box. Units with Yanmar cables are installed or removed.
engines also have a fuel solenoid pull-in coil delay
and an intake air preheat relay in the control box. Refrigeration System
Components
Switch Panel The following refrigeration system sensors and
The switch panel is located just below the components are used by the microprocessor to
microprocessor at the outside bottom of the monitor and control the unit.
control box.
Temperature Sensors
Return Air Sensor. The return air sensor for each
zone measures the temperature of the air returning
to the unit. It is located in the return air stream.
The unit controls on this sensor under normal
conditions. This is a graded sensor and must be
replaced with a graded sensor. The
Figure 3: Switch Panel microprocessor must be calibrated to the sensor
grade of the sensor installed in the return air
The following controls are located on the switch position in order to operate properly.
panel.
Discharge Air Sensor: The discharge air sensor for
ZONE 1/HOST ON/OFF Switch: This switch turns the host unit (and Zone 2 if the unit is an SB-III
Zone 1 and the host unit on and off. Since it DE-2 or SB-III DE-3) measures the temperature
controls the host unit this switch must be on of the air leaving the unit. It is located in the
before any other zone can be activated. discharge air stream. The unit will control on this
ZONE 2 ON/OFF Switch: This switch turns Zone 2 sensor if the return air sensor fails. This sensor is
on and off. used in conjunction with the return air sensor to
allow the microprocessor to calculate temperature
ZONE 3 ON/OFF Switch: This switch turns Zone 3 differential (TPDF). This is a graded sensor and
on and off. must be replaced with a graded sensor. The
microprocessor must be calibrated to the sensor
Controller On/Off Switch grade of the sensor installed in the discharge air
This switch removes all power from the position in order to operate properly. Remote
microprocessor when it is in the "off" position. It evaporators do not have a discharge air sensor.
is located either on the side or inside the control
box.
This switch must be in the "off" position
whenever the microprocessor connectors are to be
removed, the software "chip" is to be changed or
the unit battery is removed or installed.

2-6 18 October 2001

 System Description

NOTE: The grades of the sensors installed as Hot Gas Solenoid: This valve is energized (open)
return and discharge air sensors when the unit any time heating or defrosting is required in the
was manufactured are shown on the Sensor zone. This is a normally closed valve.
Calibration Nameplate located in the control Suction Line Solenoid: If a zone is capable of
box. If a sensor is changed the old sensor grade reverse cycle operation it is said to be invertible.
on the nameplate should be crossed out and the Reverse cycle means that the evaporator coil in
new grade circled. See the T.I.P.s procedures in that zone is used as the condenser coil during heat
sections 5 through 8 of the manual to properly operation as long as at least one other zone is
calibrate the return air and discharge air operating in cool mode.
sensors.
The suction line solenoid is only present in zones
Coil Temperature Sensor: The coil temperature that are invertible. If present, the suction line
sensor for each zone measures the temperature of solenoid is energized (closed) when its
the evaporator coil. It is mounted on the compartment is operating in heat mode as long as
evaporator coil. It is used to monitor evaporator at least one other zone is operating in cool mode.
coil temperatures. This is an ungraded sensor. This is a normally open valve.
Ambient Temperature Sensor: The ambient
Damper Solenoid: The damper solenoid is used to
temperature sensor measures the ambient air open and close the damper door on the host unit
temperature. It is located in the intake air stream (and Zone 2 if the unit is an SB-III DE-2 or SB-III
to the condenser. This is an ungraded sensor. DE-3). SMX-II units utilize a damper motor
instead of a solenoid.
Solenoids and Valves
These three valves are located in the condenser Transducers and Switches
section of the unit. They are common to all zones. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer. This
Condenser Inlet Solenoid: This valve controls the transducer supplies the discharge pressure at the
flow of refrigerant to the condenser. This solenoid compressor to the microprocessor. This
is energized (closed) when any compartment is information is used by the software to determine
operating in heat or defrost mode. This is a operating conditions.
normally open valve. High Pressure Cutout Switch: The high pressure
Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid: This valve is cutout switch monitors the discharge pressure at
energized (open) during heat or defrost when the compressor. The switch is closed with normal
discharge pressure is low to be sure adequate pressures and open with excessive pressures. The
refrigerant is available to heat or defrost the zone. switch will open and close at pressures
This valve is normally closed. determined by the refrigerant used in the unit. The
high pressure cutout is located on the compressor
Purge Valve: The purge valve operates in
conjunction with the Receiver Tank Pressure discharge manifold.
Solenoid. This valve is also a normally closed High Pressure Switch: This switch is used as a
valve. backup device if the discharge pressure transducer
fails to confirm operation of the receiver tank
The following valves are required for each zone. pressure solenoid and purge valve. This is a
They are located in the evaporator section of each normally closed switch that opens at 300 psig and
zone. closes at 220 psig.
Liquid Line Solenoid: This valve is energized
(open) any time cooling, heating or defrosting is
required in its zone. The valve is de-energized
when the zone is in null to stop refrigerant flow in
that zone. This is a normally closed valve.

18 October 2001 2-7

System Description

Engine Components Coolant Temperature Sensor: The coolant

temperature sensor is located in the thermostat
Starter: The starter is located on the compartment
housing at the front of the engine. It supplies
door side of the engine. It is energized to crank the
information on the engine coolant temperature to
engine either by the microprocessor or the
the microprocessor via the WTP and WTN wires.
Preheat/Start switch via the 8S wire.
Oil Level Switch: The oil level sensoris located
Glow Plugs: The glow plugs are located at the above the oil pan on the compartment door side of
compartment door side of the engine. They are the engine. It supplies information on the oil level
energized to preheat the engine by the
to the microprocessor via the OLS wire. The
microprocessor via the H wire.
switch will be closed with low oil level.
Flywheel Sensor: The flywheel sensor is located Oil Pressure Sensor (non-Spectrum™ Only): The
on the compartment door side of the engine just oil pressure sensor is located on the compartment
below the starter. It supplies engine speed door side of the engine. It supplies information on
information to the microprocessor via the FS1 and
the engine oil pressure to the microprocessor via
FS2 wires.
the OPS wire. The resistance of the sensor varies
Fuel Solenoid: The fuel solenoid is part of the with oil pressure.
injector pump and is used to start and stop the Low Oil Pressure Switch: The low oil pressure
flow of fuel to the diesel engine. It is energized to switch is located on the compartment door side of
start fuel flow by the microprocessor via the 8D the engine near the oil pressure sensor. It supplies
wire.
information on engine oil pressure to the
High Speed Solenoid: The high speed (throttle) microprocessor via the 20B wire. It should be
solenoid is located on the compartment door side closed when the engine is stopped and open when
of the engine just above the starter. It is energized the engine is running.
to initiate high speed operation by the
microprocessor via the 7D wire.
Coolant Level Sensor: The coolant level sensor is
located on the radiator expansion tank. It supplies
information on the coolant level to the
microprocessor via the CLS wire. If the coolant
level falls below the sensor for a specified period
of time a low coolant condition is assumed to
exist.

2-8 18 October 2001

Section 3
Software Description
Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1 [OIL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
[OIL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
[PrESr] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
CYCLE-SENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
[SET.1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Sentry. . . . . . . . .3-1
[FZHL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Service Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
[HSPD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Relay Board Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
[LSSP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
[NEWC] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Sleep Mode Exit Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
[CSBV] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 [FLSD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Low Speed Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 [SPECT]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 [SMX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Programmable Features Overview. . . . . . . .3-3 [HC] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
[YAN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Guarded Access Programmable Features .3-4 [PRNT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Entering Guarded Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 [PRNT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Leaving Guarded Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 [ELOG]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Accessing Additional Screens. . . . . . . . . . .3-4 [RSWH] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Programming Aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 [FSII] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Screen Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 [RNUL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
[H6TY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 [HCSP]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
[H6LM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
[HRM.6] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Embedded Access Programmable
[DEFIA]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
[DEFNA] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Accessing Embedded Screens. . . . . . . . . 3-17
[DEFIb] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Screen Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
[DEFNb] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 [STH1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
[DEF] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 [STL1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
[DDUR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 [STH2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
[STL2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Super Guarded Access Programmable [STH3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 [STL3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Entering Super Guarded Access. . . . . . . . .3-8 [RSFD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Leaving Super Guarded Access . . . . . . . . .3-8 [NULD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Accessing Additional Screens. . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Embedded Access Features . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 µP-IV Multi-Temp Menu Overview . . . . . . . 3-19
Programming Aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 µP-IV Multi-Temp Menu Overview . . . . . . . 3-20
Screen Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
[CRA1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
[CDA1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
[CRA2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
[CDA2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
[CRA3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
[CS A] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
[DEG] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
 Software Description
Software Features CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Sentry
The software is a very complex set of instructions CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Sentry maintains the
used to operate the microprocessor. The battery in a charged condition when the unit is
microprocessor examines the conditions of all the operating in Diesel CYCLE-SENTRY mode or
inputs and compares them to the instructions Sleep Mode (see next page). If the battery voltage
contained in the software. The outputs are then falls below the programmable voltage selected by
energized as required by the software instructions. CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Voltage range [CSBV]
(typically 12.2 volts) and CYCLE-SENTRY
There is no way to determine from the schematic mode or Sleep Mode is selected, the engine will
what conditions will cause the unit to operate in a start and run until the charge rate falls below the
particular mode. This decision is made by the amperage programmed by CYCLE-SENTRY
microprocessor and software after examining all Amps [CS A] (typically 5 amperes).
the input conditions and setpoint. However,
operating mode can usually be deduced from the
Service Test Mode
existing conditions. As an example, if a 35 F (2 C)
setpoint is selected and the zone box temperature The Service Test Mode allows the unit to be
as indicated by the return air sensor is 60 F (16 C), forced to a known operating condition regardless
the zone should operate in Cool mode when of setpoint or temperature sensor inputs. This
turned on. allows service personnel to troubleshoot the
system under defined conditions.
The software can be changed by removing the
small cover at the center rear of the The unit will remain in any Service Test Mode
microprocessor. This exposes the EPROM that function for 15 minutes if no other Test Mode
contains the software. function is selected. At the end of 15 minutes, if
no other Test Mode is selected the unit will shut
To check the software revision and/or change the down and record Alarm Code 54 Service Test
software EPROM refer to the Service Procedures Shut Down.
in Section 6 of this manual.
All function keys and unit protection features
remain active in Service Test Mode.
Special Features
For step by step instructions consult Service
CYCLE-SENTRY Procedure A34A in Section 6 of this manual.
When selected, the CYCLE-SENTRY system
automatically starts unit operation when cooling,
heating or defrost is necessary in any zone and
stops unit operation when all zones, battery
condition and engine conditions are satisfied. The
unit will continue to start and stop as required to
maintain the setpoint in all zones.
In addition, CYCLE-SENTRY will automatically
start and stop the engine as required to maintain
engine block temperature to assure quick starts. If
the engine block temperature falls below 35 F
(2 C) and CYCLE-SENTRY is selected the
engine will start and run until the block
temperature is above 90 F (32 C).

18 October 2001 3-1

Software Description

Relay Board Test Mode Sleep Mode Exit Time

The Relay Board Test Mode allows individual If the unit is equipped with a Data Logger, the
relays or outputs to be energized. This permits programmable Sleep Mode Exit Time (time to
service personnel to troubleshoot the system again start controlling the trailer temperature to
under defined conditions. Relay Board Test Mode setpoint) is also available. A Sleep Mode Exit
can only be used with the unit is not running. Time (time and day) can be loaded before entering
Sleep Mode. The unit will operate in Sleep Mode
Relays and outputs can all be energized
until the until the Sleep Mode Exit Time and Day
momentarily. In addition, all functions except for
is reached. The unit will then exit Sleep Mode,
the Start and Preheat relays can be locked on. If a
perform a Full Pretrip test and resume operation in
function is locked on that function will remain
normal mode, controlling to the selected setpoint.
energized for 15 minutes if no other Interface
For example, the unit could be programmed to
Board Test Mode function is selected. At the end
operate in Sleep Mode during the weekend, and
of 15 minutes, if no other function is selected the
then resume normal Continuous or
unit will shut down and record Alarm Code 54.
CYCLE-SENTRY operation early on Monday
All display functions and protection circuits morning, in order to be ready for the coming
operate normally in Service Test Mode. week.
For step by step instructions consult Service
Procedure A44A in Section 6 of this manual. Sequence of Operation
The microprocessor uses a complex program to
Sleep Mode determine which operating mode the unit should
Normal CYCLE-SENTRY operation be in.
automatically starts and stops the unit as required The ZONE 1/HOST switch must be turned on
to maintain the setpoint, keep the diesel engine before any other zone can be operated. When the
warm and maintain the unit battery in a charged ZONE 1/HOST switch is turned on, the backlight
condition. Sleep Mode does not maintain the illuminates the screen and the operating icons
setpoint in any compartment during Sleep Mode appear. The unit will start automatically in both
operation, it only keeps the diesel engine warm Continuous and CYCLE-SENTRY mode.
and the unit battery in a charged condition. This is
useful in extremely cold weather or if the unit is to
be out of service for some period of time.
When the unit is in Sleep Mode, the display will
show [SLEEP MODE] instead of the Standard
Display of return air temperature and setpoint.
The unit can be removed from Sleep mode by
turning the Zone 1/Host switch to Off.

3-2 18 October 2001

 Software Description

Low Speed Start Programmable Features

The unit will start in low speed as long as the Overview
engine temperature is less than 50 F (10 C). It will The Multi-Temp µP-IV microprocessor features a
operate in low speed until the engine coolant number of programmable features. These features
reaches a temperature of 50 F (10 C). are designed to allow end users to configure their
Each zone that is turned on will operate in one of units to their own special requirements for
the following modes: improved performance and economy of operation.

• Cool These features are set to the most commonly used

settings when the unit is shipped from the factory.
• Heat However, they are easily changed to satisfy
• Defrost special requirements.

• Null The features are changed from either the Guarded

Access programming menu or the Super Guarded
Engine speed is determined by a combination of Access programming menu.
the requirements of each zone and the discharge
pressure. The diesel engine will operate in high or The following sections describe all the
low speed accordingly. programmable features available as part of the
Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessor equipped with
Defrost Revision 20xx software. Each feature is
programmable from either the Guarded Access
Defrost is initiated automatically by the menu or the Super Guarded Access menu. They
microprocessor or manually by selecting defrost are presented in the order they appear in the
from the Defrost Prompt Screen for the desired Guarded Access and Super Guarded Access
zone. A demand defrost cycle will also occur menus.
based on the return air temperature and discharge
air temperature or coil temperature. The Some features are optional and some may not be
evaporator coil temperature must be below 45 F included in all revisions of the software. If so,
(7 C) to allow defrost. When the Defrost Icon for they will be identified as such. The factory setting
a zone appears the damper door is closed or the for each feature is also shown.
fans are turned off. Several defrost features are
programmable. See Guarded Access
Programmable Features, later in this section, for
details. The unit is designed to defrost in low
speed.
The unit will stay in defrost until the evaporator
coil temperature rises to 58 F (13 C). If the
evaporator coil temperature does not rise above
58 F (13 C) within the Defrost Duration [DDUR]
time limit, the microprocessor will terminate
defrost and display the Alarm Icon. The Defrost
Duration can be set for either 30 or 45 minutes.

18 October 2001 3-3

Software Description

Guarded Access Accessing Additional Screens

Programmable Features The additional screens in the Guarded Access
menu are accessed by pressing the SELECT key.
Entering Guarded Access Each screen appears for a maximum of 30 seconds
The ZONE 1/HOST switch must be On and if no other key is pressed (such as the UP ARROW,
Continuous Mode must be selected. Guarded DOWN ARROW, ENTER or SELECT key). If no
Access Mode is entered by simultaneously other key is pressed, the microprocessor
pressing and holding the T-K key and CLEAR key automatically exits Guarded Access mode and the
for 5 seconds. Either the [H6TY] or [CODE] display returns to the Standard Display of Return
screen will appear. The [H6TY] screen is the first Air Temperature and Setpoint. The screens are
screen in the Guarded Access menu. If the described in the Screen Descriptions section
[CODE] screen appears it indicates that a Security (below).
Code is active to prevent unauthorized entry to
Guarded Access and Super Guarded Access Programming Aids
mode. The correct Security Code must be selected When programming many features at the same
with the UP or DOWN arrow keys and then the time, such as during the initial setup of a
ENTERkey must be pressed. The [H6TY] screen microprocessor, it is wise to obtain and complete a
will then appear. If the wrong Security Code is copy of Setup Information Sheet contained in
entered the microprocessor will return to the Service Procedure A02A in Section 6 of this
Standard Display. If no other key is pressed for 30 manual. Be certain all customer specified settings
seconds while in Guarded Access mode the are included when completing this Setup
microprocessor will exit Guarded Access mode Information Sheet. This sheet is then used to
and the display will return to the Standard confirm each entry to be certain the desired setting
Display. are programmed.

Leaving Guarded Access Screen Descriptions

Leaving Guarded Access mode can be
accomplished in several ways. The easiest and [H6TY]
quickest method is to turn the ZONE 1/HOST Hourmeter 6 Type
switch off and back on. A second method is to
allow the display to time out. This occurs if no Programming Choices - 0 thru 2 and 15
key is pressed for approximately 30 seconds. In Factory setting - 0
any case the microprocessor will automatically
exit Guarded Access mode and return to the Programmed from Guarded Access menu
Standard Display. Hourmeter 6 can be programmed to record as any
one of the four types of hourmeter shown in the
following table.

Hourmeter Types
0= Not Active
1= Total Switch On Time (Note 1)
12 = Diesel Engine Run Time (Note 1)
15 = Pretrip Reminder (Note 1)

Note 1: A limit setting is required for an

hourmeter programmed as Type 1, 2 or 15.

3-4 18 October 2001

 Software Description

[H6LM] [DEFIA]
Hourmeter 6 Limit Software revision 2003 and later
(Only appears if Hourmeter 6 Type is set to 1, 2 Defrost Intervals In Range with Fresh Range
or 15) Setpoint
Programming Choices - 0 to 99999 hours Programming Choices - 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours
Factory setting - 100 Factory Setting - 6
Programmed from Guarded Access menu Programmed from Guarded Access Menu
If the Hourmeter 6 Type has been set to 1 or 2 a The microprocessor will automatically initiate a
time limit in hours is required by the hourmeter. defrost cycle based on time. There are four
When this time limit is reached a Stored Alarm separate times to be considered. If the unit is
Code 73 is generated to inform the operator that operating within a few degrees of setpoint it is
the selected interval has been exceeded. For considered to be In Range. There are two In
example, if Hourmeter 6 was set to Type 2 (Diesel Range time settings - one for setpoints in the
Run Time), an appropriate hourmeter limit could Fresh Range and another for setpoints in the
be entered to indicate that the diesel engine is due Frozen Range. If the unit is not operating within a
for an oil change. This screen allows the few degrees of setpoint it is considered to be Not
hourmeter limit to be programmed for Hourmeter In Range. There are also two Not In Range time
6. It only appears if Hourmeter 6 has been set for settings as above - one for setpoints in the Fresh
Type 1 or 2. Range and another for setpoints in the Frozen
Range.
[HRM.6]
The time chosen is used as determined by the
Hourmeter 6 Accumulated Hours setting of the [DEF] feature. If [DEF] is set to
[VAR] the first defrost cycle will occur at
Programming Choices - 0 to 99999 hours
whatever time has been selected. Subsequent
Factory setting - 0 defrost cycles will occur based on the amount of
time the previous defrost cycle took to complete.
Programmed from Guarded Access menu
If [DEF] is set to [FIX] defrost cycles will occur
The number of hours accumulated in an at the selected time interval.
hourmeter can be changed or reset to 0 as required
Note that defrost cycles can also be initiated
by the user. This is also necessary if the
manually or by microprocessor demand (when the
hourmeters are being used and the microprocessor
temperature sensors indicate that the coil may
is to be replaced. This screen allows the
becoming coated with ice). This feature allows the
accumulated hours to be changed for Hourmeter
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Range
6.
Setpoints time to be set to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 hours as
required by load conditions.

18 October 2001 3-5

Software Description

[DEFNA] [DEFIb]
Software revision 2003 and later Software revision 2003 and later
Defrost Intervals Not In Range with Fresh Defrost Intervals In Range with Frozen Range
Range Setpoint Setpoint
Programming Choices - 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours Programming Choices - 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours
Factory Setting - 4 Factory Setting - 6
Programmed from Guarded Access Menu Programmed from Guarded Access Menu
The microprocessor will automatically initiate a The microprocessor will automatically initiate a
defrost cycle based on time. There are four defrost cycle based on time. There are four
separate times to be considered. If the unit is separate times to be considered. If the unit is
operating within a few degrees of setpoint it is operating within a few degrees of setpoint it is
considered to be In Range. There are two In considered to be In Range. There are two In
Range time settings - one for setpoints in the Range time settings - one for setpoints in the
Fresh Range and another for setpoints in the Fresh Range and another for setpoints in the
Frozen Range. If the unit is not operating within a Frozen Range. If the unit is not operating within a
few degrees of setpoint it is considered to be Not few degrees of setpoint it is considered to be Not
In Range. There are also two Not In Range time In Range. There are also two Not In Range time
settings as above - one for setpoints in the Fresh settings as above - one for setpoints in the Fresh
Range and another for setpoints in the Frozen Range and another for setpoints in the Frozen
Range. Range.
The time chosen is used as determined by the The time chosen is used as determined by the
setting of the [DEF] feature. If [DEF] is set to setting of the [DEF] feature. If [DEF] is set to
[VAR] the first defrost cycle will occur at [VAR] the first defrost cycle will occur at
whatever time has been selected. Subsequent whatever time has been selected. Subsequent
defrost cycles will occur based on the amount of defrost cycles will occur based on the amount of
time the previous defrost cycle took to complete. time the previous defrost cycle took to complete.
If [DEF] is set to [FIX] defrost cycles will occur If [DEF] is set to [FIX] defrost cycles will occur
at the selected time interval. at the selected time interval.
Note that defrost cycles can also be initiated Note that defrost cycles can also be initiated
manually or by microprocessor demand (when the manually or by microprocessor demand (when the
temperature sensors indicate that the coil may temperature sensors indicate that the coil may
becoming coated with ice). This feature allows the becoming coated with ice). This feature allows the
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Range Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Range
Setpoints time to be set to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 hours as Setpoints time to be set to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 hours as
required by load conditions. required by load conditions.

3-6 18 October 2001

 Software Description

[DEFNb] [DEF]
Software revision 2003 and later Software revisions prior to 2020
Defrost Intervals Not In Range with Frozen Variable or Fixed Defrost Time Interval
Range Setpoint
Programming Choices - VART or FIXT
Programming Choices - 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours
Factory Setting - FIXT
Factory Setting - 4
Programmed from Guarded Access menu
Programmed from Guarded Access menu
The defrost time intervals chosen in the previous
The microprocessor will automatically initiate a four screens are used as determined by the setting
defrost cycle based on time. There are four of the [DEF] feature. If [DEF] is set to [VART]
separate times to be considered. If the unit is the first defrost cycle will occur at whatever time
operating within a few degrees of setpoint it is has been selected. Subsequent defrost cycles will
considered to be In Range. There are two In occur based on the amount of time the previous
Range time settings - one for setpoints in the defrost cycle took to complete. If [DEF] is set to
Fresh Range and another for setpoints in the [FIXT] defrost cycles will occur at the selected
Frozen Range. If the unit is not operating within a time intervals only. Note that defrost cycles can
few degrees of setpoint it is considered to be Not also be initiated manually or by microprocessor
In Range. There are also two Not In Range time demand. This feature allows the defrost time
settings as above - one for setpoints in the Fresh intervals to be selected as either variable intervals
Range and another for setpoints in the Frozen [VART] or fixed intervals [FIXT] as required by
Range. load conditions.
The time chosen is used as determined by the Software revision 2020
setting of the [DEF] feature. If [DEF] is set to
This feature is set to [FIXT] and the [DEF] screen
[VAR] the first defrost cycle will occur at
does not appear.
whatever time has been selected. Subsequent
defrost cycles will occur based on the amount of
[DDUR]
time the previous defrost cycle took to complete.
If [DEF] is set to [FIX] defrost cycles will occur Defrost Duration
at the selected time interval.
Programming Choices - 30 or 45 minutes
Note that defrost cycles can also be initiated
Factory setting - 45 minutes
manually or by microprocessor demand (when the
temperature sensors indicate that the coil may Programmed from Guarded Access menu
becoming coated with ice). This feature allows the
If the defrost cycle is not terminated
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Range
automatically, the microprocessor will terminate
Setpoints time to be set to 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 hours as
the cycle based on time. This time interval is
required by load conditions.
programmable as either 30 minutes or 45 minutes.
For Revision 2020 and later, the defrost time This screen allows the Defrost Duration to be
interval has been fixed to [FIXT] and this screen adjusted to 30 or 45 minutes.
will no longer be available.
This screen is also used to enter Super Guarded
Access Mode. When the display shows [DDUR],
press and hold both the T/K and CLEAR keys for 5
seconds to enter Super Guarded Access Mode.

18 October 2001 3-7

Software Description

Super Guarded Access Accessing Additional Screens

Programmable Features The additional screens in the Super Guarded
Access menu are accessed by pressing the Select
Entering Super Guarded Access key. Each screen will appear for a maximum of 30
The ZONE 1/HOST switch must be On and seconds if no other key is pressed (such as the UP
Continuous Mode must be selected. Guarded ARROW, DOWN ARROW, ENTER or SELECT key).
Access Mode is first entered by simultaneously If no other key is pressed, the microprocessor
pressing and holding the T/K key and CLEAR key automatically exits Super Guarded Access mode
for 5 seconds. Either the [H6TY] or [CODE] and the display returns to the Standard Display of
screen will appear. If the [CODE] screen appears Return Air Temperature and Setpoint. The screens
it indicates that a Security Code is active to are described in the Screen Descriptions section
prevent unauthorized entry to Guarded Access (on the next page).
and Super Guarded Access mode. The correct
Security Code must be selected with the UP or Embedded Access Features
DOWN arrow keys and then the ENTER key must These embedded (hidden) features are accessed
be pressed. The [H6TY] screen will then appear. by pressing the T/K and CLEAR key
If the wrong Security Code is entered the simultaneously while on the Super Guarded
microprocessor will return to the Standard Access SET.1 screens. The Embedded Access
Display. The [H6TY] screen is the first screen in screens are used to program the setpoint limit
the Guarded Access menu. Press the SELECT key features Setpoint Limit High [STHx] and Setpoint
repeatedly to display [DDUR]. Limit Low [STLx] for each zone, the Ready/Rear
Super Guarded Access is entered by Switch Off Display [RSFD] and the Null Delay
simultaneously pressing and holding the T/K and [NULD].
CLEAR key for 5 seconds when the [DDUR] For more information, refer to Embedded Access
screen is shown on the display. The [CRA1] Programmable Features later in this section. Also,
screen will appear. The microprocessor is now in refer to the flowcharts at the back of the section.
Super Guarded Access Mode.
Programming Aids
Leaving Super Guarded Access
When programming many features at the same
Leaving Super Guarded Access mode can be time such as during the initial setup of a
accomplished in several ways. The easiest and microprocessor, it is wise to obtain and complete a
quickest method is to turn the ZONE 1/HOST copy of Setup Information Sheet contained in
switch off and back on. A second method is to Service Procedure A02A in Section 6 of this
allow the display to time out. This occurs if no manual. Be certain all customer specified settings
key is pressed for approximately 30 seconds. In are included when completing this Setup
any case the microprocessor will automatically Information Sheet. This sheet is then used to
exit Super Guarded Access mode and return to the confirm each entry to be certain the desired setting
Standard Display. are programmed.

3-8 18 October 2001

 Software Description

Screen Descriptions [CRA2]

Calibrate Return Air Sensor Zone 2
[CRA1]
Programming Choices - 1 thru 9
Calibrate Return Air Sensor Zone 1
Factory setting - to match the grade of the
Programming Choices - 1 thru 9
Zone 2 return air sensor installed in the unit
Factory setting - to match the grade of the
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
Zone 1 return air sensor installed in the unit
menu
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
The Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are
menu
specially calibrated sensors to eliminate the need
The Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are for ice water calibration. Each sensor is stamped
specially calibrated sensors to eliminate the need with a grade number from 1L to 9H (27 grades).
for ice water calibration. Each sensor is stamped The grade of the sensor installed should be
with a grade number from 1L to 9H (27 grades). physically checked and recorded. If a sensor is
The grade of the sensor installed should be replaced, the calibration must be performed using
physically checked and recorded. If a sensor is the grade of the new sensor. This screen allows
replaced, the calibration must be performed using the Return Air sensor for Zone 2 to be calibrated.
the grade of the new sensor. This screen allows
the Return Air sensor for Zone 1 to be calibrated. [CDA2]
Calibrate Discharge Air Sensor Zone 2
[CDA1]
(SB-III DE-2 and SB-III DE-3 units only)
Calibrate Discharge Air Sensor Zone 1
Programming Choices - 1 thru 9
Programming Choices - 1 thru 9
Factory setting - to match the grade of the
Factory setting - to match the grade of the
Zone 2 discharge air sensor installed in the unit
Zone 1 discharge air sensor installed in the unit
on SB-III DE-2 and SB-III DE-3 units.
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
menu
The Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are
The Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are
specially calibrated sensors to eliminate the need
specially calibrated sensors to eliminate the need
for ice water calibration. Each sensor is stamped
for ice water calibration. Each sensor is stamped
with a grade number from 1L to 9H (27 grades).
with a grade number from 1L to 9H (27 grades).
The grade of the sensor installed should be
The grade of the sensor installed should be
physically checked and recorded. If a sensor is
physically checked and recorded. If a sensor is
replaced, the calibration must be performed using
replaced, the calibration must be performed using
the grade of the new sensor. This screen allows
the grade of the new sensor. This screen allows
the Discharge Air sensor for Zone 1 to be
the Discharge Air sensor for Zone 2 to be
calibrated.
calibrated.

18 October 2001 3-9

 Software Description

[CRA3] [DEG]
Calibrate Return Air Sensor Zone 3 Degrees displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius
Programming Choices - 1 thru 9 Programming Choices - F (Fahrenheit) or
C (Celsius)
Factory setting - to match the grade of the
Zone 3 return air sensor installed in the unit Factory setting - F
Programmed from Super Guarded Access Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu menu
The Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are The microprocessor can be programmed to
specially calibrated sensors to eliminate the display temperatures in either Fahrenheit or
need for ice water calibration. Each sensor is Celsius degrees.
stamped with a grade number from 1L to 9H
This screen allows the display to be changed to
(27 grades). The grade of the sensor installed
either Fahrenheit or Celsius degrees.
should be physically checked and recorded. If a
sensor is replaced, the calibration must be
[OIL]
performed using the grade of the new sensor.
This screen allows the Return Air sensor for Software revision up to 2013
Zone 3 to be calibrated.
Oil Pressure in PSI, kPa or BARS
[CS A] Programming Choices - PSI, kPa or BARS
CYCLE-SENTRY Amps Factory setting - PSI
Programming Choices - 2 thru 8 amperes Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
Factory setting - 5 amperes
The microprocessor can be programmed to
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
display engine oil pressure in PSI (Pounds per
menu
Square Inch), kPa or BARS. This screen allows
When operating in the CYCLE-SENTRY mode the oil pressure display to be changed to either
the engine will continue to run to charge the PSI, kPa or BARS.
battery until the charging current falls below a
preset limit, even if the unit does not require [OIL]
cooling or heating. This CYCLE-SENTRY
Software revision 2020 and later
Amperes [CS A] limit is selectable from 2 to 8
amperes in 1 ampere steps. This screen allows Use oil switch or oil sender for oil key display
the CYCLE-SENTRY Amps limit to be
Programming Choices - STCH or SNDR
selected.
Factory setting - STCH
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
The microprocessor can be programmed to
display the actual engine oil pressure through
the oil sender or the engine oil status through
the engine oil switch when the oil key is
pressed.

3-10 18 October 2001

 Software Description

For Spectrum™ unit only, the [OIL] prompt must

be sent to STCH as an oil pressure sender does not
exist on the unit.

[PrESr]
(Pressure in PSI, kPa or BARS)
Software revision 2020 and later
Programming Choices - PSI, kPa or BARS
Factory setting - PSI
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
The microprocessor can be programmed to
display pressures in either PSI, kPa or BARS.
This screen allows the display to be changed to
PSI, kPa or BARS.

[SET.1]
Display Setpoint in Whole Degrees or Tenths of
a Degree
Programming Choices - YES (Tenths of a
degree) or nO (Whole Degrees)
Factory setting - nO
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
The microprocessor can be programmed to
display the setpoint temperature in either full
degrees or in tenths of a degree. This screen
allows the setpoint temperature display to be
changed to either full degrees or tenths of a
degree.
The SET.1 screen is also the Entry Screen for the
Embedded Access features. When the display
shows [SET.1], press and hold both the T/K and
CLEAR keys for 5 seconds to enter the Embedded
Access mode.

18 October 2001 3-11

Software Description

[FZHL] Software revision 2020 and later [CSNC] Software revision 2020 and later
Frozen Heat Lockout CYCLE-SENTRY Null to Cool Switch Point
Programming Choices - YES or nO Programming Choices - 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
or 12 degrees Fahrenheit
Factory setting - YES
(2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 degrees Celsius)
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
Factory setting - 5 F or 31 C
menu
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
The microprocessor can be programmed to
menu
lockout heat for a frozen setpoint. If this screen is
set to YES, then there will be no heating in a zone This feature allows the unit to switch to low speed
whose setpoint is at or below 15 F (-9 C). Setting cool from null at the selected number of degrees
[FZHL] to nO allows a frozen load to be heated if above setpoint during CYCLE-SENTRY
it is more than 5 F (3 C) below setpoint. This operation. For example, if the [CSNC] is set to 8 F
screen allows [FZHL] to be set to YES or nO. the unit will switch to low speed cool from null at
8 F above setpoint during CYCLE-SENTRY
[RFIN] Software revision up to 2013 operation. Changing the setting of [DEG] from F
Run Fan In Null to C changes the selecting available as shown.
This screen allows the [CSNC] feature to be set to
Programming Choices - YES or nO 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12 degrees Fahrenheit
Factory setting - nO (2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 degrees Celsius).
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
[HSPD]
menu
High Speed Pull Down
This features allows the fans in a remote
compartment to run when the compartment is in Programming Choices - YES or nO
null to maintain airflow within the compartment Factory setting - YES
(normally used for fresh loads only). If [RFIN] is
set to [YES] the remote compartment fans will run Programmed from Super Guarded Access
for 2 minutes, shut down for 5 minutes and then menu
restart for 2 minutes as long as the zone is in null.
Software revision 2003 and later
Setting [RFIN] to [nO] deactivates this feature.
This screen allows [RFIN] to be set to [YES] or Some loads may benefit from high speed
[nO]. pulldown to setpoint when the unit is first started.
Other loads may not require this feature, which
Revision 2020 and later may result in fuel savings. This feature allows the
Not programmable. The fans will run in null for High Speed Pull Down to setpoint to be turned on
fresh loads. Fans will not run in null for frozen or off as desired. Setting the [HSPD] feature to
loads. The [RFIN] screen does not appear. [YES] will result in the unit pulling all the way to
setpoint in high speed when it is initially started.
The unit will then operate in either high or low
speed as conditions require. Setting [HSPD] to
[nO] will result in both high speed and low speed
operation at all times.

3-12 18 October 2001

 Software Description

[LSSP] If the correct Security Code is not entered, entry

to Guarded Access and Super Guarded Access is
Low Speed Switch Point in Frozen Range
denied and the microprocessor returns to normal
Programming Choices - 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 operation. If a Security Code is entered and active,
or 11 degrees Fahrenheit (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 the [NEWC] screen will not appear. The Security
degrees Celsius) Code must be deactivated before this screen will
reappear. This screen allows [NEWC] to be set to
Factory setting - 5 F (3 C)
the desired number, but does not activate the
Programmed from Super Guarded Access Security Code feature. The Security Code must be
menu activated in order to operate. To activate,
deactivate or bypass a Security Code, see the
Software revision 2003 and later
appropriate Service Procedures.
This screen only appears if [HSPD] = [nO] as
shown previously. This feature allows the unit to [CSBV]
switch to low speed operation at the selected
CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Voltage
number of degrees above setpoint if the
compartment setpoint is in the frozen range and Programming Choices - 11.8 thru 12.6 volts
no other compartment requires high speed
Factory setting - 12.2 volts
operation. For example, if the [LSSP] is set to 8 F
the unit will switch to low speed operation at 8 F Programmed from Super Guarded Access
above setpoint if the compartment setpoint is in menu
the frozen range and no other compartment
When operating in the Diesel CYCLE-SENTRY
requires high speed operation. Changing the
mode the microprocessor will monitor battery
setting of [DEG] from F to C changes the
voltage and will start the unit to charge the battery
selections available as shown. Any compartments
if the battery voltage falls below a pre-set limit,
with fresh range setpoints will go to low speed at
even if the unit does not require cooling or
5 F (2 C) above setpoint. This screen allows the
heating. This CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Voltage
[LSSP] feature to be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
[CSBV] limit is selectable from 11.8 to 12.6 volts
or 11 degrees Fahrenheit (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 degrees
in 0.1 volt steps. The standard setting is 12.2
Celsius).
volts. The engine will continue to run to charge
the battery until the charging current falls below a
[NEWC]
preset limit of between 2 to 8 amps. This limit is
New Code adjusted by changing the setting of
CYCLE-SENTRY Amps [CS A] as shown above.
Programming Choices - 1 thru 9999
This screen allows [CSBV] to be set to the desired
Factory setting - 1 voltage.
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
If necessary, a Security Code can be programmed
into the microprocessor to restrict entry to
Guarded Access and Super Guarded Access. The
desired Security Code (from 1 to 9999) must be
entered using the [NEWC] screen. The Security
Code must then be activated. If a Security Code is
entered and activated, a [CODE] screen appears
when entering Guarded Access.

18 October 2001 3-13

Software Description

[FLSD] [SMX]
Fuel System Shut Down European SMX or US Standard Configuration
Programming Choices - YES or nO Programming Choices - YES (SMX) or nO (US
Standard)
Factory setting - YES
Factory setting - Determined by unit type
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
(SMX or SL = YES, all other units = nO)
menu
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
The Fuel System Shutdown feature senses an out
menu
of fuel condition by monitoring engine RPM in
diesel mode operation. A fluctuating RPM is This screen changes the unit configuration from
interpreted as an out of fuel condition. If [FLSD] domestic US settings to European SMX or SL
is set to [YES] the diesel engine will be shut down settings. This includes rpm specifications, damper
to prevent all fuel from being drawn from the fuel type, and other unit requirements.
lines. This will prevent the need for priming the
fuel pump and/or bleeding the fuel lines. Setting [HC]
[FLSD] to [nO] deactivates this feature. This
Software revision 2003 and later
screen allows [FLSD] to be set to [YES] or [nO].
High Capacity Engine Speed
[SPECT]
Programming Choices - YES or nO
Spectrum™ Unit Configuration
Factory setting - nO
Programming Choices - YES or nO
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
Factory setting - Determined by unit type menu
(Spectrum™ = YES, all other units = nO)
This screen only appears if [SMX] = [YES] as
Programmed from Super Guarded Access shown above. If the unit was built as a high
menu capacity unit, this setting should be set to [YES]
to allow the engine to run 2200 rpm in high speed
Software revision 2020 and later
and 1450 in low speed. If the unit was not built as
This screen changes the unit configuration to a high capacity unit this setting must be set to
Spectrum™ settings. This includes Invertable [nO] to limit the unit to 1600 rpm in high speed
(Reverse Cycle Heat) Control for all Spectrum™ and 1200 rpm in low speed.
units, and rpm specifications for Spectrum™ SL
only. CAUTION: Never set a unit to [YES]
unless it was built as a high capacity unit.
Setting a conventional (not high capacity)
SMX unit to [YES] may result in
dangerous operation and unit damage.

3-14 18 October 2001

 Software Description

[YAN] [PRNT]
Software revision 2003 to 2013 Software Revision 2011 and later
TK 486 LdB engine or TK se 2.2 engine Print from Select Key Menu
Programming Choices - YES (TK 486 LdB Programming Choices - Yes or nO
engine) or nO (TK se 2.2 engine)
Factory setting - nO
Factory setting - YES
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
Programmed from Super Guarded Access menu
menu
This feature allows the PRNT prompt to appear in
If the premium TK 486 LdB engine is installed in the SELECT key menu as well as the TK LOGO
the unit this screen should be set to [YES]. If the key/SELECT menu for units with the optional Data
TK se 2.2 engine is installed this screen should be Logger. Setting [PRNT] to [YES] causes the
set to [nO]. This allows the microprocessor to [PRNT] prompt screen to appear in both the
recognize the intake heater and two stage fuel Select Key menu and the TK LOGO key/SELECT
solenoid coil on the TK 486 LdB engine or the menu. Setting [PRNT] to [nO] allows the prompt
conventional glow plugs and singe coil fuel to appear in the TK LOGO key/SELECT menu only.
solenoid on the TK se 2.2 engine.
[ELOG]
Software Revision 2020
Event Data Logging
Default changed to YES
Programming Choices - YES or nO
[PRNT]
Factory setting - nO
Printer Selection
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
Programming Choices - 40 (columns) or 80 menu
(columns)
This feature allows the data logger option to be set
Factory setting - 40 to perform in one of two ways. Selecting [YES]
sets the data logger as an event data logger (where
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
nearly every event is recorded). Selecting [nO]
menu
sets the data logger for 1 hour time intervals, six
Units with the optional Data Logger can output sensors and minimum event logging (only major
the contents of the Data Logger directly to an events such as unit on/off, mode changes from
Epson® or compatible printer. However, the cool to heat and defrost are recorded). This allows
microprocessor must be told if the printer used is for longer records.
a 40 column or 80 column printer. This screen
allows [PRNT] to be set to 40 or 80 columns.

18 October 2001 3-15

Software Description

[RSWH] [HCSP]
Retain Switch Setting on Host Heat/Cool Switch Point
Programming Choices - YES or nO (Only appears if RNUL above is set [nO])
Factory setting - YES Programming Choices - 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0
Programmed from Super Guarded Access Factory setting - 1.5
menu
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
This feature is not currently used. menu
Software Revision 2012 and 2013
[FSII]
If RNUL (above) is set to [nO] a zone will cycle
Fuel Saver II
heat/cool after setpoint is reached. The zone will
Programming Choices - YES or nO cool to setpoint and then switch to heat until the
setpoint rises above setpoint to the setting of
Factory setting - YES
HCSP. When this temperature is reached the zone
Programmed from Super Guarded Access cycles back to cool until setpoint is reached and
menu then switches back to heat again.
This feature allows an 8 minute delay before high Software Revision 2020
speed operation is resumed on restarts from null in
This feature has been removed.
order to obtain additional fuel savings. However,
if the compartment changes more than 12 F above
or below setpoint high speed is allowed
immediately. Selecting [YES] activates the 8
minute delay on restarts from null. Setting [FSII]
to [nO] deactivates this feature.

[RNUL]
Software Revision 2012 and 2013
Running Null
Programming Choices - YES or nO
Factory setting - YES
Programmed from Super Guarded Access
menu
Setting this feature [YES] allows a zone to enter
running null when zone setpoint demands are
satisfied (for fresh loads only). Setting this feature
to [nO] causes a zone where setpoint demands are
satisfied to cycle between heat and cool. The zone
will cool to setpoint and then switch to heat until
the setpoint rises above setpoint to the setting of
HCSP (see below). When this temperature is
reached the zone cycles back to cool until setpoint
is reached and then switches back to heat again.
Software Revision 2020
This feature has been removed.

3-16 18 October 2001

 Software Description

Embedded Access [STL1]

Programmable Features Setpoint Limit Low

Accessing Embedded Screens Programming Choices - minimum of -25 F (-32

C), maximum = as determined by Setpoint
The Embedded screens are used to program the Limit High (STH1) shown above
setpoint limit features Setpoint Limit High
[STHx] and Setpoint Limit Low [STLx] for each Factory setting - minus 20 F (-29 C)
zone, the Ready/Rear Switch Off Display [RSFD] Programmed from Embedded Access menu
and the Null Delay [NULD].
The Setpoint Limit Low Zone 1 [STL1] allows
These embedded (hidden) features are accessed the lower setpoint limit to be set to a minimum of
by pressing and holding the T/K key and CLEAR -25 F (-32 C) in one degree increments. The
key for 5 seconds while the Super Guarded maximum setting available is determined by the
Access [SET.1] screen is displayed. See the setting of Setpoint Limit High Zone 1 [STH1] as
flowcharts at the back of this section for shown above. If the driver attempts to select a
additional information. setpoint lower than the Setpoint Limit Low the
microprocessor will display [STL1], indicating
Screen Descriptions that the selected Setpoint Limit Low for Zone 1
has been reached. Setting the Setpoint Limit High
[STH1] [STH1] as shown above and the Setpoint Limit
Setpoint Limit High Zone 1 Low [STL1] to the same temperature results in a
single setpoint for Zone 1 being available to the
Programming Choices - maximum = 90 F driver. It is accessed and changed from the
(32 C), minimum = as determined by STL1 Embedded Access screens.
(Setpoint Limit Low Zone 1) shown below
Factory setting - 80 F (27 C) [STH2]

Programmed from Embedded Access menu Setpoint Limit High Zone 2

The Setpoint Limit High Zone 1 [STH1] allows Programming Choices - maximum = 90 F
the upper setpoint limit for Zone 1 to be set to a (32 C), minimum = as determined by STL2
maximum of 90 F (32 C) in one degree (Setpoint Limit Low Zone 2) shown below
increments. The minimum setting available is Factory setting - 80 F (27 C)
determined by the setting of Setpoint Limit Low
Zone 1 [STL1] as shown below. If the driver Programmed from Embedded Access menu
attempts to select a setpoint for Zone 1 higher Setpoint Limit High Zone 2 works the same as
than the Setpoint limit High the microprocessor Setpoint Limit High Zone 1.
will display [STH1], indicating that the selected
Setpoint Limit High has been reached.
Setting the Setpoint Limit High [STH1] and the
Setpoint Limit Low [STL1] as shown below to the
same temperature results in a single setpoint for
Zone 1 being available to the driver. It is accessed
and changed from the Embedded Access screens.

18 October 2001 3-17

Software Description

[STL2] [RSFD]
Setpoint Limit Low Ready/Remote Switch Off Display
Programming Choices - minimum of -25 F Programming Choices - YES or nO
(-32 C), maximum = as determined by Setpoint
Factory setting - YES
Limit High (STH2) shown above
Programmed from Embedded Access menu
Factory setting - minus 20 F (-29 C)
This feature is used to determine the method of
Programmed from Embedded Access menu
displaying other zone modes when the
Setpoint Limit Low Zone 2 works the same as ZONE 1/HOST is turned off with the optional
Setpoint Limit Low Zone 1. remote control panel. If this feature is
programmed [YES] and Zone 1 is turned off with
[STH3] the optional remote control panel, all other zones
that are turned on will display [OFF]. If this
Setpoint Limit High Zone 3
feature is programmed [nO] and Zone 1 is turned
Programming Choices - maximum = 90 F off with the remote control panel, all other zones
(32 C), minimum = as determined by STL3 that are turned on will display [Stb] (standby).
(Setpoint Limit Low Zone 3) shown below This indicates that another zone is being
prevented from running because the
Factory setting - 80 F (27 C)
ZONE 1/HOSTis turned off.
Programmed from Embedded Access menu
[NULD]
Setpoint Limit High Zone 3 works the same as
Setpoint Limit High Zone 1. Null Delay
Programming Choices - YES or nO
[STL3]
Factory setting - nO
Setpoint Limit Low
Programmed from the Embedded Access menu
Programming Choices - minimum of -25 F
(-32 C), maximum = as determined by Setpoint This feature forces a minimum 8 minute null time
Limit High (STH3) shown above before a restart from null in order to obtain
additional fuel savings and prevent short cycling.
Factory setting - minus 20 F (-29 C)
However, if the compartment changes more than
Programmed from Embedded Access menu 12 F above or below setpoint a restart is initiated
immediately. Selecting [YES] activates the 8
Setpoint Limit Low Zone 3 works the same as
minute delay on restarts from null. Setting
Setpoint Limit Low Zone 1.
[NULD] to [nO] deactivates this feature.

3-18 18 October 2001

 Software Description

µP-IV Multi-Temp Menu Overview

Guarded Access, Super Guarded Access, and Embedded Access Screens
Software Revision thru 2013

18 October 2001 3-19

Software Description

µP-IV Multi-Temp Menu Overview

Guarded Access, Super Guarded Access, and Embedded Access Screens
Software Revision 2020 and later

3-20 18 October 2001

Section 4
Operation
Multi-Temperature µP-IV Front Panel. . . . . .4-2 Types of Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Stored Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Multi-Temperature µP-IV Display . . . . . . . . .4-3
Check Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Multi-Temperature µP-IV Keypad . . . . . . . . .4-4 Shutdown Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Multi-Temperature µP-IV Switch Panel . . . .4-5 Alarm Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Unit Pretrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
ZONE 1/HOST Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
ZONE 2 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Initiating a Full PreTrip Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
ZONE 3 Switch (only on units equipped for Displaying the Software Revision Number4-21
three zone operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Operating Service Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Multi-Temperature µP-IV Standard Display .4-6
Service Test Mode Functions. . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Changing the Setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Low Side Evacuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous
Operating Relay Board Test Mode. . . . . . . 4-25
Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Relay Board Test Mode Functions. . . . . . . 4-26
Starting the Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Optional Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle . . . . . . . .4-10
Keypad Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Select Key Prompt and Display Screens. . 4-11 Understanding the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
TK Logo / Select Key Prompt and Display
Reading a Typical Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
The Standard Display for a Zone . . . . . . . 4-29
Displaying Engine and Hourmeter Changing the Setpoint in a Zone . . . . . . . 4-29
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13 LOSt COn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes . . . . . .4-14
Alarms and Alarm Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Displaying Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Alarms in a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
Clearing Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
 Operation
MULTI-TEMPERATURE µP-IV FRONT PANEL VERSIONS

Multi-Temp µP-IV microprocessor front panels

prior to May, 2001 appeared as shown here. This
microprocessor operated exactly the same as the
newer version shown below.

After May, 2001 the Multi-Temp µP-IV

microprocessor front panels were changed to
appear as shown here. This was an appearance
change only, the microprocessor operates exactly
the same as the older version shown above.

18 October 2001 4-1

Operation

Multi-Temperature µP-IV Front Panel

DISPLAY: The display normally
shows the Standard Display of
return air temperature and setpoint
for all zones whose ON/OFF
switches are turned on. All zones
will alternate in the display, with
each zone appearing for about 10
seconds. When the ZONE 1/HOST
switch is turned on, the other zones
will show box temperature and
[OFF] if the zone is turned off and
box temperature and setpoint if the
zone is turned on. The zone being
shown is identified by the zone
icon in the lower right corner of
the display. Other unit and
operating information can also be
shown. All possible segments and
operating icons are shown in this
illustration.
KEYPAD: These touch sensitive
keys are used to change the
setpoint, view operating conditions
and other unit information and to
control the unit.
SWITCH PANEL: These switches
are used to turn the zones on and
off. Since the ZONE 1/HOST switch
controls the Host unit as well as
Zone 1, it must be turned "on"
before any other zones will
operate.

NOTE: The illustrations in this manual show an SB-III DE3 unit. Other SB-III and Super-II
Multi-Temperature units have identical controls that function in the same way. However, some of
these controls may be mounted in different locations.

4-2 18 October 2001

 Operation

Multi-Temperature µP-IV Display

DISPLAY: Normally shows
Standard Display of return air
temperature and setpoint for all
zones that are turned "on". Icons
and other unit operating
information can also be shown
here. All possible segments and
icons are shown here.

ICONS: An icon (symbol) will

appear next to the appropriate
description when the unit is
operating in that mode. The Zone
Icons indicate which zone is
currently being displayed.
MODE or ZONE DESCRIPTION:

These descriptions identify the

icons.

COOL ICON: Appears when the indicated zone is operating in cool mode.
HEAT ICON: Appears when the indicated zone is operating in heat mode.
DEFROST ICON: Appears when the indicated zone is in a defrost cycle.
HIGH SPEED ICON: Appears when the unit is operating in high speed.
ELECTRIC ICON: Appears when the unit is operating in optional Electric Standby mode.
SETPOINT ICON: Appears when the setpoint for the indicated zone is shown in the lower
display.
CYCLE-SENTRY ICON: Appears when the unit is operating in CYCLE-SENTRY mode.
ALARM ICON: Appears when the microprocessor detects an alarm condition.
ZONE ICONS: Appear to indicate which zone is currently being shown in the display.
All zones will be shown in turn (each for about 10 seconds) when the Zone 1/Host switch is
turned on.

18 October 2001 4-3

Operation

Multi-Temperature µP-IV Keypad

HOURMETER Key: Press to display

Total Hours, Engine Hours, Electric
Hours, Zone 1 Hours, Zone 2 Hours
and Programmable Hours.
OIL PRESSURE Key: Press to display
diesel engine oil pressure.

WATER TEMPERATURE Key: Press to

display diesel engine coolant
temperature.
AMPS Key: Press to display current
flow to or from the unit battery.

THERMO KING LOGO Key: Used to

initiate a Pretrip Test and display
Clock/Calendar or Software
revision.
CLEAR Key: Press to clear the alarm
shown in the display.

CODE Key: Press to display any

alarm codes that may be present.
[00] means no alarms are present.

ENTER Key: Press to load a new

setpoint or other displayed setting
or to execute a prompt.

UP and DOWN ARROW Keys: Press to

increase or decrease the setpoint or
other displayed setting or to change
a displayed prompt.
SELECT Key: Press to select other
prompt or display screens.

4-4 18 October 2001

 Operation

Multi-Temperature µP-IV Switch Panel

CAUTION: THE UNIT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY ANY TIME THE ZONE 1/HOST
SWITCH IS IN THE "ON" POSITION.

Figure 1: Multi-Temp µP-IV Switch Panel

Definitions
HOST UNIT: The Host Unit is the transport temperature control unit (such as an SB-III DE or Super-II TCI
that supports the operation of the remote evaporator units. The evaporator coil on the host unit serves the
first or primary compartment.
REMOTE EVAPORATOR UNIT: The remote evaporator unit consists of an evaporator coil, a fan or blower
and temperature sensors. One (or two) remote evaporators are located in each secondary compartment.
ZONE: A Zone defines the compartment being referred to. "Zone 1/Host" is always the compartment
served directly by the host unit (the streetside compartment in a SB-III DE unit). Zone 2 is the first
compartment served by a remote evaporator unit (or the curbside compartment in a SB-III DE unit). Zone
3 is the third compartment on applications featuring three temperature controlled compartments.

ZONE 1/HOST Switch

Turning the ZONE 1/HOST switch "on" enables Zone 1 and host unit operation. Zone 1 is always the zone
that is directly controlled by the host unit. On SB-III DE3 and SB-III DE2 this is the streetside
compartment. On all other units it is the zone located in the nose of the trailer and is served directly by the
host unit. Since Zone 1/Host is the host unit, it must be turned "on" before any other zones will operate.

ZONE 2 Switch
Turning the ZONE 2 switch "on" or "off" will start and stop Zone 2 operation. Zone 2 is the curbside
compartment of SB-III DE3 and SB-III DE2 units. On all other units Zone 2 is typically the second
compartment located directly behind Zone 1 and is served by one or more remote evaporators. The ZONE
1/HOST switch must be turned "on" before this switch can be used.

ZONE 3 Switch (only on units equipped for three zone operation)

Turning the ZONE 3 switch "on" or "off" will start and stop Zone 3 operation. Zone 3 is a third
temperature controlled compartment and is served by a remote evaporator. The ZONE 1/HOST switch
must be turned "on" before this switch can be used.

18 October 2001 4-5

Operation

Multi-Temperature µP-IV Standard Display

RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE: The

return air temperature shown here
is 50.8 degrees Fahrenheit.

ZONE ICON: The Zone Icon

indicates that Zone 1 is currently
shown in the display.

SETPOINT: The setpoint shown here

is 35 degrees Fahrenheit.

STANDARD DISPLAY: The Standard

Display shows the return air
temperature and setpoint for each
zone. All zones will alternate in the
display, each for 10 seconds. The
Zone Icon shows which zone is
currently being displayed.

NOTE: The other Icons show that

the unit is in CYCLE-SENTRY
mode and Zone 1 is operating in
High Speed Cool. The Standard
Display will alternate between
Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3.

CAUTION: THE UNIT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY ANY TIME THE ZONE 1/HOST
SWITCH IS IN THE "ON" POSITION.

NOTE: The Standard Display is the starting point to reach all other prompt and display screens.
NOTE: To return to the Standard Display from any other prompt or display screen, turn the ZONE
1/HOST switch "off" and back "on".

4-6 18 October 2001

 Operation

Changing the Setpoint

1. Turn "on" the Zone 1/Host
switch and the zone switches
for all other zones where the
setpoint is to be changed.
2. Press the Select key to
display the Standard Display
for the zone whose setpoint
is to be changed. Zone 2 is
selected here.
3. Press the Up or Down Arrow
keys as required to select the
new setpoint.
4. When the desired new
setpoint is shown in the
display, the Enter key must
be pressed in order to load
the new setpoint into the
microprocessor. The display
will briefly show [LOAD]
and the new setpoint will
then be shown in the display.
5. Check the setpoint shown in
the display against the zone
shown in the display to be
certain that the setpoint was
changed for the desired zone.
6. Change the setpoint as
required for other zones by
repeating these steps.

CAUTION: THE UNIT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY ANY TIME THE ZONE 1/HOST
SWITCH IS IN THE "ON" POSITION.

IMPORTANT: The ENTER key must be pressed in order to change the setpoint! If the ENTER key is
not pressed the setpoint will return to the old setpoint about 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to check the setpoint shown in the display against the zone shown in the
display to be certain that the setpoint was changed for the desired zone.

18 October 2001 4-7

Operation

Selecting CYCLE-SENTRY or Continuous Mode

1. Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch
"on".

NOTE: The CYCLE-SENTRY

Icon will appear when
CYCLE-SENTRY mode is
selected.

2. Press the SELECT key to display

[CYCLS] and [YES] or [NO].

3. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW

keys as required to select [NO]
or [YES]. [NO] = Continuous
Mode, [YES] =
CYCLE-SENTRY Mode.
4. When the desired mode is
shown in the display, the ENTER
key must be pressed to load the
new mode into the
microprocessor. The display
will briefly show [LOAD] and
the new mode will then be
shown in the display.

CAUTION: THE UNIT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY IN EITHER CYCLE-SENTRY OR

CONTINUOUS MODE ANY TIME THE ZONE 1/HOST SWITCH IS IN THE "ON"
POSITION.

IMPORTANT: The ENTER key must be pressed in order to change the operating mode! If the ENTER
key is not pressed the mode will return to the old mode about 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
IMPORTANT: Selecting [YES] = CYCLE-SENTRY mode, selecting [NO] = Continuous mode.

4-8 18 October 2001

 Operation

Starting the Diesel Engine

CAUTION: THE UNIT
MAY START
AUTOMATICALLY IN
EITHER CYCLE-SENTRY
OR CONTINUOUS MODE
ANY TIME THE ZONE
1/HOST SWITCH IS IN
THE "ON" POSITION
1. Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch
"on".
2. If the unit is in Continuous
mode, the engine will
automatically preheat and start
in about 10 seconds if no other
key is pressed.
or
If the unit is in
CYCLE-SENTRY mode and
cooling, heating or defrost is
required in any zone that is
turned "on", the engine will
automatically preheat and
crank. If all zones that are
turned "on" are satisfied and an
engine start is not required to
heat the engine or charge the
battery, the start will remain in
Null mode.
NOTE: If other keys are pressed
within 10 seconds of turning the
ZONE 1/HOST switch "on", the
engine start will be delayed until
10 seconds after the last key is
pressed.

CAUTION: THE UNIT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY IN EITHER CYCLE-SENTRY OR

CONTINUOUS MODE ANY TIME THE ZONE 1/ HOST SWITCH IS IN THE "ON"
POSITION.

18 October 2001 4-9

 Operation

Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle

1. The ZONE 1/HOST and any
other zone switches where
defrost is desired must be
turned "on" and the evaporator
coil temperature for the zone
must be below 45 F before the
defrost prompt will appear.

2. Press the SELECT key to display

the [dEF] prompt for the
desired zone. Zone 1 is shown
here.

3. Press the ENTER key to start a

defrost cycle in the selected
zone. The display will briefly
show [LOAD] and a defrost
cycle will then be initiated in
the selected zone.

NOTE: The defrost Icon will

appear when a zone enters a
defrost cycle.

CAUTION: THE UNIT MAY START AUTOMATICALLY IN EITHER CYCLE-SENTRY OR

CONTINUOUS MODE ANY TIME THE ZONE 1/ HOST SWITCH IS IN THE "ON"
POSITION.

IMPORTANT: The ENTER key must be pressed in order to initiate a manual defrost cycle! If the
ENTER key is not pressed a manual defrost cycle will not be initiated and the display will return to
the Standard Display in about 10 seconds.
IMPORTANT: The defrost prompt for a zone will not appear unless the that zone is turned on and
the evaporator coil temperature for that zone is less than 45 F.

4-10 18 October 2001

 Operation

Select Key Prompt and Display Screens

1. Press the SELECT key to view
the prompt and display screens
as shown below. The
description and value of each
display screen will appear in the
display in the order shown at
the bottom of this page.
NOTE: The Defrost Prompt for a
specific zone will only appear if
that zones ON/OFF switch is "on"
and that zones coil temperature is
below 45 F.
NOTE: The Zone 2 Discharge Air
Sensor display and the Zone 2
Temperature Differential display
only appear on SB-III DE3 and
SB-III DE2 units.

Select Key Prompt and Display Screens

[PRNT] DAS or Data Logger Print Prompt Screen (Software ver later than 2011 and enabled in SGA)
[DEF1] Defrost Zone 1 prompt (only if Zone 1 On/Off switch is "on" and Zone 1 coil temp is < 45 F)
[CYCLS] CYCLE-SENTRY prompt
Zone 2 Standard Display Zone 2 prompt
[DEF2] Defrost Zone 2 prompt (only if Zone 2 On/Off switch is "on" and Zone 2 coil temp is < 45 F)
Zone 3 Standard Display Zone 3 prompt
[DEF3] Defrost Zone 3 prompt (only if Zone 3 On/Off switch is "on" and Zone 3 coil temp is < 45 F)
[AMB.T] Ambient Temp display
[BAT.V] Battery Voltage display
[RPM] Diesel Engine RPM display
[HED.P] Head (Discharge) Pressure display
[RET.A] Return Air Temp Zone 1 display
[DIS.A] Discharge Air Temp Zone 1 display
[TPDF] Temp Differential Zone 1 display
[COIL] Evap Coil Temp Zone 1 display
[DAS.x] DAS Sensors (if present and detected)
[RET.A] Return Air Temp Zone 2 display
[DIS.A] Discharge Air Temp Zone 2 display (only on SB-III DE units)
[TPDF] Temp Differential Zone 2 display (only on SB-III DE units)
[COIL] Evap Coil Temp Zone 2 display
[RET.A] Return Air Temp Zone 3 display
[COIL] Evap Coil Temp Zone 3 display

18 October 2001 4-11

Operation

TK Logo / Select Key Prompt and Display Screens

1. Press both the T/K LOGO key
and the SELECT key for 5
seconds to view the prompt and
display screens shown below.
The description and value of
each display screen will appear
in the display in the order
shown at the bottom of this
page. Software revision is
shown here.

TK Logo / Select Key Prompt and Display Screens

[PrE TRIP] Pretrip Test prompt
[PRNT] Print current data logger record
[REV] Software Revision
[YEAR] Clock/calendar current year
[MNTH] Clock/calendar current month
[DAY] Clock/calendar current day
[DATE] Clock/calendar current date
[HOUR] Clock/calendar current hour
[MIN] Clock/calendar current minute
[SOT] Data logger start of trip marker

4-12 18 October 2001

 Operation

Displaying Engine and Hourmeter Information

HOURS Key: Pressing this key
displays the unit hourmeters in the
order shown below:
[TLHR] Total switch on hours
[ENHR] Total diesel engine hours
[ELHR] Total electric hours
[TLZ2] Total Zone 2 hours
[TLZ3] Total Zone 3 hours
[HRM6] Programmable
OIL PRESS Key: Pressing this key dis-
plays the diesel engine oil pressure
status if [OIL] in SGA is set to
STCH and actual engine oil pressure
if [OIL] in SGA is set to SNDR.
WATER TEMP Key: Pressing this key
displays the diesel engine coolant
temperature as shown here.
AMPS Key: Pressing this key
displays current flow to or from the
units battery. A negative number (-)
indicates a discharge condition.

18 October 2001 4-13

Operation

Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes

1. If an alarm or alarms are
present, the Alarm Icon will
appear. It is possible to have
more than one alarm at a time.

NOTE: If an alarm is specific to a

zone, the appropriate Zone Icon
will also appear.

NOTE: The alarm shown here is a

Code 66 Low Oil Level alarm.
None of the zone icons would
appear.

2. When the Alarm Icon is

present, press the CODE key to
view the alarm. Pressing the
CODE key again will display
any additional alarms that may
exist. If no alarm codes are
present, the code [00] appears
when the CODE key is pressed.
Consult the tables on the
following pages for an
explanation of alarm codes.
3. After the condition that caused
the alarm code has been
corrected, press the CODE key
again to display the alarm.
While the alarm code is shown
in the display, press the CLEAR
key to clear the alarm. Repeat
the procedure for additional
alarms.

IMPORTANT: Always record all alarm codes that are present.

NOTE: Alarm codes are displayed in the order they occurred, with the most recent alarm code
appearing first.
NOTE: If the condition that caused the alarm has not been corrected, the alarm code will continue to
appear.
NOTE: See the following pages for additional information and a table of alarm codes.

4-14 18 October 2001

 Operation

Alarms and Alarm Codes Types of Alarms

If an abnormal condition is sensed by the There are three types of alarms, described below.
microprocessor, an alarm code is generated and An alarm may occur individually or along with
saved in memory. There can be more than one other alarms. There can be more than one alarm
alarm present at one time. An alarm code will present at one time. If an alarm pertains to only a
remain in memory until it is cleared. specific zone, the Zone Icon for that zone will be
displayed along with the alarm code. Alarms that
The Alarm Icon will appear in the display to
occurred during a Pretrip Test will be preceded by
indicate that an alarm has been sensed. If the
a dash (-).
alarm occurred during a Pretrip Test it will be
preceded by a dash (-). The Alarm Code Definitions table on the
following pages shows the complete list of
These alarm codes will direct a service technician
possible alarm codes and their definitions. In case
to the source of a problem. Always record any
of problems, always record any alarm codes
alarm codes present, they will be invaluable to the
shown. They will be invaluable to the service
service technician.
technician in determining the cause of the
problem.
Displaying Alarms
If the Alarm Icon appears on the display, press the Stored Alarm
CODE key to display the alarm code. Press the
A stored alarm indicates that a condition exists
CODE key again to display any other alarm codes
that does not affect unit operation but that should
that may be present.
be investigated. The Alarm Icon will appear for
30 seconds when the unit ON/OFF Switch is
Alarms in a Zone turned "on" and then disappear.
If an alarm is generated by a specific zone, the
Zone Icon will appear when that alarm code is Check Alarm
displayed.
A check alarm gives notice to take corrective
action before an abnormal condition becomes
Clearing Alarms severe. The Alarm icon will appear and remain
To clear an alarm after the alarm condition is "on".
corrected, press the CODE key to display the alarm
and then press the CLEAR key to clear it. Repeat Shutdown Alarm
this process for any additional alarms.
A shutdown alarm indicates conditions that may
If the alarm condition has not been corrected it damage the unit. The unit will automatically shut
will continue to appear, even though it has been down, the Alarm Icon will appear and the entire
cleared. display will flash "on" and "off".

18 October 2001 4-15

Operation

Alarm Code Definitions

Always record any alarm codes shown.
Alarm codes preceded by a dash (-) were detected during a Pretrip Test.

Shut
Stored Check Code Description
Down

00 No fault

X 02 Evaporator Coil Sensor

X 03 Return Air Sensor

X 04 Discharge Air Sensor

X 05 Ambient Air Sensor

X 06 Engine Water Temp Sensor

X 07 Engine RPM Sensor

X 08 Remote Return Air Sensor

X 09 High Evaporator Temperature

X 10 High Discharge Pressure

X 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor

X 12 Sensor Shut Down

X 13 Check Sensor Calibration

X X 15 Glow Plug Check

X 17 Engine Failed to Crank

X 18 High Engine Water Temperature

X 19 Low Engine Oil Pressure

X 20 Engine Failed to Start

X 21 Cooling Cycle Check

X 22 Heating Cycle Check

X X 25 Alternator Check

X 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity

X 28 Pretrip Abort

X 29 Damper Circuit

X X 30 Damper Stuck Closed

4-16 18 October 2001

 Operation

Shut
Stored Check Code Description
Down

X X 31 Oil Pressure Switch

X X 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low

X 33 Check Engine RPM

X X 35 Run Relay Circuit

X 36 Electric Motor Failed to Run/Loose Belt

X 37 Check Engine Water Level

X 40 High Speed Circuit

X 41 Engine Water Temperature Check

X 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed

X 44 Fuel System

X 45 Hot Gas Circuit

X 47 Remote Sensor Shutdown

X 48 Check Belts or Clutch

X 50 Reset Clock

X 52 Heat Circuit

X 54 Test Mode Timeout

X 55 Check Engine Speeds

X X 61 Low Battery Volts

X 62 Ammeter Out of Cal Range

X 63 Engine Stopped

X 64 Pretrip Reminder

X X 66 Low Engine Oil Level

X 67 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit

X 68 µP Internal Fault Code

X 70 Hourmeter Failure

X 73 Hourmeter 6 Exceed Set Limit

X 74 µP Reverted to Default Settings

X X 75 µP Internal Fault Code

18 October 2001 4-17

Operation

Shut
Stored Check Code Description
Down

X X 76 µP Internal Fault Code

X X 77 µP Internal Fault Code

X X 78 µP Internal Fault Code

X 79 Data Log Overflow

X 105 Receiver Tank Press Solenoid Circuit

X 106 Purge Valve Circuit

X 107 Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit

X 108 Door Open Timeout

X 109 High Discharge Pressure or Sensor

X 110 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit

X 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly

X 112 Remote Fan Zone 2-3 Circuit

X 113 Electric Heat Circuit

X 114 Multiple Alarms, Cannot Run

4-18 18 October 2001

 Operation

Unit Pretrip Test 7. RPM Check

The Unit Pretrip Test is a functional test of the The diesel engine RPM is checked in both
unit’s operating capability. Once the test is started high and low speed.
by the operator it is fully automatic and requires 8. Low Speed Cooling Capacity Check
no operator attendance.
The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is
1. Starting The Pretrip Test checked.
The following steps are used to start a Pretrip 9. Heating Capacity Check
Test:
The ability of the unit to heat is checked.
• Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch on.
10. Defrost Damper Check
• Turn on the ZONE switches for all other
zones to be tested. If the Zone is not turned The operation of the damper door is checked.
on, it will not be tested. 11. Low Speed Cooling Capacity Check
• Clear any alarms. A second low speed cooling capacity check is
• Press and hold the T/K key for at least 3 performed to insure that the unit can switch
seconds until the Pretrip Test [PrE] [TRIP] from cool to heat and back to cool.
prompt screen appears. 12. Pretrip Test Report
• Press the ENTER key. The display will At the completion of the Unit Self Check, the
briefly show [LOAD] and the unit will check results will appear on the display. They
then start the Pretrip Test. will remain on the display until any key is
2. Clear Any Alarms pressed. Pretrip Test results are shown as
either PASS, CHEC or FAIL.
If any alarms were not cleared before starting
the Pretrip Test, they will be displayed at this [PASS]: The unit has passed the Pretrip Test.
time. They can be cleared by pressing the [CHEC]: Stored or check alarm conditions
ENTER key. were detected during the Pretrip Test. These
The balance of the Pretrip Test is fully alarms will be preceded by a dash (-) to
automatic and requires no operator indicate that they were detected during a
attendance. Pretrip Test. They should be corrected as soon
as possible.
3. Control Component Test
[FAIL]: Shutdown alarm conditions were
Each electrical control component will be detected during the Pretrip Test and the unit
energized and the current drawn is confirmed. has been shut down to prevent possible
4. Preheat and Start damage. This will occur as soon as a
shutdown condition is detected. The test will
The microprocessor will automatically preheat not be completed. These alarms will be
and start the diesel engine. preceded by a dash (-) to indicate that they
5. Display Check were detected during a Pretrip Test. The
alarms must be corrected and the Pretrip Test
All segments of the display will be lighted at repeated before releasing the unit for service.
the same time.
6. Show Programmable Settings
All programmable settings will be
sequentially displayed. These settings may be
verified by the operator if necessary.

18 October 2001 4-19

Operation

Initiating a Full PreTrip Test

1. Turn "on" the ZONE 1/HOST
switch and the switches for all
other zones that are to be
checked during the Pretrip.
2. Clear all alarms using the CODE
and CLEAR keys.
3. When the Standard Display
appears and before the engine
starts, press and hold the T/K
LOGO key until [PrE TRIP] is
shown in the display.
4. Press the ENTER key to start a
Pretrip test. The display will
briefly show [LOAD] and the
unit will then begin a Pretrip
test. All zones that are turned
"on" will be tested.
5. When the Pretrip test is
complete, the display will
report the results as follows:
[PASS TRIP]: No alarms were
found during the Pretrip test.
[CHEC TRIP]: One or more
check alarms were found during
the Pretrip test. These should be
corrected as soon as possible.
[FAIL TRIP] Shutdown alarms
were found during the Pretrip
test. These must be corrected
immediately and the Pretrip test
must be repeated before
releasing the unit for service.
NOTE: The ENTER key must be pressed to start the Pretrip test. If the ENTER key is not pressed the
display will return to the Standard Display after about 10 seconds.
NOTE: The Pretrip test should not be interrupted unless absolutely necessary. If the Pretrip test
must be halted, turn the ZONE 1/ HOST switch "off". This will generate one or more alarms,
including Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort. This is normal.
NOTE: Only those zones whose ON/OFF switches are "on" will be tested.
NOTE: Alarm codes generated during a Pretrip test are preceded by a dash (-).

4-20 18 October 2001

 Operation

Displaying the Software Revision Number

1. Turn "on" the ZONE 1/HOST

switch.

2. When the Standard Display

appears, press and hold the T/K
LOGO key until [PrE TRIP] is
shown in the display.

3. Press the SELECT key as

required to display [REV] and
the software revision number.
The revision number shown
here is 2000.

NOTE: The software revision is important to the service technician when servicing the unit.

18 October 2001 4-21

Operation

Operating Service Test Mode

Service Test Mode allows the unit to be forced to a known operating condition regardless of
temperature or sensor inputs. The diesel engine can be either running or stopped. The unit will remain
in any Service Test Mode function for a maximum of 15 minutes if no other function is selected. If no
other function has been selected at the end of 15 minutes the unit will shut down and record Alarm
Code 54 - Test Mode Timeout.

1. The unit cannot be in a defrost

cycle in any zone, cannot be in
a pretrip test and cannot be in
sleep mode.
2. Turn "on" the ZONE 1/HOST
switch, Zone 2 switch and Zone
3 switch (if present). If desired,
allow the diesel engine to start.
3. When the Standard Display
appears, press and hold the T/K
LOGO key until [PrE TRIP] is
shown in the display.
4. Press the SELECT key as
required to display [REV] and
the software revision number.
5. When the Revision display
appears, press and hold both the
T/K LOGO key and the CLEAR
key as required to display [tESt]
and [VAC] or [C1]. [VAC] will
appear if the engine is not
running, [C1] will appear if the
engine is running. The unit is
now in Service Test Mode.
6. Use the UP and DOWN ARROW
keys to select the desired
Service Test Mode function. A
complete list of functions
appears on the next page.

NOTE: VAC mode requires that a battery charger be attached to the unit to maintain the battery
voltage at 13.5 volts. The unit will remain in [VAC] mode; it will not time out.
NOTE: The unit will operate in any Service Test Mode except [VAC] function for 15 minutes. If no
other function is selected, the unit will shut down in 15 minutes and generate an Alarm Code 54 -
Service Test Mode Timeout.

4-22 18 October 2001

 Operation

Service Test Mode Functions

The four Service Test Mode functions are Cool Mode, Heat Mode, Defrost Mode and Null. After entering
Service Test Mode as shown on the previous page, use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select the
desired function. When the desired function appears in the lower display, press the ENTER to load the
function.
Each zone can be set individually to one of the four possible functions. However, the following rules
apply:
1. Cool, Heat or Defrost must be selected in at least one zone.
2. If all zones are in Cool the unit will run in high speed.
3. The Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS) is energized for heat in any zone if discharge pressure is <250
psig. The Condenser Inlet Solenoid is de-energized for heat in any zone whenever discharge pressure
is >400 psig.
4. The Purge Valve and Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid are energized for any heat cycle if discharge
pressure is <225 psig. They are de-energized in any heat cycle if discharge pressure is > 300 psig.
5. Check High Speed operation off transducer. Excessive discharge pressure will force low speed
operation.
All SELECT key and display key functions can be used while in Service Test Mode and all protection
devices such as the low oil pressure switch and high pressure cutout switch remain active.

Function Description
[VAC] Evacuation Mode (Only appears if engine is NOT running)
[C1] Cool Mode Zone 1
[H1] Heat Mode Zone 1
[DEF1] Defrost Mode Zone 1
[NUL1] Null Zone 1
[C2] Cool Mode Zone 2
[H2] Heat Mode Zone 2
[DEF2] Defrost Mode Zone 2
[NUL2] Null Zone 2
[C3] Cool Mode Zone 3 (if present)
[H3] Heat Mode Zone 3 (if present)
[DEF3] Defrost Mode Zone 3 (if present)
[NUL3] Null Zone 3 (if present)

Service Test Mode Functions Chart

18 October 2001 4-23

Operation

Low Side Evacuation

A special function for performing a low side
evacuation has been included. This function is
used to evacuate the low side after servicing and
is accessed using a submenu in the Service Test
Mode menu. In order to access this function, Enter
Service Test Mode as shown by Service Procedure
A34A. When the [tESt] and [VAC] screens appear
in the display, press and hold both the T/K and
CLEAR keys for more than 5 seconds. The display
will show [tESt] and [LSVC]. The unit is now in
Low Side Evacuation Mode. For complete
information on using the Low Side Evacuation
feature, see Service Procedure R11A in Section 8
of this manual.

4-24 18 October 2001

 Operation

Operating Relay Board Test Mode

Relay Board Test Mode allows individual control devices to be forced to a known operating condition
regardless of temperature or sensor inputs. The diesel engine must be stopped. The unit will remain in
any Relay Board Test Mode function for a maximum of 15 minutes if no other function is selected. If no
other function has been selected at the end of 15 minutes the unit will shut down and record Alarm
Code 54 - Test Mode Timeout.
1. Turn "on" the ZONE 1/HOST
switch, ZONE 2 switch and
ZONE 3 switch (if present). Do
not allow the diesel engine to
start.
2. When the Standard Display
appears, press and hold the T/K
LOGO key until [PrE TRIP] is
shown in the display.
3. Press the SELECT key as
required to display [REV] and
the software revision number.
4. When the Revision display
appears, press and hold both
the T/K LOGO key and the
CLEAR key as required to
display [tESt] and [VAC].
5. Press the SELECT key to
display [rbt01] and [PREH].
The unit is in Relay Board Test
Mode.
6. Use the UP and DOWN ARROW
keys to select the desired Relay
Board Test Mode function. A
complete list of functions
appears on the next page.

NOTE: The unit will operate in any Relay Board Test Mode function for 15 minutes. If no other
function is selected, the unit will shut down in 15 minutes and generate an Alarm Code 54 - Test
Mode Timeout.

18 October 2001 4-25

Operation

Relay Board Test Mode Functions

The Relay Board Test Mode functions are listed below. After entering Relay Board Test Mode as shown
on the previous page, use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select the desired function. When the desired
function appears in the lower display, press the Enter to load the function.
Each device can be energized or de-energized. However, the following rules apply:
1. The Preheat [PREH] and Starter [8S] functions are momentary only.
2. All other devices are energized momentarily by pressing and releasing the ENTER key. Holding the
ENTER key for more than 5 seconds will lock the device energized. The display will briefly show lock
and then return to the selected display. Pressing an UP or DOWN ARROW key will de-energize the
device.

Number Function Description

01 [PREH] Preheat Relay
02 [RUN.R] Run Relay
03 [dEF] Defrost Damper Zone 1
04 [FAN] Evaporator Fan Zone 3
05 [7D] High Speed Solenoid
06 [dEF],[FAN] Fan or Defrost Damper Zone 2
07 [26E1] Reserved for Electric Standby
08 [26E2] Reserved for Electric Standby
09 [LLS2] Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2
10 [SLS2] Suction Line Solenoid Zone 2
11 [HGS2] Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 2
12 [ALLT] Alarm Light
13 [SLS3] Suction Line Solenoid Zone 3
14 [HGS3] Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 3
15 [LLS3] Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 3
16 [RTPS] Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
17 [PV] Purge Valve
18 [CIS] Condenser Inlet Solenoid
19 [SLS1] Suction Line Solenoid Zone 1
20 [HGS1] Hot Gas Solenoid Zone 1
21 [LLS1] Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 1
22 [8S] Starter Solenoid

4-26 18 October 2001

 Operation

Optional Remote Control Panel

The remote control panel is connected to the microprocessor and is used to operate the unit from a remote
location. Each zone can be turned on and off and the setpoints can be adjusted.

Keypad Display
These nine touch sensitive The display normally shows the Standard
keys are used to turn the Display of return air temperature, setpoint
unit "on" and "off" and and zone. If a zone is turned on the
change the setpoint. The operating mode is also shown. If a zone is
ZONE 3 keys are only turned off the the display will show the box
present if the unit features temperature and [OFF]. The display shown
three temperature here has all possible segments lighted.
controlled compartments.

Keypad Keys
ZONE 1 ON KEY Turns Zone 1 "on".

ZONE 1 OFF KEY Turns Zone 1 "off".

ZONE 2 ON KEY Turns Zone 2 "on".

ZONE 2 OFF KEY Turns Zone 2 "off".

ZONE 3 ON KEY Turns Zone 3 "on" (if Zone 3 is present).

ZONE 3 OFF KEY Turns Zone 3 "off" (if Zone 3 is present).

UP ARROW KEY Increases setpoint for the selected zone.

DOWN ARROW KEY Decreases setpoint for the selected zone.

ENTER KEY Loads the new setpoint for the selected zone.

18 October 2001 4-27

Operation

Understanding the Display

The display normally shows the Standard Display of
return air temperature and setpoint for each zone. The
icons located at the sides and bottom of the display
indicate the zone being shown and the operating mode of
that zone. If an alarm condition exists the Alarm Icon will
appear. The display shown here has all possible display
features turned "on".

Display Icons
COOL ICON: Appears when the unit is cooling.

HEAT ICON: Appears when the unit is heating.

This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not used on multi-temp units.
DEFROST ICON: Appears when the unit is defrosting.

CYCLE-SENTRY ICON: Appears when CYCLE-SENTRY mode has been selected.

ALARM ICON: Appears when an alarm condition has been detected by the microprocessor.

This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not used on multi-temp units.
SETPOINT ICON: Appears when the setpoint is being shown in the lower display.

This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not used on multi-temp units.
ZONE ICON: Indicates which zone is currently shown on the display.

Reading a Typical Display

Each zone will appear briefly on the display, then the
next zone will appear. This display shows the following
information:
1. Zone 2 is being shown in the display.
2. Zone 2 is cooling.
3. CYCLE-SENTRY mode is selected.
4. Zone 2 Box temperature is 35.8 F and Zone 2
setpoint is 35 F.

4-28 18 October 2001

 Operation

The Standard Display for a Zone

The Standard Display appears when the Zone is turned on. The box temperature appears in the upper
display and the setpoint appears in the lower display. This display shows a box temperature of 35.8 F and
a setpoint of 35 F in Zone 2.

Changing the Setpoint in a Zone

1. Press the ON key for the desired zone. If the zone was off, pressing the ON key will turn the zone on
and show the standard display for that zone. If the zone was already on, pressing the ON key will
immediately show the selected zone on the display.
2. Immediately press the UP or DOWN ARROW keys to select the desired setpoint for the selected zone.
3. When the desired setpoint for the selected zone is shown on the display, press the ENTER key to load
the new setpoint into the microprocessor. The display will briefly show [Lod] and then the new
setpoint will reappear in the display.
IMPORTANT: The ENTER key must be pressed or the setpoint will not be changed. The display will
return to the Standard Display and the setpoint will return to the old setpoint in about 10 seconds if the
ENTER key is not pressed.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the correct setpoint is set for the desired zone.

18 October 2001 4-29

Operation

LOSt COn
If the download cable is connected, the connection of the remote control panel to the microprocessor is
temporarily interrupted to allow the download to occur. While the cable is connected the remote control
panel display will show LOSt COn as shown here. The display will return to normal operation when the
download cable is disconnected.

4-30 18 October 2001

Section 5
Diagnostics
Multi-Temp µP-IV 63 Engine Stopped—Reason Unknown . . . 5-17
Caution Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 64 Pretrip Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
66 Low Engine Oil Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Multi-Temp µP-IV
67 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit. . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Diagnostics and Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
68 Low Engine Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Alarm Code Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 70 Hourmeter Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
00 No Alarms Exist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 73 Hourmeter 6 Exceeds Set Limit. . . . . . . 5-18
02 Evaporator Coil Sensor . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 74 µP Reverted to Default Settings . . . . . . 5-18
03 Return Air Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 75 µP Internal Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
04 Discharge Air Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 76 µP Internal Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
05 Ambient Air Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 77 µP Internal Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
06 Engine Water Temperature Sensor . . . . 5-5 78 µP Internal Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
07 Engine RPM Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 79 Data Log Overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
08 Remote Return Air Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 105 Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
09 High Evaporator Temperature . . . . . . . . 5-6 Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
10 High Discharge Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 106 Purge Valve Solenoid Circuit. . . . . . . . . 5-19
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor . . . 5-7 107 Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit. . . . . . 5-20
12 Sensor Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 108 Door Open Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
13 Check Sensor Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 109 High Discharge Pressure or Sensor . . . 5-20
15 Glow Plug Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 110 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit . . . . . . . . 5-21
17 Engine Failed to Crank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly . . . . . . . . 5-22
18 High Engine Water Temperature . . . . . . 5-8 112 Remote Fan Zone 2-3 Circuit . . . . . . . . 5-23
19 Low Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 113 Electric Heat Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
20 Engine Failed to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 114 Multiple Alarms, Cannot Run. . . . . . . . . 5-23
21 Cooling Cycle Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Other Symptoms Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
22 Heating Cycle Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
General Problems
25 Alternator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
(such as power problems) . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity. . . . . . . . 5-10
Relay Board Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
28 Pretrip Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
I/O Module Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
29 Damper Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Pretrip Cooling or Heating Capacity
30 Damper Stuck Closed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
31 Oil Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
32 Refrigeration Capacity Low . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Remote Evaporator Blower Motor
33 Check Engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
35 Run Relay Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Blower Motor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
36 Electric Motor Failed to Run/Loose Belt 5-12 Speed Control Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
37 Check Engine Water Level . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Electronic Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . 5-30
40 High Speed Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Blower Control Configurations . . . . . . . . . 5-31
41 Engine Water Temperature Check . . . . 5-13
Communication and DPD Circuit
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
44 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Units Without DAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
45 Hot Gas Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Units With DAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
47 Remote Sensor Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
48 Check Belts or Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
50 Reset Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
52 Heat Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
54 Test Mode Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
55 Check Engine Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
61 Low Battery Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
62 Ammeter Out of Calibration Range . . . 5-16
 Diagnostics
Multi-Temp µP-IV Multi-Temp µP-IV
Caution Statements Diagnostics and Hints
The following procedures are not readily The balance of this section is devoted to
apparent, but must be followed when working on diagnostic routines designed to help the technician
units equipped with Multi-Tempp µP-IV quickly identify the cause of a problem and repair
microprocessors. it using the correct tools, information and
procedures. It is important that the required
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a
procedures be followed exactly. Failure to do so
light bulb to test circuits on microprocessor
will result in an incomplete repair.
based equipment.
The remaining material is divided into diagnostic
• Before connecting or disconnecting the
tables. The first table suggests corrective actions
battery, the Controller ON/OFF switch must be
as a result of alarm codes. The remaining tables
turned "off".
suggest corrective actions as a result of symptoms
• On units with Data Loggers if the Controller other than alarm codes.
ON/OFF switch is turned "off" and/or the
In order to properly service the Multi-Temp
battery is disconnected, an Alarm Code 50 is
µP-IV, the Caution Statements on this page
generated and the Clock/Calendar must be
must be followed carefully.
reset as shown in Service Procedure A05A.
The following hints will prove helpful when
• Any time a Return Air or Discharge Air sensor
working on Multi-Temp µP-IV microprocessors.
is changed, it must be calibrated as shown in
Service Procedure A15A. • Every effort should be made to pretrip a unit
suspected of having a defect. In almost all
• Any time the Microprocessor is replaced,
cases, the pretrip will result in a alarm code
these Service Procedures must be used:
that will lead you directly to the problem.
A02A Recording Microprocessor Setup Alarm Codes generated during a pretrip will
be preceded by a dash (-).
A12A ESD Procedures
• Record all alarm codes in sequence for
A03A Microprocessor R and R
reference.
A04A Microprocessor Setup
• Clear all alarms before testing unit.
A05A Clock/Calendar Setup
• Be certain all connectors on the
A20A Data Logger Setup (If equipped) microprocessor are fully seated and the lock
rings are completely locked.
• Any time the relay board is replaced, Service
Procedure B02A must be followed. • Be certain all other relay board and Harness
connectors are securely in place.
• Any time welding is to be done on the unit or
trailer, Service Procedure A26A must be • Be certain all programmable features are
followed. restored to the customers specifications as
shown in the procedures.
• Alarm codes that cannot be cleared normally
may clear by first entering Super Guarded
Access using Service Procedure A04A and
then pressing the Code and Clear keys.

18 October 2001 5-1

Diagnostics

Every effort should be made to pretrip a unit STORED ALARMS: Stored alarms are indicated by
suspected of having a defect. In almost all a steady alarm symbol which appears on the
cases, the pretrip will result in a alarm code screen for 30 seconds when the unit power switch
that will lead you directly to the problem. is turned on. The alarm symbol will go off after 30
seconds. These alarms indicate maintenance items
Alarms may be one of three types as follows: which should be addressed as soon as practical.
SHUTDOWN ALARMS: Shutdown alarms will turn They may be cleared, but will re-occur until
the unit off upon detection. They are indicated by corrected. The unit will run with stored alarms.
a flashing alarm symbol. Shutdown alarms must
be corrected and cleared before the unit can be Alarm Codes Preceded by a Dash
restarted. It is possible to clear a shutdown alarm
Alarms detected during a pretrip check will be
with the unit switched off but the unit will shut
down again when the alarm re-occurs. displayed with a dash (-) preceding the alarm
code. For example, a low oil level alarm detected
CHECK ALARMS: Check alarms are a notice to during a pretrip check would be displayed as -66.
take corrective action before a problem becomes Alarms detected during normal operation of the
severe. They are indicated by a steady alarm unit will not be preceded with a dash (-).
symbol. The unit will run with check alarms but
some features and functions may be inhibited. Clearing Alarm Codes
They may be cleared, but will re-occur until
corrected. Codes that cannot be cleared normally may clear
by first entering Super Guarded Access and then
pressing the Code and Clear keys.

5-2 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Code Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

00 No Alarms Exist None

02 Evaporator Coil Sensor A. Check the coil sensor by pressing the SELECT key until
Indicates that a problem exists with the display shows [COIL] and proper zone location. If
the sensor or its wiring in Zone 1, 2 or the [COIL] display shows [----], the sensor is defective
3 as indicated by display. The sensor or the circuit is open or shorted.
is located on the evaporator coil B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
frame. The wiring is part of the Sensor or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
Harness and is connected to the broken wire.
microprocessor with the large 37 pin
connector through the CTP, CTN, C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.
CTP2, CTN2, CTP3 and CTN3 D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
circuits. This is a check alarm. microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes (02, broken wire.
03, 04, 05 & 06) and Code 61 are E. Check the harness wires CTP, CTN, CTP2, CTN2,
present, the microprocessor may CTP3 and CTN3 circuits with an ohmmeter using
be defective. Check the Service Procedure H04A.
microprocessor.
F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are A01A.
present check for a shorted
discharge pressure transducer as G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
shown in Service Procedure D01A entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
or D03A. cause intermittent operation.

03 Return Air Sensor A. Check the return air sensor by viewing the Standard
Indicates that a problem exists with Display and proper zone location. If the Standard
the sensor or its wiring in Zone 1, 2 or Display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the
3 as indicated by display. The sensor circuit is open or shorted.
is located in the return air stream at B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
the inlet of the evaporator coil. The or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
wiring is part of the Sensor Harness broken wire.
and is connected to the
microprocessor with the large 37 pin C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.
connector through the RTP, RTN, D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
RTP2, RTN2, RTP3 and RTN3 microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
circuits. This is a check alarm. broken wire.
NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes (02, E. Check the harness wires RTP, RTN, RTP2, RTN2,
03, 04, 05 & 06) and Code 61 are RTP3 and RTN3 circuits with an ohmmeter using
present, the microprocessor may Service Procedure H04A.
be defective. Check the
micro-processor using Service F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
Procedure A01B. A01A.
G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are
entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
present check for a shorted
cause intermittent operation.
discharge pressure transducer as
shown in Service Procedure D01A CAUTION: If the sensor is replaced, the temperature
or D03A. sensor grade must be recalibrated.

18 October 2001 5-3

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

04 Discharge Air Sensor A. Check the discharge air sensor by pressing the
Indicates that a problem exists with SELECT key until the display shows [DIS.A] and proper
the sensor or its wiring in Zone 1, 2 or zone location. If the [DIS.A] display shows [----], the
3 as indicated by display. The sensor sensor is defective or the circuit is open or shorted.
is located in the discharge air stream B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
near the damper door. The wiring is or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
part of the sensor harness and is broken wire.
connected to the microprocessor with
the large 37 pin connector through the C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.
DTP, DTN, DTP2 and DTN2 circuits. D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
This is a check alarm. microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes (02, broken wire.
03, 04, 05 & 06) and Code 61 are E. Check the harness wires DTP DTN DTP2 and DTN2
present, the microprocessor may with an ohmmeter using Service Procedure H04A.
be defective.
F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are A01A.
present check for a shorted
discharge pressure transducer as G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
shown in Service Procedure D01A entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
or D03A. cause intermittent operation.
CAUTION: If the sensor is replaced, the temperature
sensor grade must be recalibrated.

05 Ambient Air Sensor A. Check the ambient air sensor by pressing the SELECT
Indicates that a problem exists with key until the display shows [AMB.T]. If the [AMB.T]
the sensor or its wiring. The sensor is display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the
located in the condenser air intake circuit is open or shorted.
stream. The wiring is part of the B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
sensor harness and is connected to or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
the microprocessor with the large 37 broken wire.
pin connector through the ATP and
ATN circuits. This is a stored alarm. C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure F08A.
NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes (02, D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
03, 04, 05 & 06) and Code 61 are microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
present, the microprocessor may broken wire.
be defective. Check the E. Check the harness wires ATP and ATN with an
microprocessor. ohmmeter using Service Procedure H04A.
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
present check for a shorted A01A.
discharge pressure transducer as
G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
shown in Service Procedure D01A
entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
or D03A.
cause intermittent operation.

5-4 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

06 Engine Water Temperature Sensor A. Check the sensor by pressing the WATER TEMP key. If
Indicates that a problem exists with the [WAT.T] display shows [----], the sensor is
the sensor or its wiring. The sensor is defective or the circuit is open or shorted.
located under the thermostat housing. B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
The wiring is part of the sensor or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
harness and is connected to the broken wire.
microprocessor with the large 37 pin
connector through the WTP and WTN C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure F08A.
circuits. This is a check alarm. D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes (02, microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
03, 04, 05 & 06) and Code 61 are broken wire.
present, the microprocessor may E. Check the harness wires WTP and WTN with an
be defective. Check the ohmmeter using Service Procedure H04A.
microprocessor.
F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are A01A.
present check for a shorted
discharge pressure transducer as G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
shown in Service Procedure D01A entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
or D03A. cause intermittent operation.

07 Engine RPM Sensor A. Check and adjust the engine RPM sensor using
Indicates that engine speed was Service Procedure F09A.
below 800 RPM or that a problem B. Check and adjust engine RPM using Service
exists with the sensor, its wiring or its Procedure F10A.
adjustment. The sensor is located on
the flywheel housing just below the C. If RPM checks OK determine cause of low engine
starter. The wiring is part of the speed. This code may be generated if the engine is
interconnect harness and is running out of fuel or a Code 63 (Engine Stopped —
connected to the microprocessor with Reason Unknown) exists.
the 14 pin connector through the FS1 D. Check pins 1 and 2 on the 14 pin Amp connector at
and FS2 circuits. This is a stored or the microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp
check alarm. or broken wire.
E. Check the harness wires FS1 and FS2 with an
ohmmeter using Service Procedure H04A.
F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A01A.

18 October 2001 5-5

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

08 Remote Return Air Sensor A. Check the return air sensor by viewing the Standard
Indicates that the return sensor for a Display and proper zone location. If the Standard
remote evaporator has failed and that Display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the
zone is being controlled by the coil circuit is open or shorted.
sensor. See Alarm Code 03 above. B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
This is a normal secondary alarm or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
when a Code 03 alarm is detected. broken wire.
After the sensor is repaired the 03
Code and the 08 Code can be C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.
cleared. This is a check alarm. D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
present check for a shorted broken wire.
discharge pressure transducer as E. Check the harness wires RTP2, RTN2, RTP3 and
shown in Service Procedure D01 or RTN3 circuits with an ohmmeter using Service
D03A. Procedure H04A.
F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A01A.
G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
cause intermittent operation.
CAUTION: If the sensor is replaced, the temperature
sensor grade must be recalibrated.

09 High Evaporator Temperature A. Check for Code 02 and verify that the coil sensor is
Indicates the coil temperature as reading properly.
sensed by the evaporator coil sensor B. Check evaporator fan for proper operation.
is excessively high for more than 10
minutes. See Alarm Code 02 for C. Check for blocked or dirty evaporator coil.
location of sensor and wiring. This is a D. Check for damper door stuck closed.
shutdown alarm.
E. Check for proper operation in Heat and Defrost mode.

10 High Discharge Pressure A. Check for slipping or broken condenser fan belt.
Indicates that the discharge pressure B. Check for blocked or dirty condenser coil.
as sensed by the high pressure cutout
switch is excessively high. The high C. Check refrigeration system for high discharge
pressure cutout switch is located on pressure. See Section 8 for details.
the top of the compressor. The wiring D. Check the Deutsch connector at the cutout switch for a
is part of the main harness and is pushed pin or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin
connected to the microprocessor via crimp or broken wire.
8D circuit. This is a shutdown alarm.
E. Check for defective high pressure cutout switch.
Switch should be normally closed.
F. Check pin 35 on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
G. Check the harness wire 8D for continuity using Service
Procedure H04A.

5-6 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

11 Unit Controlling on Alternate A. Check the return air sensor by viewing the Standard
Sensor Display and proper zone location. If the Standard
Indicates the return air sensor has Display shows [----], the sensor is defective or the
failed and the unit is controlling using circuit is open or shorted.
the discharge air sensor. See Alarm B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
Code 03 above. This is a normal or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
secondary alarm when a Code 03 broken wire.
alarm is detected. After the sensor is
repaired the 03 Code and the 11 Code C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.
can be cleared. This is a check alarm. D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
E. Check the harness wires RTP, RTN, RTP2, and RTN2
circuits with an ohmmeter using Service Procedure
H04A.
F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A01A.
G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
cause intermittent operation.
CAUTION: If the sensor is replaced, the temperature
sensor grade must be recalibrated.

12 Sensor Shutdown A. Check the return air, discharge air and coil sensors as
Indicates a critical problem exists with shown under Alarm Codes 02, 03 and 04 above.
a combination of the return air, B. Be sure the 37 pin Amp connector is not broken and is
discharge air, coil sensors or its wiring securely attached to the microprocessor.
in Zone 1, 2 or 3 as indicated by
display. See Alarm Codes 02, 03 C. If all sensors read [----], check the microprocessor
and/or 04 above. After the 02, 03 using Service Procedure A01A.
and/or 04 Code is repaired, the 12
Code can be cleared. This is a
shutdown alarm after it has been
present for 2 minutes.

13 Check Sensor Calibration A. Compare the return air, discharge air and coil sensors
Indicates the return air, discharge air to determine which sensor is exhibiting an improper or
or coil sensor is reading an erroneous illogical reading.
temperature. This is a check alarm. B. Check the erroneous sensor as shown under Alarm
Codes 02, 03 and 04 above.

18 October 2001 5-7

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

15 Glow Plug Check A. Check battery condition and voltage during preheat.
Indicates that a glow plug(s) may be B. Check the current draw on the glow plugs with the
drawing too much or too little current microprocessor "Amps" function using Service
or that the ammeter shunt is out of Procedure A44A Relay Board Test (rbt01).
calibration or defective. The preheat
relay, LED and fuse (F20) are located C. Check the glow plugs for continuity if current draw is
on the relay board. The wiring is low. Bad glow plugs will read "open". Do not change
located in the main harness. This may glow plugs unless they show an "open".
be either a stored or check alarm. D. Test the ammeter shunt using Service Procedure
C01A.
E. Check fuse (F20) on the relay board.
F. Check the preheat circuitry on the relay board.
G. Check I/O Module for proper installation and
operation.

17 Engine Failed to Crank A. Check the engine starting circuits by using Service
Indicates that an engine start was Procedure A44A Relay Board Test [rbt22].
attempted but the engine did not B. Check fuse F22 and fuse F20 on the relay board.
crank. The starter relay, LED and fuse
are located on the relay board. The C. Check I/O Module for proper installation and
wiring is located in the main harness operation.
via the 8S circuit. This is a shutdown D. Check the harness wire 8S with an ohmmeter for
alarm. continuity per Service Procedure H04A.

18 High Engine Water Temperature A. Check the engine water temperature by pressing the
Indicates that the engine coolant WATER TEMP key. If above 220 F (104 C) check the
temperature is excessively high as engine cooling system to determine the cause of
determined by the coolant overheating.
temperature switch located just above B. Check the engine coolant level.
the engine water pump. The wiring is
part of the sensor harness and is CAUTION: Do not open radiator when hot.
connected to the microprocessor with C. Check the drive belts.
the large 37 pin connector through the
WTP and WTN circuits. This is a D. Check the radiator for restrictions.
shutdown alarm. E. Check the water temperature sensor as shown under
Alarm Code 06 above.
F. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
cause intermittent operation.

5-8 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

19 Low Engine Oil Pressure A. Start the engine and check the engine oil pressure by
Indicates that the engine oil pressure pressing the OIL PRESS key.
is low as determined by the engine B. If the oil pressure is OK, check that the engine low oil
low oil pressure switch located on the pressure switch is open when the engine is running
side of the engine just ahead of the and closed when the engine is not running.
starter. If low oil pressure is sensed,
the switch will ground the 20 circuit. C. Check pin 7 on the J1 connector at the relay board for
The wiring is located in the main a pushed pin.
harness via the 20 circuit. This is a D. Check the 20 wire in the main harness with an
shutdown alarm. ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
NOTE: The software also checks H04A. Also check for a short to ground.
the oil pressure sensor to verify
low oil pressure before generating
the alarm.
Revision 2020 and later: This note is
only active when [OIL] prompt in SGA
is set to SNDR.

20 Engine Failed to Start A. Check the engine fuel level.

Indicates that an engine start was B. Check the engine starting circuits using Service
attempted and the engine cranked but Procedure A44A Relay Board test [rbt22].
did not start. This is a shutdown
alarm. C. Check for cause of slow start or no start of the engine.

21 Cooling Cycle Check A. Check the refrigeration performance of the unit with an
Indicates that the unit is heating when Engine Running Pretrip. Observe and record the
it should be cooling in Zone 1, 2 or 3 sensor temperatures.
as indicated by display. This is a B. Using Service Test Mode as shown in Service
check alarm. Procedure A34A, check unit performance in cool and
heat modes.
C. Perform all required tests on the refrigeration system
to verify solenoid valves operation. See Section 8 for
details.
D. Check to be sure the temperature sensors are in the
proper locations.

22 Heating Cycle Check A. Check the refrigeration performance of the unit with an
Indicates that the unit is cooling when Engine Running Pretrip. Observe and record the
it should be heating in Zone 1, 2 or 3 sensor temperatures.
as indicated by display. This is a B. Using Service Test Mode as shown in Service
check alarm. Procedure A34A, check unit performance in cool and
heat modes.
C. Perform all required tests on the refrigeration system
to verify solenoid valve operation. See Section 8 for
details.
D. Check to be sure the temperature sensors are in the
proper locations.

18 October 2001 5-9

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

25 Alternator Check A. Check the current by pressing the AMPS key with the
Indicates that the engine is running engine running. A negative (-) reading indicates a
with no charging current detected as need for charging system repair or a faulty shunt. If
determined by the shunt or that the microprocessor ammeter reading is bad, check
battery voltage is too high. The shunt alternator output with a test ammeter to determine if
is located in the control box. The alternator output is actually bad. Test and repair
wiring is located on the relay board charging system as required.
and is connected through the ST1 and B. Check fuses F17 and F18 on the relay board.
ST2 circuits. This is either a check or
shutdown alarm. C. Check the voltage by pressing the SELECT key until the
display shows [BATV]. If over 15 volts verify with an
NOTE: The software requires a external digital voltmeter. If still over 15 volts test and
discharge rate of 1 ampere or repair charging system as required.
greater and the battery voltage to
be less than 13 volts to generate D. Check the 300 ohm resistor on the relay board next to
this alarm. the F7 fuse location with an ohmmeter. (The F7 Fuse
should not be installed if the unit is equipped with a
Austrian Bosch alternator.)
E. If the charging system is operating normally, calibrate
the current shunt using Procedure B05A.
F. Check the alternator connections.
G. Check the alternator Deutsch connector for a pushed
pin or missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
H. Check the excitation voltage to the alternator using
Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Test [rbt02].

26 Check Refrigeration Capacity A. Check the refrigeration performance of the unit with an
Indicates that cooling or heating is Engine Running Pretrip. Observe and record the
functioning but at a reduced capacity sensor temperatures.
in Zone 1, 2 or 3 as indicated by B. Using Service Test Mode as shown in Service
display. This is a check alarm. Procedure A34A, check unit performance in cool and
heat modes.
C. Perform all required tests on the refrigeration system
to verify solenoid valves operation. See section 8 for
details.
D. Check to be sure the temperature sensors are in the
proper locations.

28 Pretrip Abort A. This is a normal alarm any time the pretrip is halted
Indicates that the microprocessor and does not finish with a [PASS], [CHEK] or [FAIL]
determined that a serious problem screen display.
exists during the pretrip checks. Alarm B. Proceed with corrective actions for the indicated alarm
codes indicating the problem area will codes generated along with the 28 code.
be displayed as well as Alarm Code
28. This alarm is generated any time C. If only a 28 code appears, the ON/OFF switch may
the pretrip is halted before it is have been turned off during a pretrip test. Clear the
complete, and will occur if the ON/OFF alarm and restart the pretrip using Service Procedure
switch is turned "Off" during a pretrip A17A.
test. This is a shutdown alarm. D. After repair, repeat the Pretrip using Service
Procedure A17A.

5-10 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

29 Damper Circuit A. Check the damper door circuitry for proper operation
Indicates that the damper did not using Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Tests
function properly in Zone 1 or 2 as [rtb03] for host or [rtb06] for Zone 2 on DE units.
indicated by display. The damper B. Check fuse F3 on the relay board for Zone 1 or fuse
relay, LED and fuse are located on the F15 for Zone 2 on DE units
relay board. The wiring is located in
the evaporator harness. This is a C. Check the damper solenoid Deutsch connector for a
check alarm. pushed pin or missing orange pin wedge.

NOTE: The unit will not defrost if D. Check the harness wires 29 and 29S Zone 1 or 29-2
this alarm is present, resulting in and 29S2 for Zone 2 on DE units.
reduced cooling capacity.

30 Damper Stuck Closed A. Check the 29 circuits for voltage. 12 volts should be
Indicates that the damper door present only during defrost cycles, and no voltage
solenoid is energized other than should be present when the unit is not is defrost.
during defrost or a pretrip test. This is B. Check the damper door circuitry for proper operation
either a check or shutdown alarm. using Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Tests
[rtb03] for host or [rtb06] for Zone 2 on DE units.
C. If the trailer is equipped with door switches be certain
all trailer doors are closed.
D. On trailers with ERC an open door can prevent
damper operation during a Pretrip Test. This will
generate Alarm Code 30. Be sure all trailer doors are
closed before starting a Pretrip Test.

31 Oil Pressure Switch A. Check that the engine low oil pressure switch is closed
Indicates that the engine oil pressure when the engine is not running per Service Procedure
switch did not connect the 20 wire to F05A.
chassis ground when the engine was B. Check that the engine low oil pressure switch is open
not running. The engine low oil when the engine is running per Service Procedure
pressure switch is located on the side F05A.
of the engine just ahead of the starter.
The wiring is located in the main C. Check the 20 wire in the main harness with an
harness in the 20 circuit. This is a ohmmeter for continuity per Service Procedure H04A.
shutdown alarm or check alarm. D. Change the engine low oil pressure switch per Service
NOTE: This alarm may also Procedure F05A.
indicate that the 20 wire is
grounded when the engine is
running with the oil pressure
sensor indicating adequate oil
pressure.
[OIL] must be set to [SNDR] on 2020
and later software.

18 October 2001 5-11

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

32 Refrigeration Capacity Low A. Check the refrigeration/heating performance of the

Indicates that the unit’s refrigeration unit with an Engine Running Pretrip. Repair
capacity is considerably reduced in refrigeration system as required to restore full
Zone 1, 2 or 3 as indicated by display. refrigeration capacity.
This is a shutdown alarm. B. Using Service Test Mode as shown in Service
Procedure A34A, check unit performance in cool and
heat modes.
C. Check the return air and discharge air sensors for
proper calibration grade numbers.
D. Check for proper sensor location and proper air flow.
Short cycling air flow caused by a blocked air flow path
or a loose chute or bulkhead may generate this code.

33 Check Engine RPM A. Check and adjust the high speed using Service
Indicates that the engine speed is out Procedure F10A.
of range in either low or high speed US Domestic and HC units 2200 ±25 RPM
operation. This is a check alarm.
SMX and SL except HC units 1600 ±25 RPM
B. Check and adjust the low speed to 1450 ±25 RPM
using Service Procedure F10A.
US domestic and HC units 1450 ±25 RPM
SMX and SL except HC units 1200 ±25 RPM

35 Run Relay Circuit A. Check fuse F22 on the relay board.

Indicates that the run relay or fuel A. Check the fuel solenoid using Service Procedure
solenoid did not function properly. The A44A Relay Board Test (rbt02).
run relay, LED and fuse are located
on the relay board. This is either a A. Check that there is no voltage on the 7K on the relay
check or shutdown alarm. board and the 8D wire to the fuel solenoid when the
unit is off.
A. Check that there is voltage on the 7K wire on the relay
board and the 8D wire to the microprocessor when the
fuel solenoid is energized.

36 Electric Motor Failed to Run/Loose A. Check the motor, motor contactor, overload relay and
Belt other associated motor circuitry.
Indicates that the motor failed to B. Check for reason that the motor fails to turn the
operate. This is determined by the alternator, such as belts, clutch, etc.
fact that the shunt is not indicating
that the alternator is charging when C. Check alternator as shown under Code 25.
the electric motor should be running. D. Check for voltage on the 7EH circuit. There should be
This is a shutdown alarm. no voltage unless the electric motor is running.

5-12 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

37 Check Engine Water Level A. Check the engine coolant level and mixture.
Indicates that the engine water level is
CAUTION: Exercise extreme care when checking
low. The sensor is located on the side
coolant. Be sure coolant is above sensor when the
of the radiator tank about 10 inches
coolant is cold.
below the filler cap. The wiring is
located in the signal harness via the B. Check the small ground wire from the negative battery
CLS circuit. If the CLS circuit is not terminal to the CHP wire to the microprocessor for
grounded through the coolant the loose connections.
alarm will be displayed. This is a C. Check pin 3 on the 14 pin Amp connector at the
check alarm. microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
D. Check the harness wire CLS with an ohmmeter for
continuity.
E. Ground the sensor to chassis ground with a jumper
and attempt to clear the alarm. If the alarm clears,
clean the CHP ground terminal to unit frame ground.
NOTE: The sensor is a stainless steel probe immersed
in the coolant. They do not fail or wear out.

40 High Speed Circuit A. Place the unit in high speed operation and check the
Indicates that a problem exists with engine speed with the microprocessor RPM function
the high speed solenoid, linkage or using Service Procedure F10A.
circuitry. The high speed relay, LED B. Check for a binding solenoid or disconnected linkage.
and fuse are located on the relay
board. The wiring is located in the C. Check the adjustment of the high speed solenoid
main harness. This is a check alarm. using Service Procedure F10A.
D. Check fuse F4 on the relay board.
E. Check the high speed relay for proper operation using
Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Test (rbt05).
F. Check the harness wire 7D with an ohmmeter for
continuity using Service Procedure H04A.

41 Engine Water Temperature Check A. Check the engine coolant temperature by pressing the
Indicates that the engine coolant WATER TEMP key.
temperature has been high for a B. Check the diesel engine coolant level.
period of time when operating in
diesel mode. Usually accompanied by C. Check the drive belts.
Alarm Code 42 and/or 43. This is a D. Check the radiator for blockage and air flow.
check alarm.
E. Check the water temperature sensor as shown under
Alarm Code 06 above.

42 Unit Forced to Low Speed A. Check the engine coolant temperature by pressing the
Indicates that the unit has been forced WATER TEMP key.
to low speed operation due to high B. Check the diesel engine coolant level.
engine coolant temperature when
operating in diesel mode. This code C. Check the drive belts.
will usually appear with Alarm Code D. Check the radiator for blockage and air flow.
41 above. This is a check alarm.
E. Check the water temperature sensor as shown under
Alarm Code 06 above.

18 October 2001 5-13

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

44 Fuel System A. Check the fuel supply and refill as required. If the fuel
Indicates that the unit may be running has run out this code may repeat several times after
out of fuel. This is a shut down alarm. restarting until all the air has been bled from the fuel
system. The hand primer may be used to help bleed
air from the system.
B. Check all fuel lines for leaks and kinks.
C. Check fuel filters for blockage.

45 Hot Gas Circuit A. Check fuse F6, F16 and F13 on the relay board.
Indicates that a problem exists in the B. Check the operation of the hot gas solenoids using
hot gas solenoids or associated Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Test (rbt11,
circuitry in Zone 1, 2 or 3 as indicated rbt14 and rbt20).
by display. The hot gas solenoid
LED’s and fuse’s (F6,F16 and F13) C. Check coil continuity of hot gas solenoids.
are located on the relay board. The D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
wiring is located in the main harness. missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
This is a check alarm. broken wire.
E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
loose pin crimp or broken wire.
F. Check the harness wire HGS, HGS2 and HGS3 with
an ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
H04A.

47 Remote Sensor Shutdown A. Check the return air sensor and coil sensor by viewing
Indicates that both return sensor and the Standard Display and proper zone location. If the
coil sensor have failed in Zone 2 or 3 Standard Display shows [----], the sensor is defective
as indicated by display. If the zone is or the circuit is open or shorted.
set in a fresh temp range the zone will B. Check the sensor Deutsch connector for a pushed pin
go to Null. This is a check alarm. or missing orange pin wedge, loose pin crimp or
NOTE: If all the Sensor Codes (02, broken wire.
03, 04, 05 & 06) and Code 61 are C. Check the sensor using Service Procedure D01A.
present, the microprocessor may
be defective. Check the D. Check pins on the 37 pin Amp connector at the
microprocessor. microprocessor for a pushed pin or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
NOTE: If all Sensor Codes are
present check for a shorted E. Check the harness wires CTP2, CTN2, CTP3,CTN3,
discharge pressure transducer as RTP2, RTN2, RTP3 and RTN3 circuits with an
shown in Service Procedure D01A ohmmeter using Service Procedure H04A.
or D03A. F. Check the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A01A.
G. Moisture in the Deutsch connector or moisture
entering the sensor through the sensor leads can
cause intermittent operation.
CAUTION: If the sensor is replaced, the temperature
sensor grade must be recalibrated.

5-14 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

48 Check Belts or Clutch A. Check the Electric Jumper (TP-2 and TP-5) on the
This alarm will occur if the alternator relay board for correct position. If Electric Standby is
frequency falls below pre-determined enabled on a unit that is not equipped with the electric
limits for a period of time. standby option this code will occur.
This alarm will occur in diesel mode if B. Check clutch and belts for condition, operation and
the AC signal from the alternator to slippage.
the microprocessor "W" analog input C. Check alternator operation.
falls below a predetermined limit. This
indicates a slipping or broken belt or D. Check the "W" and "WR" circuits including the 1000
slipping clutch. This is a shutdown ohm resistor on the relay board for continuity.
alarm.

50 Reset Clock A. Reset the Clock/Calendar using Service Procedure

Indicates that power has been A05A. Resetting the Clock/Calendar automatically
interrupted to the microprocessor and clears this alarm code.
that the Clock/Calendar is no longer
set to the correct date and/or time.
This can occur with power
interruptions. This is a stored alarm.
NOTE: This alarm self clears when
the clock is reset. It cannot be
cleared by pressing the CODE and
CLEAR keys.
NOTE: The screen flashes between
[50] and [SET TIME] when the CODE
key is pressed as a reminder to the
operator to check and set the time
and date.

52 Heat Circuit A. Check the Hot Gas Solenoid LEDs on the relay board
Indicates that a problem exists with to be certain it is energized.
the heat capacity. B. Check the refrigeration/heating performance of the
unit with an Engine Running Pretrip per Service
Procedure A18A. Observe and record the temperature
differential (TD).
C. Using Service Test Mode as shown in Service
Procedure A34A, check unit performance in heat
modes. Repair refrigeration system as required. See
Section 8 for details.
D. Check the return air and discharge air sensors for
proper calibration on Host Unit or Zone 2 on DE units.
E. Check the return air and coil temp sensors for proper
temperature differential in heat mode Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
F. Check fuse F6, F16 and F13 on the relay board.
G. Check the HGS, HGS2 and HGS2 wire with an
ohmmeter per Service Procedure H04A.

18 October 2001 5-15

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

54 Test Mode Timeout A. While in Service Test Mode, if no other function is

Indicates that the unit was placed in a selected within 15 minutes the unit will shut down and
Service Test Mode function and no record Alarm Code 54. Clear the alarm and re-enter
other Test Mode function was Service Test Mode if necessary to complete the
selected for 15 minutes. This is a diagnosis or repair.
shutdown alarm.

55 Check Engine Speeds A. Check the operation of the high speed solenoid by
Indicates the engine speed is cycling it on and off. Be sure the solenoid is retracting
excessive during low speed all the way.
operation. This is a check alarm. B. Be sure the speed solenoid linkage is not binding.
C. Check for voltage present on the speed solenoid when
it shouldn’t be using Service Procedure A44A Relay
Board Test [rbt05].

61 Low Battery Volts A. Check for discharged (run down) battery.

Indicates that the battery voltage was B. Check the battery terminals for tightness and
found to be low while the engine was corrosion.
not running. The battery voltage is
sensed through the 2PA and CHP C. Cycle processor switch off and on.
circuit. This is a check or shutdown D. Start the unit and check the charging rate using the
alarm. microprocessor "Amps" function.
E. With the engine running check the battery voltage by
pressing the SELECT key until the display shows
[BATV].
F. Check pin 8 and pin 10 on the 14 pin Amp connector
at the microprocessor for a pushed pin.
G. Check the voltage from pin 8 (CHP) to pin 10 (2PA) at
the 14 pin Amp connector. There must be 11 volts
minimum.
H. Set the CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Sentry amperes [CS
A] to a lower number.
I. Set the CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Voltage to a higher
voltage.

62 Ammeter Out of Calibration Range A. Check the shunt wiring.

Indicates that the shunt (ammeter) B. Check fuses F17 and F18 on the relay board.
cannot be properly calibrated and that
it’s readings may be erroneous. C. Perform shunt calibration per Service Procedure
C02A.
D. Perform shunt test per Service Procedure C01A.
E. Test the microprocessor.

5-16 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

63 Engine Stopped—Reason A. Check the fuel and oil level.

Unknown B. Check the air cleaner and intake hose for obstructions.
Indicates that the unit was running
and still should be but has stopped. C. Check fuses on relay board for being loose or bad for
This is a shutdown alarm. run circuit.
D. Check and correct any existing Alarm Codes
E. Run engine and determine cause of shutdown.
F. Perform a Full Pretrip using Service Procedure A17A
to determine cause for shutdown.

64 Pretrip Reminder A. Perform a pretrip using Service Procedure A17A or

Indicates that it is time to perform a A18A. Alarm code 64 is automatically cleared and the
unit pretrip. This is a programmable Pretrip Reminder timer is reset to zero when a pretrip
function created by setting hourmeter is initiated.
6 to Type 15. This is a stored alarm.

66 Low Engine Oil Level A. Check the engine oil level.

Indicates that the engine oil level is B. Check the switch with an ohmmeter. It should be open
low. The switch is located on either when the oil level is satisfactory.
the front or back side of the engine
above the oil pan. The switch is open C. Check the harness wires 2AAH and OLS with an
with full oil level and closed with low ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
oil level. The wiring is located in the H04A.
main harness via the 2AAH and OLS D. Check for voltage on the OLS circuit when there
circuits. If the switch is disconnected shouldn’t be.
the alarm will not be generated. This
is a shutdown alarm.

67 Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit A. Check fuses F6, F13 and F16 on the relay board.
Indicates that a problem exists in the B. Check the operation of the liquid line solenoids using
liquid line solenoids or associated Service Procedure 44A Relay Board Tests [rbt09,
circuitry in Zone 1, 2 or 3 as indicated rbt15 and rbt21].
by display. The liquid line solenoid
LED and fuses (F6, F13 and F16) are C. Check coil continuity of liquid line solenoids.
located on the relay board. The wiring D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
is located in the main harness for missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
Zone 1 (and Zone 2 if the unit is a broken wire.
DE). The wiring is located in the
E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
remote evaporator harnesses for
loose pin crimp or broken wire.
Zone 2 (if not a DE) and Zone 3. This
is a check alarm. F. Check the harness wire LLS, LLS2 and LLS3 with an
ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
H04A.

68 µP internal Fault Code A. Perform a "Cold Start" using Service Procedure A07A.
If the code can be cleared, proceed with
microprocessor setup using Service Procedure A04A
and A05A.
B. If the code cannot be cleared with a "Cold Start",
replace the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A03A. Complete the microprocessor setup using
Service Procedure A04A and A05A.

18 October 2001 5-17

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

70 Hourmeter Failure A. Check hourmeters 1, 2 and 3. If the reading is normal,

Indicates that the hourmeter storage perform a Cold Start using Service Procedure A07A. If
has exceeded the maximum number the code can be cleared, proceed with microprocessor
that it is capable of holding. This is a setup using Service Procedure A04A.
stored alarm. B. If Alarm Code 70 will not clear normally, attempt to
clear it from Super Guarded Access using Service
Procedure A31A.

73 Hourmeter 6 Exceeds Set Limit A. Perform required maintenance, reset the hourmeter
Indicates that the hourmeter has and clear the alarm using Service Procedure A10A.
exceeded the programmed time limit.
This is a stored alarm that can only be
cleared from Guarded Access mode.

74 µP Reverted to Default Settings A. Complete the microprocessor setup using Service

Indicates that all programmable Procedure A04A and A05A.
values have been set to the default B. The alarm code 74 will be cleared during the
values. microprocessor setup using Service Procedure A04A.
NOTE: This alarm is a check alarm CAUTION: Failure to perform the above setup
that can only be cleared from procedures after a Code 74 alarm will result in the unit
Super Guarded Access. failing to perform to customer specifications.

75 µP Internal Fault Codes A. Replace the microprocessor.

B. Complete the microprocessor setup using Service
Procedure A04A and A05A.

76 µP Internal Fault Codes A. Perform a "Cold Start" using Service Procedure A07A.
If the code can be cleared, proceed with
microprocessor setup using Service Procedure A04A
and A05A.
B. If the code cannot be cleared with a "Cold Start",
replace the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A03A. Complete the microprocessor setup using
Service Procedure A04A and A05A.

77 µP Internal Fault Codes A. Perform a "Cold Start" using Service Procedure A07A.
If the code can be cleared, proceed with
microprocessor setup using Service Procedure A04A
and A05A.
B. If the code cannot be cleared with a "Cold Start",
replace the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A03A. Complete the microprocessor setup using
Service Procedure A04A and A05A.

78 µP Internal Fault Codes A. Perform a "Cold Start" using Service Procedure A07A.
If the code can be cleared, proceed with
microprocessor setup using Service Procedure A04A
and A05A.
B. If the code cannot be cleared with a "Cold Start",
replace the microprocessor using Service Procedure
A03A. Complete the microprocessor setup using
Service Procedure A04A and A05A.

5-18 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

79 Data Log Overflow A. No corrective action is possible. This serves only as

This may occur during a download an indication that an event occurred that was not
with the unit running. If an event recorded by the data logger.
occurs during a download (such as
the unit switching from
CYCLE-SENTRY run to
CYCLE-SENTRY null) it may not be
recorded by the data logger, but an
Alarm Code 79 will be generated to
inform the operator that an event
occurred but was not recorded. This is
a check alarm that occurs only under
extremely rare conditions.

105 Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid A. Check fuse F6 on the relay board.
Circuit B. Check the operation of the receiver tank pressure
Indicates that a problem exists in the solenoids using Service Procedure A44A Relay Board
receiver tank pressure solenoids or Test [rbt16].
associated circuitry. The receiver tank
pressure solenoid LED and fuse (F6) C. Check coil continuity of receiver tank pressure
is located on the relay board. The solenoid.
wiring is located in the main harness. D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
This is a check alarm. missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
loose pin crimp or broken wire.
F. Check the harness wire RTPS with an ohmmeter for
continuity using Service Procedure H04A.

106 Purge Valve Solenoid Circuit A. Check fuse F6 on the relay board.
Indicates that a problem exists in the B. Check the operation of the purge valve solenoids
purge valve solenoids or associated using Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Test
circuitry. The purge valve solenoid [rbt17].
LED and fuse (F6) is located on the
relay board. The wiring is located in C. Check coil continuity of purge valve solenoid.
the main harness. This is a check D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
alarm. missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
loose pin crimp or broken wire.
F. Check the harness wire PV with an ohmmeter for
continuity using Service Procedure H04A.

18 October 2001 5-19

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

107 Condenser Inlet Solenoid Circuit A. Check fuse F6 on the relay board.
Indicates that a problem exists in the B. Check the operation of the condenser inlet solenoids
condenser inlet solenoids or using Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Test
associated circuit. The condenser [rbt18].
inlet solenoid LED and fuse (F6) is
located on the relay board. The wiring C. Check coil continuity of condenser inlet solenoid.
is located in the main harness. This is D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
a check alarm. missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
broken wire.
E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
loose pin crimp or broken wire.
F. Check the harness wire CIS with an ohmmeter for
continuity using Service Procedure H04A.

108 Door Open Timeout A. This code will occur normally if a door is left open for
Indicates that the door switch sensed more than 1 hour with the unit running.
a door was left open for more than 1 B. Check the harness wire DS, DS2 and DS3 with an volt
hour with the unit running or that a meter. Door closed no voltage should be present. Door
problem exists in the door switch or open voltage will be present.
associated circuitry in Zone 1, 2 or 3
as indicated by display. The fuse C. Check the operation of the door switch.
(F21) is located on the relay board. D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
The wiring is located in the main missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
harness. This is a check alarm. broken wire.
E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
loose pin crimp or broken wire.

109 High Discharge Pressure or Sensor A. Check display of the head pressure by pressing
Indicates that head pressure sensor SELECT key until head pressure displayed.
has failed or head pressure is greater B. Check for blocked or dirty condenser coil.
that 400 PSI during the RPM check in
a Pretrip Test. Alarms that occur C. Check refrigeration system for high discharge
during a Pretrip Test will be identified pressure.
with a (-) in front of code. D. Check the connector at the head pressure sensor for a
NOTE: This Alarm Code always pushed pin, loose pin crimp or broken wire.
occurs during Evacuation Mode. E. Check for defective high pressure transducer per
This is normal. Service Procedure D03A.
F. Check the harness wires PTP, PTN and PTO with an
ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
H04A.

5-20 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

110 Suction Line Solenoid Circuit A. Check fuses F6, F13 and F16 on the relay board.
Indicates that a problem exists in the B. Check the operation of the suction line solenoids using
suction line solenoids or associated Service Procedure A44A Relay Board Tests [rbt10,
circuitry in Zone 1, 2 or 3 as indicated rbt13, and rbt19].
by display. The suction line solenoid
LEDs and fuses (F6, F13 and F16) C. Check coil continuity of suction line solenoids.
are located on the relay board. The D. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
wiring is located in the main harness missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
for Zone 1 (and Zone 2 if the unit is a broken wire.
DE). The wiring is located in the
remote evaporator harnesses for E. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
Zone 2 (if not a DE) and Zone 3. This loose pin crimp or broken wire.
is a check alarm. F. Check the harness wire SLS, SLS2 and SLS3 with an
ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
H04A.

18 October 2001 5-21

Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

111 Unit Not Configured Correctly This alarm code is generated in the following ways:
Indicates that the relay board is not
Power-up: If an invalid jumper configuration is detected
configured to match the actual unit.
on power-up.
Pretrip: If the Zone 2 input is on the unit must be
configured for Zone 2. If the Zone 3 input is on the unit
must be configured for Zone 3 and not be configured for a
PE. If the unit is a PE, the Zone 2 input must match the
Zone 3 input.
Evacuation Mode: If Zone 2 is present it must be on. If
Zone 3 is present it must be on. If the Zone 2 input is on
the unit must be configured for Zone 2. If the Zone 3 input
is on the unit must be configured for Zone 3 and not be
configured for a PE. If the unit is a PE, the Zone 2 input
must match the Zone 3 input.

During Evacuation Mode A. Check unit type and verify that the unit type jumpers
Configuration is checked by on the relay board are set correctly using Service
comparing power on the 8-2 and 8-3 Procedure B03A.
circuits to the configuration jumper B. Be sure the ON/OFF switches for all zones are turned
settings on the relay board. The zone on.
switches must be on to supply this
power or Alarm Code 111 will occur. C. Check for power on the 8-2 circuit and 8-3 circuit (if
used).

During Pretrip Test A. Check unit type and verify that the unit type jumpers
Occurs only on two zone applications on the relay board are set correctly using Service
with dual evaporators. This Procedure B03A.
application uses both the 8-2 and 8-3 B. Check for power on the 8-2 and 8-3 circuits.
circuits.

Occasional Occurrence During A. Check the defrost drain heater for continuity and to be
Normal Operation sure it is connected to Fan Motor 1.
During normal operation Alarm Code
111 may occur when the unit is turned
off with the unit ON/OFF switch and
the zone switches are still on. Fan
Motor 1 in the remote can cause a
false signal on the 8-2 or 8-3 circuits
resulting in Alarm Code 111. The
defrost drain heater should be
connected to Fan Motor 1 to prevent
this from happening.

5-22 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Alarm Codes, Their Causes and Corrective Actions

Code Cause or Explanation Corrective Action (check in order shown)

112 Remote Fan Zone 2-3 Circuit A. Check fuse F12 and F15 on the relay board.
Indicates that a problem exists in the B. Check the operation of the remote fan using Service
remote fan or associated circuitry in Procedure A44A Relay Board Test [rbt04 and rbt06].
Zone 2 or 3 as indicated by display.
The remote fan LEDs and fuses (F12 C. Check the Deutsch connector for a pushed pin or
and F15) are located on the relay missing orange pin wedge or loose pin crimp or
board. The wiring is located in the broken wire.
main harness for Zone 1 (and Zone 2 D. Check connector at the relay board for a pushed pin or
if the unit is a DE). The wiring is loose pin crimp or broken wire.
located in the remote evaporator
harnesses for Zone 2 (if not a DE) and E. Check the harness wire FM2 and FM3 with an
Zone 3. This is a check alarm. ohmmeter for continuity using Service Procedure
H04A.

113 Electric Heat Circuit A. Check the current draw on the electric heat relay with
Indicates that the electric heat relay the microprocessor "Amps" function while in Relay
did not function properly. This alarm is Board Test (not assigned).
only generated during a Pretrip Test
Amp Check. This is a check alarm.

114 Multiple Alarms, Cannot Run A. Check other alarm codes and repair as indicated.
Indicates that the unit has multiple
problems. This is a shutdown alarm.

18 October 2001 5-23

Diagnostics

Other Symptoms Diagnostics However, in some cases a problem may exist

without generating an alarm code. The following
Every effort should be made to pretrip a unit are suggested corrective actions to be taken when
suspected of having a defect. In almost all cases, dealing with these symptoms. They have been
the pretrip will result in a alarm code that will lead broken into sections for ease in locating specific
you directly to the problem. symptoms.

General Problems (such as power problems)

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

General power problems such as Pushed pin in a connector. Isolate the defective circuit and
unit will not come on with the check for pushed pins, miswired
ZONE 1/HOST switch. connectors or defective crimps.

Loose connections in the "2", "8" Check connections and repair as

or "CH" circuits. required.

Display blank, no backlight, no Microprocessor "ON/OFF" switch is Turn the Microprocessor "ON/OFF"
temperature or setpoint showing. turned "off". switch "on".
Dead or disconnected battery. Service battery.
2 and/or 2PA circuit open or CHP Check voltage between pins 10
circuit open to 14 pin (2PA) and 8 (CHP) of the 14 pin
micro-processor connector. connector. Should be 12 Vdc.
Defective microprocessor. Check microprocessor using
Service Procedure A01A.

Intermittent or erratic operation of Loose or broken "CH" wires or Check all "CH" wires and
the microprocessor. connections. connections.

Display shows temperature and 8 circuit open to 37 pin Check for 12 volts on pin 27 of the
setpoint, but backlight does not microprocessor connector. 37 pin microprocessor connector
come on when ZONE 1/HOST when the "ON/OFF" switch is "On".
switch is "On".

Unit starts in CYCLE-SENTRY Normal startup for cold engine Normal operation.
mode with the box temperature temperature or defrost.
within a few degrees of setpoint.
Normal startup for low battery Normal operation.
voltage.

5-24 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

General Problems (continued)

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

Unit will not shut off in Engine coolant temperature not Check water temperature.
CYCLE-SENTRY and the above 100 F (38 C). Determine cause for low water
CYCLE-SENTRY Icon is "On" and temperature.
is not flashing.
Charge rate is not less than the Check the charge rate with the
setting of the CYCLE-SENTRY ammeter and compare with the
Battery Sentry Amperes [CS A]. required charge rate. Check for
charging problems or allow unit to
run to charge the battery.

Unit is required to run to satisfy Verify setpoint and mode of

setpoint or defrost requirements in operation.
a zone.

Ammeter reads "0" when the This is normal. Ammeter does not Turn the ON/OFF switch "On".
ON/OFF switch is "Off". function with the ON/OFF switch
"Off".

18 October 2001 5-25

Diagnostics

Microprocessor Problems

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

Microprocessor displays "----". Pushed pin in the Sensor Harness Reseat pin.
connector at the microprocessor.

Relay Board Problems

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

Erratic operation of one or more Loose fuse connection at fuse Check fit and tension of fuse clip
circuits. next to the relay of suspect circuit. contacts. Bend to tighten as
required.

Pushed pin in component Deutsch Check Deutsch connectors for a

connector. pushed or loose pin.

No output LEDs light on the relay No power on the 8, 8-2 or 8-3 Verify that 12 vdc is present at the
board. circuits. These circuits supply 8A wire on connector J6.
power to all input and output
Check 40 amp fuse F20.
devices through the I/O Module.
Verify that 12 vdc is present at the
8-2 wire on connector J8.
Check 10 amp fuse F16.
Verify that 12 vdc is present at the
8-3 wire on connector J10.
Check 10 amp fuse F13.
Check I/O Module as shown next.

5-26 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

I/O Module Problems

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

No output LEDs light on the relay No power on the 8, 8-2 or 8-3 Check relay board power as
board. circuits. These circuits supply shown above.
power to all input and output
devices through the I/O Module.

No I/O Module power from the Verify microprocessor display

microprocessor. backlight is on.
Verify that 9.3 vdc is present
between pins 9 and 14 on
connector J2. If power is not
present check the interconnect
harness between the micro-
processor and relay board. If
power is present replace the I/O
module.

Output LED is lit but device does Loss of power in that device Verify that 12 vdc is present on
not function. This can be checked circuit. Power is supplied through both sides of the device. This can
using the Relay Board Test as the device. The microprocessor be done by energizing the Run
shown in Service Procedure supplies a ground path via the I/O Relay using the Relay Board Test
A44A. module to turn the device on and as shown in Service Procedure
off. A44A. Device voltages can be
measured at the relay board
connectors J1 (Zone 1 devices),
J8 (Zone 2 devices) or J10 (Zone
3 devices). Measure from the 8-x
wire to chassis ground and from
the device wire to chassis ground.
If power is not present on both
sides of the device the device coil
or circuit is open.

A single output LED will not light Defective I/O Module or burned Replace I/O Module. If this does
and the device does not function. circuit trace on the relay board. not correct the problem there may
This can be checked using the be a burned circuit trace on the
Relay Board Test as shown in relay board. Replace the relay
Service Procedure A44A. board.

18 October 2001 5-27

Diagnostics

I/O Module Problems (continued)

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

All or most device LEDs are Defective or intermittent harness Verify that relay board connector
lighted and should not be or connections. J1 Pin 4 is connected to chassis
erratic operation of outputs. ground.
Verify that relay board connector
J2 Pin 9 is connected to chassis
ground.
Verify continuity as shown below:
Relay Board Microprocessor
J2 19 Pin Connector
Pin 9 Chassis Ground
Pin 10 Pin 6
Pin 11 Pin 11
Pin 12 Pin 7
Pin 13 Pin 13
Pin 14 Pin 10
Pin 15 Pin 8
Pin 16 Pin 1
Pin 17 Pin 4
Pin 18 Pin 5

5-28 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Pretrip Cooling or Heating Capacity Failure

Symptom Cause or Explanation Corrective Action

Unit fails pretrip on loaded trailer Improper air flow in one or more Block the short cycle air path.
for cooling or heating capacity and zones is forcing discharge air to Change load pattern to allow
refrigeration system checks OK. short cycle to return air sensor. proper air flow.
Check bulkheads.
Check air chute if installed.

Unit fails pretrip on empty trailer Improper air flow is forcing Block the short cycle air path.
for cooling or heating capacity and discharge air to short cycle to
Check bulkheads.
refrigeration system checks OK. return air sensor.
Check air chute if installed.

18 October 2001 5-29

Diagnostics

Remote Evaporator Blower Speed Control Harness

Motor Operation The speed control harness functions as a voltage
divider to supply 5.4 volts to the yellow blower
Blower Motor Operation wire. It consists of a zener diode and a resistor.
The blower motor has three wires. The blue wire When the KLX wire is connected to chassis
is connected to chassis ground. The red wire is ground and battery voltage is applied at the FM1
connected to battery power (+12VDC) when the wire, the voltage at the SC wire is 5.4 volts. This
blower is to run. Both wires must be connected in causes the blowers to run at low speed.
order for the blower to run. This voltage is present whether or not the SC wire
The yellow wire controls the blower speed. If the is connected to a blower. If battery voltage is
yellow wire is connected to battery voltage or left present at the SC wire the zener diode is open or
unconnected (0 volts) the blower will run at full the KLX wire is not connected to chassis ground.
speed when battery voltage is applied to the red If battery voltage is applied to the resistor and no
wire. voltage is present at the SC wire the resistor is
open. If the zener diode or resistor is open the
To run the blower in low speed approximately 5.4 speed control harness must be replaced.
volts must be applied to the yellow wire. This
voltage is obtained by means of the speed control Electronic Temperature Switch
harness. For details see the Speed Control Harness
below. The temperature switch has three wires and is
located on the evaporator coil header. The red
The electronic temperature switch is used on some wire is connected to battery voltage via the FM1
TLE blowers to provide two different blower wire. The black wire is connected to chassis
speeds. It switches the speed control harness in ground. The blue wire is switched to chassis
and out of the circuit. In this application the ground by the temperature switch. The blue wire
blowers run in high speed or low speed dependent is internally switched to chassis ground by the
on temperature. For details see the electronic switch until the temperature falls to approximately
temperature switch below. 20 F (-7 C). This connects the KLX wire to
Blower speed will vary dependent on battery chassis ground and causes the blowers to run in
voltage applied to the red wire. low speed. When the temperatures reaches 20 F
(-7 C) the switch opens and removes the chassis
ground from the KLX wire. The blowers then run
in high speed. When the temperature at the switch
rises above30 F (-1 C) the switch again applies
chassis ground to the KLX wire and the blowers
switch back to low speed. If the blue wire is not
switched to chassis ground when the switch
temperature is above approximately 30 F (-1 C)
the switch must be replaced.

5-30 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

TLE Evaporator Blower Speed Controls

There have been three different configurations of blower speed controls on TLE Remote Evaporators.
They are explained in detail below.
All TLE blower motors have a built in "Soft Start" feature that causes the blowers to take 2 minutes to
reach maximum speed after they are turned on. This is an internal feature of the motor itself.
Note that Blower Circuit # 3 is currently used on all production units.
See the following pages for diagnostics and blower speeds.

TLE Blower Circuit # 1

Production History: Original production until July, 1999
Comments: This original configuration operates in high speed (approximately 2600 rpm) in all cases.

Circuit power is applied at FM1, FM2 and FM3

Note 1 - On some evaporators the yellow wire may already be installed in the connector.

18 October 2001 5-31

Diagnostics

TLE Blower Circuit # 2

Production History: August, 1999 to September, 1999 and Field Campaign (Warranty Bulletin 298)
Comments: This configuration operates in low speed (approximately 1800 rpm) in all cases.

Circuit power is applied at FM1, FM2 and FM3.

When 5 vdc is present between SC and KLX the blowers run in low speed.

TLE Blower Circuit # 3

Production History: October, 1999 to current production
Comments: This configuration operates in either low speed (approximately 1800 rpm) or high speed
(approximately 2600 rpm) dependent upon the temperature sensed by an electronic temperature switch.
The electronic temperature switch removes the chassis ground when the temperature falls to 20 F causing
the blowers to run in high speed. The temperature switch supplies the chassis ground when the
temperature rises above 30 F causing the blowers to run in low speed.

Circuit power is applied at FM1, FM2 and FM3.

When 5 Vdc is present between SC and KLX the blowers run in low speed. When no voltage drop is
present between SC and KLX the blowers run in high speed.

5-32 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

SPECTRUM Blower Circuit Without Speed Control

Production History: All Spectrum applications except the parallel evaporators on 3 temperature units
configured 6/3.
Comments: This configuration operates in high speed (approximately 2400 rpm) in all cases.

Circuit power is applied at FM1, FM2 and FM3.

The blower speed control wires are connected from the blower motor to the terminal board in the remote
evaporator but are otherwise used.

SPECTRUM 6-3 Blower Circuit With Speed Control

Production History: Only the parallel evaporators on 3 temperature Spectrum applications configured 6/3.
Comments: This configuration operates in low speed (approximately 1600 rpm) in all cases.

Circuit power is applied at FM1, FM2 and FM3.

When 5 Vdc is present between SC and KLX the blowers run in low speed.

18 October 2001 5-33

Diagnostics

Communication and DPD Diagnostics

Circuit Problems If problems exist check the following:
NAD Units Only: The information shown below is • If the data logger fails the Link Test, be sure
valid only for NAD units. EAME units use a CE the correct cable is used and is properly
marked microprocessor that features internal connected at both the unit and the download
control of the serial communications port. The device.
DPD wire is not used on these units.
• If the unit will not download, check the
NAD microprocessors feature a multiplexed serial download cable to be sure the DPD wire is
communication port. The multiplexed port will be connected to ground when the cable is
referred to as COM 1 and COM 1A. The DPD attached.
circuit is used to control the operation of COM 1
and COM1A as shown below. • If the unit is equipped with a remote control
and the control display shows [LOSt Con]
Units Without DAS when the download cable is not connected,
check for a short to ground in the DPD circuit.
Operation
Units With DAS
NAD units that do not feature Data Acquisition
Systems (DAS) use COM 1 as the download port Operation
and COM 1A as the remote control port. The DPD
wire controls the operation of the port. NAD units with DAS use COM 1 to connect to
the DAS module (at the DAS Com 2 port) and
• When the DPD wire is open the port functions COM 1A as the remote control port. DAS
as a remote control port (COM 1A). equipped units must use software revision 2010 or
• When the download cable is connected to the later.
port chassis ground is connected to the DPD On units with 2010 and later software the DPD
wire. This causes the port to function as a wire controls the operation of the port using the
download port (COM 1) any time the relay board 26E2 circuit. The 26E2 circuit
download cable is connected. connects the DPD wire to chassis ground for 0.5
• If the download cable is connected to a unit seconds every 15 seconds. This operation can be
with a remote control installed, the remote verified by checking relay board LED 102. This
control loses use of the port as long as the LED will be lit but dim at all times. Every 15
download cable is connected. As a result, the seconds LED 102 will blink brightly for 0.5
remote control will display [LOSt Con] when seconds as the DPD circuit is connected to
the download cable is connected. Normal ground.
remote control operation will resume when the • When the DPD wire is open (LED 102 is dim)
download cable is removed. the port functions as a remote control port
(COM 1A).
• When the DPD wire is connected to chassis
ground for 0.5 seconds (LED 102 is lit
brightly) COM 1 is connected to the DAS.
This allows the DAS to update the
microprocessor data.
• If the remote control is being used when the
DPD wire is connected to chassis ground to
allow a DAS update, a slight delay may be
noticed in the remote control operation. This
is normal operation.

5-34 18 October 2001

 Diagnostics

Diagnostics
If communications problems exist check the
following:
• If the data logger fails the Link Test, be sure
the correct cable is used and is properly
connected at both the unit and the download
device.
• If the DAS is not being updated, check to be
sure the DPD wire is connected to ground
every 15 seconds by observing LED 102. To
check DAS update operation, press the
microprocessor Select key to display the DAS
sensors. If these sensors cannot be displayed
DAS is not being updated. Turn the unit
On/Off switch off and connect the DPD wire
directly to chassis ground. Turn the unit
On/Off switch back on. If the DAS sensors
appear after about 30 seconds check the 26E2
and DPD circuits for operation as stated
above.
• If the unit is equipped with a remote control
and the control display shows [LOSt Con]
when the download cable is not connected,
check for a short to ground in the DPD circuit.

18 October 2001 5-35

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section 6
Service Procedures
Microprocessor Procedures Relay Board Procedures
A01A Microprocessor Test B02A Relay Board Removal and
A01B Remote Control Panel Test Replacement
A02A Recording Existing Microprocessor B03A Unit Configuration Jumper Setup
Settings B04A Input/Output Module Replacement
A03A Removal and Replacement of
Shunt Procedures
Microprocessor
A04A Microprocessor Setup C01A Shunt Test
A05A Clock/Calendar Setup C02A Shunt Calibration
A06A Checking Software Revision Air Temperature Sensor Procedures
A07A Performing a Cold Start D01A Temperature Sensor Test
A08A Security Code Activation and D02A Checking Graded Sensor Calibration
Deactivation with an Ice Water Bath
A09A Entering Guarded Access when a D03A Pressure Transducer Test
Security Code is Active
A10A Maintenance Alarm Setup and/or Engine and Other Sensor or Switch
Clearing Code 73 Procedures
A12A ESD (Electro Static Discharge) F01A Engine Oil Level Switch Testing and
Procedures Replacement
A13A Microprocessor Software PROM F03A Oil Pressure Sensor Testing and
Change Replacement
A14A Microprocessor Faceplate Change F05A Oil Pressure Switch Testing and
A15A Temperature Sensor Grade Replacement
Calibration F07A Coolant Level Sensor Test
A16A Battery Connection and Disconnection F08A Coolant Temperature Sensor Test
A17A Full PreTrip F09A RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment
A18A Engine Running PreTrip F10A Checking and Adjusting Engine RPM
A19A Security Code Bypass
Miscellaneous Procedures
A26A Welding on Units Equipped with
Microprocessors H01A Connector Repair Using Pigtail
A28A Setting Running Time Hourmeters H04A Checking Harness Continuity
TLHR, ENHR, ELHR, TLZ2, and TLZ3
A31A Clearing Alarm Codes from Super
Guarded Access
A32A Operating Sleep Mode
A34A Operating Service Test Mode
A44A Operating Relay Board Test Mode
 Service Procedure A01A
A01A Microprocessor Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure should be used to functionally test a Multi-Temp µP-IV microprocessor using the
Microprocessor Tester (Service Part # 204-856). Test # 1 tests the operation of the keypad and the general
calibration. Test # 2 shows all segments of the display and then tests the actual operation of the
microprocessor.

Important Information
On version 2011 software the microprocessor display will show [DOOr OPEN] when test 1 is selected. If
this occurs, wait 2 minutes for the display to return to the Standard Display and proceed with the test.

18 October 2001 A01A-1 P41KA01A

Service Procedure A01A

Test Preparation
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn off all zone switches and The display should be "dead".
the microprocessor power
switch.

2 Disconnect the unit battery. This ensures that all control

circuits are "dead".

Connect the Tester

Step Action Results Comments

1 Disconnect the three

connectors (four if equipped
with communications) from the
rear of the microprocessor.

2 Place the three position switch

on the tester in the center (Off)
position.

3 Attach the three connectors

from the tester harness to the
rear of the microprocessor.

4 Attach the red lead to +12 Vdc A regulated 13.6 volt power
at the battery. supply may also be used to
power the tester.

5 Attach the black lead to ground

(-) at the battery.

Test 1 - Keypad Test

Step Action Results Comments

1 Place the tester switch in the The display and backlight will The backlight and display will
"Test 1" position. flash on and off. The display continue to flash during all of
will show the box temperature, test one. The Alarm icon will be
setpoint, Zone 1 and the alarm present during all tests.
icon. This is the Standard
display for Zone 1. The box
temperature shown must be
between -15.0 F (-26 C) and
57.0 F (14 C).

1A IMPORTANT: On version
2011 software the display
will show [DOOr OPEN]
when test 1 is selected. Wait
2 minutes for the display to
return to the Standard
Display for Zone 1.

P41KA01A A01A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A01A

Step Action Results Comments

2 Press the HOURS key. [TLHR] must show in the

display along with the actual
unit hours.

3 Press the HOURS key [ENHR] thru [HRM.6] must

repeatedly to step from show in the display along with
[ENHR], [ELHR], [TLZ2], the actual recorded hours for
[TLZ3] and [HRM.6]. each hourmeter.

4 Press the OIL PRESS key. [OIL.P] and [0] or [LOW] must
show in the display.

5 Press the WATER TEMP key. The display must show

[WAT.T] and a temperature
value between -15.0 F (-26 C)
and 57.0 F (14 C).

6 Press the AMPS key. The display must show [AMPS]

and a value between [5.0] and
[35.0].

7 Press the SELECT key. The display must show

[CYCLS] and [YES] or [NO].

8 Press the SELECT key again. The display must show

[AMB.T] and a value between
-15.0 F (-26 C) and 57.0 °F
(14 C).

9 Press the SELECT key again to The voltage shown should be

display [BATV]. within ± 0.4 volt of the actual
voltage as measured at the
battery or dc power supply.

10 Press the SELECT key again to The number shown in the top
display [RPM]. display should be between 940
and 1840.

11 Press the SELECT key again to The number shown in the top
display [HED.P]. display should be between 100
and 150.

12 Press the SELECT key again. The display must show [RET.A] The Zone 1 icon will also be
and a value between -15.0 F shown in the display.
(-26 C) and 57.0 F (14 C).

13 Press the SELECT key again. The display must show [DIS.A] The Zone 1 icon will also be
and a value between -15.0 F shown in the display.
(-26 C) and 57.0 F (14 C).

14 Press the SELECT key again. The display must show [TPDF] The Zone 1 icon will also be
and a number. shown in the display.

15 Press the SELECT key again. The display must show [COIL] The Zone 1 icon will also be
and a value between -15.0 F shown in the display.
(-26 C) and 57.0 F (14 C).

18 October 2001 A01A-3 P41KA01A

Service Procedure A01A

Step Action Results Comments

16 Press the SELECT key again to This is the standard display.

display temperature, setpoint,
Zone 1 and the alarm icon.

17 Press the SETPOINT UP ARROW The setpoint must increase.

key.

18 Press the SETPOINT DOWN The setpoint must decrease.

ARROW key.

19 Press the ENTER key. The word [LOAD] will appear in The new setpoint will be
place of the setpoint. entered.

20 Press the CODE key. An alarm code number and

[ALRM] should appear in the
display.

21 Press the CLEAR key Some alarms should clear but

repeatedly to clear alarms. will reappear since the
microprocessor is not installed
in a unit.

22 Press and hold the T-K key

until [PrE TRIP] shows in the
display.

23 Press the SELECT key to Record the software revision

display [REV] and the software number for future use.
revision number.

24 When the test is complete,

place the tester switch in the
"off" position and allow the
display to completely
disappear before proceeding.
Failure to do so may cause the
Tester to continue to run
Test 1.

P41KA01A A01A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A01A

Test 2 - Microprocessor Auto Test

Step Action Results Comments

1 Place the tester switch in the

"off" position and allow the
display to completely
disappear before proceeding.

2 Place the tester switch in the The display and backlight will
"Test 2" position. This test is come on, [TEST] will appear
completely automatic. on the display and the auto
test will be started.

3 All the display segments and

icons will be temporarily lighted
to allow a visual check of the
display. Be sure all segments
and icons are lighted during
this segment of the test.

4 After the display test the

display will show the test in
progress (from 1-15) and the
backlight will turn on and off.
This is normal.

5 The entire auto test sequence After the test is complete

will take about 30 seconds. [PASS] or [FAIL] will show in
the display. If [PASS] appears,
the processor has successfully
passed the test. If [FAIL]
appears, the processor should
be considered defective.

Remove the Tester

Step Action Results Comments

1 Place the tester switch in the

"off" position.

2 Remove the tester power

connections.

3 Remove the tester connectors

from the rear of the
microprocessor.

4 Reconnect the control box

harness connectors to the rear
of the microprocessor.

5 Reconnect the unit battery.

18 October 2001 A01A-5 P41KA01A

Service Procedure A01A

Step Action Results Comments

6 Turn on the microprocessor The backlight should turn on

power switch and the ZONE and the Standard Display
1/HOST switch. should appear.

NOTE: Test 2 is a continuous test. If the display reads [PASS] and the tester is left connected and the
switch position is not changed, the test will continue to run over and over. If one of the subsequent tests
fail the display will change to [FAIL] and the testing will be terminated. This feature may be used to
test a processor that is suspected of being intermittent.

P41KA01A A01A-6 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A01B
A01B Remote Control Panel Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Applications with Remote Control Panels

Purpose
This procedure should be used to functionally test a Multi-Temp mP-IV remote control panel using the
Remote Control Panel Tester (Service Part # 204-858).

Test Preparation
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the microprocessor The display should be

power switch "Off". "dead".

2 Disconnect the unit battery. This ensures that all control

circuits are "dead".

3 Wear an ESD wrist strap.

Connect the lead from the
wrist strap to the unit chassis
ground.

18 October 2001 A01B-1 P41KA01B

Service Procedure A01B

Connect the Tester

Step Action Results Comment

1 Remove the cover from the

back of the remote control
panel and disconnect the
connector.

2 Place the switch on the

tester in the "Off" position.

3 Attach the connector from

the tester harness to the rear
of the remote control panel.

4 Attach the red lead to A well regulated 13.6 volt

+12 Vdc at the battery. power supply may also be
used to power the tester.

5 Attach the black lead to

ground (-) at the battery.

Testing
Step Action Results Comments

1 Place the tester switch in the The remote control panel The display backlight will
"Test" position. The test will display will first show [tESt], alternately turn off, on in low
take about 50 seconds. then each segment and icon intensity and then on in high
of the display will be lighted intensity. This is normal.
individually. Next, all
segments and icons are
lighted and then the test
results are shown as either
[PASS] or [FAIL].

2 To test the remote control Observe the visual feedback Keys may be pressed
panel keypad, press each on the display. The upper repeatedly in necessary to
keypad key. row of keys displays "n", the check for intermittent
center row displays "H" and operation.
the lower row displays "U".
The character will appear in
the lower display in the left,
center or right position to
match the key location on
the keypad.

3 When the test is complete,

place the tester switch in the
"off" position.

P41KA01B A01B-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A01B

Remove the Tester

Step Action Results Comments

1 Remove the tester power

connections.

2 Remove the tester connector

from the rear of the remote
control panel.

3 Reconnect the harness

connector to the rear of the
remote control panel.

4 Reconnect the unit battery.

5 Turn the microprocessor The Standard Display should

power switch "on" and press appear.
the ZONE 1 ON key on the
remote control panel.

6 Confirm operation of the

remote control panel by
turning zones on and off.

18 October 2001 A01B-3 P41KA01B

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A02A
A02A Recording Existing Microprocessor Settings
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to retrieve and record the current settings of a microprocessor. These
settings will then be duplicated in the replacement microprocessor. This must be done prior to
replacement of a microprocessor or before performing a "Cold Start".

Steps
NOTE: It may not be possible to accomplish part or all of this process with a defective microprocessor.
If not, the information must be obtained from customer records. Information that is retrieved from
Guarded Access and Super Guarded Access may not be retrievable if all check and shutdown alarm
codes cannot be cleared.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Obtain a copy of the Setup This sheet will be used to

Information Sheet at the record the information as it is
back of this procedure. retrieved.

2 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

3 Press the SELECT Key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER Key.

4 Press the HOURS key. The display will show [TLHR] Record the [TLHR] hours on
and the hours. the Setup Information Sheet.

5 Press the HOURS key again The display will show Record the [ENHR] hours on
to display [ENHR]. [ENHR] and the hours. the Setup Information Sheet.

6 Press the HOURS key again The display will show Record the [ELHR] hours on
to display [ELHR]. [ELHR] and the hours. the Setup Information Sheet.

7 Press the HOURS key again The display will show [TLZ2] Record the [TLZ2] hours on
to display [TLZ2]. and the hours. the Setup Information Sheet.

8 Press the HOURS key again The display will show [TLZ3] Record the [TLZ3] hours on
to display [TLZ3]. and the hours. the Setup Information Sheet.

9 Press the HOURS key again The display will show Record the [HRM.6] hours
to display [HRM.6]. [HRM.6] and the hours. on the Setup Information
Sheet.

10 Press and hold the T-K key The display will show [PrE
for three seconds. TRIP].

18 October 2001 A02A-1 P41KA02A

Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Results Comments

11 Press the SELECT key as The display will show [REV] Record the [REV] revision
required to display the and the software revision. on the Setup Information
software revision [REV]. Sheet.

12 Press the SELECTkey again The display will show the Record the [YEAR] year on
to display [YEAR]. year and [YEAR]. the Setup Information Sheet.
Only available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

13 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the Record the [MNTH] month
to display [MNTH]. month and [MNTH]. on the Setup Information
Sheet. Only available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

14 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the Record the [dAy] day on the
to display [dAy]. [dAy] and day of the week. Setup Information Sheet.
Only available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

15 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the Record the [DATE] date on
to display [DATE]. date and [DATE]. the Setup Information Sheet.
Only available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

16 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the Record the [HOUR] hour on
to display [HOUR]. hour and [HOUR]. the Setup Information Sheet.
Only available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

17 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the Record the [MIN] minute on
to display [MIN]. minute and [MIN]. the Setup Information Sheet.
Only available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

18 Press the SELECT key again The display will show nO No entry required. Only
to display [SOT]. and [SOT]. available on
microprocessors with
communications option.

19 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the
to return to the Standard Standard Display.
Display.

20 Clear any alarm codes using [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes cannot be
the CODE and CLEAR keys cleared, access to Guarded
and allow the display to Access may be restricted. If
return to the Standard so, no further information
Display. can be obtained.

P41KA02A A02A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Results Comments

21 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show the Record the [H6TY]
and Clear keys for 5 or more hour meter type and [H6TY]. Hourmeter 6 Type number
seconds. This will place the If the display shows [CODE], on the Setup Information
controller in "Guarded you must first enter the Sheet.
Access" mode. proper security code or
bypass the security code.
See Service Procedures
A09A and A19A. Record the
security code number for
later use.

22 Press the SELECT key to The display will show the Record the [H6LM]
display [H6LM]. NOTE: hour meter limit and [H6LM]. Hourmeter 6 Limit on the
[H6LM] will only appear if Setup Information Sheet.
[H6TY] is set to 1, 2 or 15.

23 Press the SELECT key again The display will show the Record the [HRM.6]
to display [HRM.6]. hours and [HRM.6]. Hourmeter 6 Hours on the
Setup Information Sheet.

24 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [DEFIA] Defrost
to display [DEFIA]. This [DEFIA] and a number. Interval In Range - Fresh
screen does not appear in all Range Setpoint number on
versions of software. the Setup Information Sheet.

25 Press the SELECTkey again The display will show Record the [DEFIA] Defrost
to display [DEFNA]. This [DEFNA] and a number. Interval Not In Range - Fresh
screen does not appear in all Range Setpoint number on
versions of software. the Setup Information Sheet.

26 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [DEFIb] Defrost
to display [DEFIb]. This [DEFIb] and a number. Interval In Range - Frozen
screen does not appear in all Range Setpoint number on
versions of software. the Setup Information Sheet.

27 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [DEFNb] Defrost
to display [DEFNb]. This [DEFNb] and a number. Interval Not In Range -
screen does not appear in all Frozen Range Setpoint
versions of software. number on the Setup
Information Sheet.

28 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [DEF] Record the [DEF] Defrost
to display [DEF]. This screen and FIXT or VART. Time [FIXT] or [VART] on the
does not appear in all Setup Information Sheet.
versions of software.

29 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [DDUR] Defrost
to display [DDUR]. [DDUR] in minutes. Duration Limit [30] or [45] on
the Setup Information Sheet.

18 October 2001 A02A-3 P41KA02A

Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Results Comments

30 Press and hold both the T-K This will place the controller Record the [CRA1] Calibrate
and CLEAR keys for 5 or in "Super Guarded Access" Return Air Zone 1 sensor
more seconds. mode. The display will show grade number on the Setup
[CRA1] and the grade of the Information Sheet. Verify
sensor from 1L through 9H. that this grade number
matches the grade number
shown on the decal in the
electrical box.

31 Press the SELECT key to The display will show Record the [CDA1] Calibrate
display [CDA1]. [CDA1] and the grade of the Discharge Air Zone 1 sensor
sensor from 1L three 9H. grade number on the Setup
Information Sheet. Verify
that this grade number
matches the grade number
shown on the decal in the
electrical box.

32 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [CRA2] Calibrate
to display [CRA2]. [CRA2] and the grade of the Return Air Zone 2 sensor
sensor from 1L three 9H. grade number on the Setup
Information Sheet. Verify
that this grade number
matches the grade number
shown on the decal in the
electrical box.

33 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [CDA2] Calibrate
to display [CDA2]. This [CDA2] and the grade of the Discharge Air Zone 2 sensor
screen will only appear if the sensor from 1L three 9H. grade number on the Setup
unit is configured with the Information Sheet. Verify
relay board jumpers as an that this grade number
SB-III DE-2 or SB-III DE-3. matches the grade number
shown on the decal in the
electrical box.

34 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [CRA3] Calibrate
to display [CRA3]. This [CRA3] and the grade of the Return Air Zone 3 sensor
screen will only appear if the sensor from 1L three 9H. grade number on the Setup
unit is configured with the Information Sheet. Verify
relay board jumpers as a that this grade number
three zone unit. matches the grade number
shown on the decal in the
electrical box.

35 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [CS A] Record the [CS A] Cycle
to display [CS A]. and a number. Sentry Battery Sentry
Amperes number on the
Setup Information Sheet.

36 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [DEG] Record the [DEG] Display
to display [DEG]. and F or C. Fahrenheit or Celsius as F or
C on the Setup Information
Sheet.

P41KA02A A02A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Results Comments

37 Press the SELECT key again With software prior to Record the [OIL] Oil
to display [OIL]. revision 2020 the display will Pressure Display or
show [OIL] and PSI, KPA or Switch/Sender as PSI, KPA,
BARS. BARS, STCH or SNDR on
With software revision 2020 the Setup Information Sheet.
and later the display will
show STCH or SNDR.

38 Press the SELECT key again With software revision 2020 Record the [PrESr] Pressure
to display [PrESr]. This the display will show [PrESr] Display as PSI, KPA or
screen does not appear in all and PSI, KPA or BARS. BARS on the Setup
versions of software. Information Sheet.

39 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record [SET.1] Display
to display [SET.1]. [SET.1] and YES or nO. Tenths as Yes or No on the
Setup Information Sheet.
YES will display setpoint
temperature in tenths of a
degree.

40 Press and hold both the T-K This will place the controller Record the [STH1] Setpoint
and CLEAR keys for 5 or in "Embedded Access" Limit High Zone 1 number on
more seconds. mode. The display will show the Setup Information Sheet.
[STH1] and a number.

41 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STL1] Record the [STL1] Setpoint
to display [STL1]. and a number. Limit Low Zone 1 number on
the Setup Information Sheet.

42 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STH2] Record the [STH2] Setpoint
to display [STH2]. and a number. Limit High Zone 2 number on
the Setup Information Sheet.

43 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STL2] Record the [STL2] Setpoint
to display [STL2]. and a number. Limit Low Zone 2 number on
the Setup Information Sheet.

44 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STH3] Record the [STH3] Setpoint
to display [STH3]. and a number. Limit High Zone 3 number on
the Setup Information Sheet.

45 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STL3] Record the [STL3] Setpoint
to display [STL3]. and a number. Limit Low Zone 3 number on
the Setup Information Sheet.

46 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [RSFD] Ready/
to display [RSFD]. [RSFD] and YES or nO. Remote Switch Off Display
as [YES] or [nO] on the
Setup Information Sheet.

47 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [NULD] Null
to display [NULD]. [NULD] and YES or nO. Delay as YES or nO on the
Setup Information Sheet.

18 October 2001 A02A-5 P41KA02A

Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Results Comments

48 Press the SELECT key again The display will show This number has already
to display [SET.1]. (This also [SET.1] and YES or nO. been recorded.
returns the display to Super
Guarded Access.)

49 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [RFIN] Record the [RFIN] Run Fan
to display [RFIN]. This and YES or nO. in Null as YES or nO on the
screen does not appear in all Setup Information Sheet.
versions of software.

50 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [FZHL] Record the [FZHL] Frozen
to display [FZHL]. This and YES or nO. Heat Lockout as YES or nO
screen does not appear in all on the Setup Information
versions of software. Sheet.

51 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [CSNC]
to display [CSNC]. This [CSNC] and a number. CYCLE-SENTRY Null to
screen does not appear in all Cool Switch Point number
versions of software. on the Setup Information
Sheet.

52 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [FZHL] High
to display [HSPD]. This [HSPD] and YES or nO. Speed Pull Down as YES or
screen does not appear in all nO on the Setup Information
versions of software. Sheet.

53 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [LSSP] Record the [LSSP] Low
to display [LSSP]. This and a number. Speed Switch Point number
screen does not appear in all on the Setup Information
versions of software. Sheet.

54 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [NEWC] New
to display [NEWC]. Record [NEWC] and a number Security Code number on
this value (usually 1) in the XXXX (0001 if the Security the Setup Information Sheet.
table below. If this screen Code is not used).
does not appear, the security
code is active. Record the
security code determined
earlier.

55 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [CSBV]
to display [CSBV]. [CSBV] and a number. CYCLE-SENTRY Battery
Voltage number on the
Setup Information Sheet.

56 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [FLSD] Record the [FLSD] Fuel
to display [FLSD]. and YES or nO. System Shutdown as YES or
nO on the Setup Information
Sheet.

57 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [SPECT]
to display [SPECT]. [SPECT] and YES or nO. Spectrum Unit as YES or nO
on the Setup Information
Sheet.

P41KA02A A02A-6 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A02A

Step Action Results Comments

58 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [SMX] Record the [SMX] SMX
to display [SMX]. and YES or nO. setting as YES or nO on the
Setup Information Sheet.

59 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [HC] Record the [High Capacity]
to display [HC]. This screen and YES or nO. as YES or nO on the Setup
does not appear in all Information Sheet.
versions of software.

60 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [YAN] Record the [YAN] Yanmar
to display [YAN]. This screen and YES or nO. Engine as YES or nO on the
does not appear in all Setup Information Sheet.
versions of software.

61 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [PRNT] Printer
to display [PRNT]. [PRNT] and 40 or 80. Columns as 40 or 80 on the
Setup Information Sheet.

6257A Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [PRNT] Printer
to display [PRNT]. (Not in all [PRNT] and YES or nO. Columns as YES or nO on
versions of software.) the Setup Information Sheet.

63 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [ELOG] Event
to display [ELOG]. [ELOG] and YES or nO. Logger as YES or nO on the
Setup Information Sheet.

64 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [RSWH] Retain
to display [RSWH]. [RSWH] and YES or nO. Switch Setting on Host as
YES or nO on the Setup
Information Sheet.

65 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [FSII] Record the [FSII] Fuel Saver
to display [FSII]. and YES or nO. II as YES or nO on the Setup
Information Sheet.

6660A Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [RNUL] Running
to display [RNUL]. This [RNUL] and YES or nO. Null as YES or nO on the
screen does not appear in all Setup Information Sheet.
versions of software.

6760B Press the SELECT key again The display will show Record the [HCSP] Heat
to display [HCSP]. This [HCSP] and a number. Cool Switch Point number
screen does not appear in all on the Setup Information
versions of software. Sheet.

68 Press the SELECT key again. The Standard Display The retrieval process is
appears. complete.

18 October 2001 A02A-7 P41KA02A

Service Procedure A02A

Setup Information Sheets

Use the Setup Information Sheets on the next two pages to record the current microprocessor settings.
IMPORTANT: Not all screens appear with all versions of software.
The following notes apply to the Setup Information Sheets.
1 = Only available on microprocessors with communications (Data Logger)
2 = Set to customers "Home Base Time Zone" time
3 = Start of Trip
4 = May not show on all applications
5 = Appears only if configured as an SB-III DE-2 or SB-III DE-3 unit

P41KA02A A02A-8 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A02A

Setup Information Sheet

Access Key Function Standard Setting Recorded Setting
HOURS [TLHR] Protection Time
HOURS [ENHR] Diesel Run Time
HOURS [ELHR] Electric Run Time
HOURS [TLZ2] Zone 2 On Time
HOURS [TLZ3] Zone 3 On Time
HOURS [HRM.6] Customer Option
Access Key Function Standard Setting Recorded Setting
T-K [PrE TRIP] No Reading Available
SELECT [PRNT]1 nO Not Required
SELECT [REV] Software Revision
SELECT [YEAR]1 Current Date
SELECT [MNTH]1 Current Date
SELECT [dAy]1 Current Date
SELECT [DATE]1 Current Date
SELECT [HOUR]1 Current Time2
SELECT [MIN]1 Current Time
SELECT [SOT]1,3 nO Not Required
Access Key Function Standard Setting Recorded Setting
T-K & CLEAR Guarded Access No Reading Available
SELECT [H6TY] Customer Option
SELECT [H6LM]4 Customer Option
SELECT [HRM.6] Customer Option
SELECT [DEFIA]4 6
SELECT [DEFNA]4 4
SELECT [DEFIb]4 6
SELECT [DEFNb]4 4
SELECT [DEF]4 VART
SELECT [DDUR] 45
T-K & CLEAR Super Guarded Access No Reading Available
SELECT [CRA1] Check sensor/decal
SELECT [CDA1] Check sensor/decal
SELECT [CRA2] Check sensor/decal
SELECT [CDA2]5 Check sensor/decal
SELECT [CRA3] Check sensor/decal
SELECT [CS A] 5
SELECT [DEG] F°

18 October 2001 A02A-9 P41KA02A

Service Procedure A02A

Access Key Function Standard Setting Recorded Setting

SELECT [OIL] PSI or STCH
SELECT [PrESr]4 PSI
SELECT [SET.1] nO
T-K & CLEAR [STH1] 80
SELECT [STL1] -20
SELECT [STH2] 80
SELECT [STL2] -20
SELECT [STH3] 80
SELECT [STL3] -20
SELECT [RSFD] YES
SELECT [NULD] nO
SELECT [SET.1] nO
SELECT [RFIN]4 nO
SELECT [FZHL]4 YES
SELECT [CSNC]4 5
SELECT [HSPD]4 YES
SELECT [LSSP]4 5 F (2 C)
SELECT [NEWC] 1
SELECT [CSBV] 12.2
SELECT [FLSD] YES
SELECT [SPECT]4 YES
SELECT [SMX] nO
SELECT [HC]4 nO
SELECT [YAN]4 nO
SELECT [PRNT] 40
SELECT [PRNT]4 nO
SELECT [ELOG] YES
SELECT [RSWH] YES
SELECT [FSII] nO
SELECT [RNUL]4 YES
SELECT [HCSP]4 YES
SELECT Standard Display

P41KA02A A02A-10 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A03A
A03A Removal and Replacement of Microprocessor
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be followed when replacing a microprocessor.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 If possible, log existing This information will be used

microprocessor setting using to set up the replacement
Service Procedure A02A. microprocessor.

2 Turn the microprocessor The display should be

power switch off. "dead".

3 Disconnect the unit battery. This ensures that all control

circuits are "dead".

4 Wear an ESD wrist strap. Proper Electro Static

Connect the lead from the Discharge procedures must
wrist strap to the unit chassis be followed. See Service
ground. Procedure A12A.

5 Disconnect the three

connectors (four if equipped
with communications) from
the rear of the
microprocessor.

6 Remove the six screws Keep the bezel clean and

securing the microprocessor dust free. Clean the inside of
to the door and remove the the upper window if
microprocessor. necessary.

7 Remove the replacement Protect both

microprocessor from the microprocessors from ESD
ESD bag. The defective and physical damage.
microprocessor should be
placed in the ESD bag.

8 Install the new Check the part number of

microprocessor, using one the replacement
gasket on each side of the microprocessor to be sure it
door and reattach with the is the same as the one
six screws. removed.
Do not over tighten the
mounting screws as this will
damage the bezel.

18 October 2001 A03A-1 P41KA03A

Service Procedure A03A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Reattach the connectors at Be sure all connectors are

the rear of the completed seated and all
microprocessor. connector lock rings are
locked.

10 Remove the wrist strap.

11 Reconnect the unit battery.

12 Turn the microprocessor The "Standard Display"

power switch and ZONE should appear.
1/HOST switches on.

13 Clear alarm codes using the Code 74 cannot be cleared

CODE and CLEAR keys. in the conventional manner.
It must be cleared using
Service Procedure A04A.

14 On new replacement Applies only to new

microprocessors set up the replacement
unit running time hourmeters microprocessors.
TLHR, ENHR and ELHR
using Service Procedure
A28A

15 Set up all programmable Alarm Code 74 can be

features using Service cleared at this time.
Procedure A04A.

16 Set up the clock/calendar

using Service Procedure
A05A.

17 Set up the data logger using

Service Procedure A20A.

18 Run a Full Pretrip Test per The Pretrip Test will verify
Service Procedure A17A. proper operation.

P41KA03A A03A-2
 Service Procedure A04A
A04A Microprocessor Setup
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure must be used to set up a new microprocessor or after replacement or performing a Cold
Start. It must also be performed any time an Alarm Code 74 has been experienced. For a complete
discussion of the programmable features see Section 3.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Obtain a completed copy of This information on this copy

the Setup Information Sheet. will be used to set up the
microprocessor.

2 If replacing a Be certain the part numbers Consult the information in

microprocessor, check the are the same to avoid Section 7 for software and
part number of the new replacing a microprocessor hardware features and
microprocessor against the with communications with a interchange.
part number of the original microprocessor without
microprocessor. communications or vice
versa.

3 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

4 Press the SELECT key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER key.

5 Press and hold the T-K key [PrE TRIP] appears on the
for three seconds. display.

6 Press the SELECT key to The display will show the If replacing a
display the software revision software revision and [Rev]. microprocessor, be sure the
and allow the display to software revision is the
return to the Standard same as used in the original
Display. microprocessor.

7 Clear any alarm codes by Code 74 alarm cannot be

using the CODE and CLEAR cleared in the conventional
keys and allow the display to manner. It will be cleared
return to the Standard later in this procedure.
Display.

18 October2001 A04A-1 P41KA04A

Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

8 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show [H6TY]
and CLEAR keys for 5 or and a number. If the display
more seconds. This will shows [CODE], you must
place the controller in first enter the proper security
"Guarded Access" mode. code or bypass the security
code. See Service
Procedures A09A and A19A.

9 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [H6TY]

keys, set [H6TY] to match and the new number.
the number shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load the new
value. If no number is shown
on the Setup Information
Sheet, proceed to the next
step.

10 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [H6LM] will show if the
to display [HRM.6]. If [H6LM] [HRM.6] and the number of hourmeter type was set to 1,
appears see the comment at hours. If [H6LM] appears 2 or 15 in the step above. If
the right. see the comment at the the hourmeter type was set
right. to any other value, [H6LM]
will not appear. If [H6LM]
appears, enter the [H6LM]
limit hours as shown on the
Setup Information Sheet with
the UP-DOWN arrow keys and
then press ENTER to load.
Press the SELECT key again
to display [HRM.6].

11 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show The hour meters will not
keys, set [HRM.6] to match [HRM.6] and the new hours. return to zero. They should
the number of hours shown be set to "1" when reset.
on the Setup Information
Sheet and press ENTER to
load the new value. If no
number is shown on the
Setup Information Sheet,
proceed to the next step.

12 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [FLSD] Record the [FLSD] Fuel
to display [FLSD]. This and YES or nO. System Shutdown as YES or
screen does not appear in all nO on the Setup Information
versions of software. Sheet.

13 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Defrost Interval In
keys, set [DEFIA] to match [DEFIA] and the new setting. Range - Fresh Range
the setting shown on the Setpoint [DEFIA] setting.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [DEFIA]
to 6.

P41KA04A A04A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

14 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [DEFNA]. This [DEFNA] and 2, 4, 6, 8, or
screen does not appear in all 12.
versions of software.

15 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Defrost Interval
keys, set [DEFNA] to match [DEFNA] and the new Not In Range - Fresh Range
the setting shown on the setting. Setpoint [DEFNA] setting.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set
[DEFNA] to 4.

16 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [DEFIb]. This [DEFIb] and 2, 4, 6, 8, or 12.
screen does not appear in all
versions of software.

17 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Defrost Interval In
keys, set [DEFIb] to match [DEFIb] and the new setting. Range - Frozen Range
the setting shown on the Setpoint [DEFIb] setting.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [DEFIb]
to 6.

18 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [DEFNb]. This [DEFNb] and 2, 4, 6, 8, or
screen does not appear in all 12.
versions of software.

19 Using theUP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Defrost Interval
keys, set [DEFNb] to match [DEFNb] and the new Not In Range - Frozen
the setting shown on the setting. Range Setpoint [DEFNb]
Setup Information Sheet and setting.
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set
[DEFNb] to 4.

20 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [DEF]
to display [DEF]. This and VART or FIXT.
screen does not appear in all
versions of software.

21 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [DEF] This determines the setting
keys to set [DEF] to match and the new setting. of the Defrost Time Interval
the setting shown on the Fixed or Variable [DEF].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [DEF]
to VART.

22 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [DDUR]. [DDUR] and 30 or 45.

18 October 2001 A04A-3 P41KA04A

Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

23 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the maximum Defrost
keys, set [DDUR] to match [DDUR] and the new Duration [DDUR] interval.
the number of minutes minutes.
shown on the Setup
Information Sheet and press
ENTER to load. If no number
is shown, set [DDUR] to 45.

24 Press and hold both the T-K This will place the controller
and CLEAR keys for 5 or in "Super Guarded Access"
more seconds. The display mode.
will show [CRA1].

25 Press the CODE key to The display will show [00] or Other alarms could also be
display code [74] or [00]. [74]. present.

26 Press the CLEAR key to clear The display will show [00].
the [74] alarm.

27 Press the SELECT key once

to return to the Guarded
Access menu.

28 The display will show The display will show

[CRA1]. [CRA1] and the grade of the
Zone 1 Return Air Sensor
(1L thru 9H).

29 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the calibrate return air
keys, set [CRA1] to match [CRA1] and the new grade. sensor Zone 1 [CRA1]
the grade shown on the setting. Verify that this grade
Setup Information Sheet or number matches the grade
decal and press ENTER to number shown on the decal
load. in the electrical box. If any
question exists, confirm the
grade by physically checking
the Zone 1 return air sensor.

30 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CDA1]. [CDA1] and the grade of the
Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor
(1L thru 9H).

31 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the calibrate
keys, set [CDA1] to match [CDA1] and the new grade. discharge air sensor Zone 1
the grade shown on the [CDA1] setting. Verify that
Setup Information Sheet or this grade number matches
decal and press ENTER to the grade number shown on
load. the decal in the electrical
box. If any question exists,
confirm the grade by
physically checking the Zone
1 discharge air sensor.

P41KA04A A04A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

32 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CRA2]. [CRA2] and the grade of the
Zone 2 return air sensor (1L
thru 9H).

33 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the calibrate return air
keys, set [CRA2] to match [CRA2] and the new grade. sensor Zone 2 [CRA2]
the grade shown on the setting. Verify that this grade
Setup Information Sheet or number matches the grade
decal and press ENTER to number shown on the decal
load. in the electrical box. If any
question exists, confirm the
grade by physically checking
the Zone 2 return air sensor.

34 Press the SELECTkey again The display will show

to display [CDA2]. This [CDA2] and the grade of the
screen will only appear if the Zone 2 Discharge Air Sensor
unit is configured with the (1L thru 9H).
relay board jumpers as an
SB-III DE-2 or SB-III DE-3.

35 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the calibrate
keys, set [CDA2] to match [CDA2] and the new grade. discharge air sensor Zone 2
the grade shown on the [CDA2] setting. Verify that
Setup Information Sheet or this grade number matches
decal and press ENTER to the grade number shown on
load. the decal in the electrical
box. If any question exists,
confirm the grade by
physically checking the Zone
2 discharge air sensor.

36 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CRA3]. This [CRA3] and the grade of the
screen will only appear if the Zone 3 Return Air Sensor
unit is configured with the (1L thru 9H).
relay board jumpers as a
three zone unit.

37 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the calibrate return air
keys, set [CRA3] to match [CRA3] and the new grade. sensor Zone 3 [CRA3]
the grade shown on the setting. Verify that this grade
Setup Information Sheet or number matches the grade
decal and press ENTER to number shown on the decal
load. in the electrical box. If any
question exists, confirm the
grade by physically checking
the Zone 3 return air sensor.

38 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [CS A]
to display [CS A]. and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8.

18 October 2001 A04A-5 P41KA04A

Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

39 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [CS A] This is the CYCLE SENTRY
keys, set [CS A] to match and the new setting. Battery Amperes [CS A]
the setting shown on the setting.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [CS A]
to 5.

40 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [DEG]
to display [DEG]. and [F] or [C].

41 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [DEG] This determines if the
keys, set [DEG] to match the and the new setting. temperature displays in
setting shown on the Setup Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius (C)
Information Sheet and press degrees [DEG].
ENTER to load. If no setting is
shown, set [DEG] to F.

42 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [OIL]
to display [OIL]. and [PSI], [KPA], [BARS],
[STCH] or [SNDR].

43 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [OIL] This determines if the Oil
keys, set [OIL] to match the and the new setting. Pressure [OIL] displays in
setting shown on the Setup PSI, kPa or BARS or if the
Information Sheet and press unit is equipped with an oil
ENTER to load. If no setting is pressure switch [STCH] or
shown, set [OIL] to PSI or sender [SNDR].
STCH.

44 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [PrESr]. This [PrESr] and [PSI], [KPA] or
screen does not appear in all [BARS].
versions of software.

45 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines if the
keys, set [PrESr] to match [PrESr] and the new setting. Pressure [PrESr] displays in
the setting shown on the PSI, kPa or BARS.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [PrESr]
to PSI.

46 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [SET.1]. [SET.1] and [YES] or [nO].

47 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show nO = Setpoint will be
keys, set [SET.1] to match [SET.1] and the new setting. displayed in whole degrees.
the setting shown on the YES = Setpoint will be
Setup Information Sheet and displayed in tenths of a
press ENTER to load. If no degree.
setting is shown, set [SET.1]
to nO.

P41KA04A A04A-6 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

48 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show [STH1]
and CLEAR keys to enter and a number.
Embedded Access mode
and to display [STH1].

49 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [STH1] This determines the setpoint
keys, set [STH1] to match and the new setting. limit high range for Zone 1
the setting shown on the [STH1].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [STH1]
to 80 F (27 C).

50 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STL1]
to display [STL1]. and a number.

51 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [STL1] This determines the setpoint
keys, set [STL1] to match and the new setting. limit low range for Zone 1
the setting shown on the [STL1].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [STL1]
to -20 F (-29 C).

52 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STH2]
to display [STH2]. and a number.

53 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [STH2] This determines the setpoint
keys, set [STH2] to match and the new setting. limit high range for Zone 2
the setting shown on the [STH2].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [STH2]
to 80 F (27 C).

54 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STL2]
to display [STL2]. and a number.

55 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [STL2] This determines the setpoint
keys, set [STL2] to match and the new setting. limit low range for Zone 2
the setting shown on the [STL2].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [STL2]
to -20 F (-29 C).

56 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STH3]
to display [STH3]. This and a number.
screen will only appear if the
unit is configured with the
relay board jumpers as a
three zone unit.

18 October 2001 A04A-7 P41KA04A

Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

57 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [STH3] This determines the setpoint
keys, set [STH3] to match and the new setting. limit high range for Zone 3
the setting shown on the [STH3].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [STH3]
to 80 F (27 C).

58 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [STL3]
to display [STL3]. This and a number.
screen will only appear if the
unit is configured with the
relay board jumpers as a
three zone unit.

59 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [STL3] This determines the setpoint
keys, set [STL3] to match and the new setting. limit low range for Zone 3
the setting shown on the [STL3].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [STL3]
to -20 F (-29 C).

60 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [RSFD]. [RSFD] and YES or nO.

61 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines the setting
keys to set [RSFD] to match [RSFD] and the new setting. of the Ready/Remote Switch
the setting shown on the Off Display [RSFD].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [RSFD]
to YES.

62 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [NULD]. [NULD] and YES or nO.

63 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines the setting
keys to set [NULD] to match [NULD] and the new setting. of the Null Delay [NULD].
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [NULD]
to nO.

64 Press the SELECT key again The display will show This setting was already
to exit Embedded Access [SET.1] and [YES] or [nO]. entered earlier.
mode and to display [SET.1].

65 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [RFIN]
to display [RFIN]. and YES or nO.

P41KA04A A04A-8 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

66 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [RFIN] This determines the setting
keys to set [RFIN] to match and the new setting. of Run Fan In Null [RFIN].
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [RFIN]
to nO.

67 Press the SELECT"key again The display will show [FZHL]

to display [FZHL]. and YES or nO.

68 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [FZHL] This determines the setting
keys to set [FZHL] to match and the new setting. of Frozen Heat Lockout
the setting shown on the [FZHL].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [FZHL]
to YES.

69 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CSNC]. This [CSNC] and 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
screen does not appear in all 9, 10, 11 or 12 degrees
versions of software. Fahrenheit (2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7
degrees Celsius).

70 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the CYCLE-SENTRY
keys, set [CSNC] to match [CSNC] and the new setting. Null to Cool Switch Point
the setting shown on the [CSNC] setting.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [CSNC]
to 5 F (2 C).

71 Press the "SELECT" key The display will show

again to display [HSPD]. [HSPD] and YES or nO.
This screen does not appear
in all versions of software.

72 Use the "UP-DOWN" arrow The display will show This determines the setting
keys to set [HSPD] to match [HSPD] and the new setting. of the High Speed Pull Down
the setting shown on the [HSPD].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [HSPD]
to YES.

73 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [LSSP]
to display [LSSP]. This and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
screen does not appear in all or 11 degrees Fahrenheit (1,
versions of software. 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 degrees
Celsius).

18 October 2001 A04A-9 P41KA04A

Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

74 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [LSSP] This is the Low Speed
keys, set [LSSP] to match and the new setting. Switch Point [LSSP] setting.
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [LSSP]
to 5 F (2 C).

75 Press the SELECT key again The display will show Confirm the location of the
to display [NEWC]. [NEWC] and a number relay board jumper if
XXXX (0001 if the Security necessary.
Code is not used).

76 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show If a security code other than
keys to set [NEWC] to match [NEWC] and the new setting. 0001 is entered, it must be
the setting shown on the activated using the
Setup Information Sheet and Activation section of Service
press ENTER to load. If no Procedure A08A.
setting is shown, set
[NEWC] to 1.

77 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CSBV]. [CSBV] and an number from
11.8 to 12.6.

78 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines the setting
keys to set [CSBV] to match [CSBV] and the new setting. of the CYCLE-SENTRY
the setting shown on the Battery Voltage [CSBV].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [CSBV]
to 12.2.

79 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [FLSD]
to display [FLSD]. and YES or nO.

80 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [FLSD] This determines the setting
keys to set [FLSD] to match and the new setting. of the Fuel Shutdown
the setting shown on the feature.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [FLSD]
to YES.

81 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [SPECT]. [SPECT] and YES or nO.

82 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show If the unit is an Spectrum™
keys to set [SPECT] to [SPECT] and the new unit [SPECT] must be set to
match the setting shown on setting. YES. With all other units
the Setup Information Sheet [SPECT] must be set to nO.
and press ENTER to load.

83 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [SMX]
to display [SMX]. and [YES] or [nO].

P41KA04A A04A-10 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

84 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [SMX] If the unit is an SMX or SL
keys, set [SMX] to match the and the new setting. unit [SMX] must be set to
setting shown on the Setup YES. With all other units
Information Sheet and press [SMX] must be set to nO.
ENTER to load.

85 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [HC]
to display [HC]. This screen and YES or nO.
does not appear in all
versions of software.

86 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [HC] This determines the setting
keys to set [HC] to match the and the new setting. of the High Capacity SMX
setting shown on the Setup feature.
Information Sheet and press
ENTER to load. If no setting is
shown, set [HC] to nO.

87 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [YAN]
to display [YAN]. and YES or nO.

88 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [YAN] This determines the setting
keys to set [YAN] to match and the new setting. of the Yanmar Engine or
the setting shown on the se2.2 Engine [YAN].
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, check to
see if the unit equipped with
a Yanmar engine and set
this feature to YES. If the
engine is a se2.2 set this
feature to nO.

89 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [PRNT]. [PRNT] and 40 or 80.

90 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines the Printer
keys to set [PRNT] to match [PRNT] and the new setting. Selection.
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [PRNT]
to 40.

9182A Press the SELECT key again The display will show
to display [PRNT]. This [PRNT] and YES or nO.
screen does not appear in all
versions of software.

9282B Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This activates or deactivates
keys to set [PRNT] to match [PRNT] and the new setting. the Print from SELECT Key
the setting shown on the menu prompt.
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [PRNT]
to nO.

18 October 2001 A04A-11 P41KA04A

Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

93 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [ELOG]. [ELOG] and YES or nO.

94 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show For Full Event Data Logging,
keys to set [ELOG] to match [ELOG] and the new setting. set [ELOG] to YES. For
the setting shown on the Minimal Event Data Logging
Setup Information Sheet and (with longer trip record) set
press ENTER to load. If no [ELOG] to nO.
setting is shown, set [ELOG]
to YES.

95 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [RSWH]. [RSWH] and YES or nO.

96 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines the setting
keys to set [RSWH] to match [RSWH] and the new setting. of the retain switch setting
the setting shown on the on Host [RSWH] and is
Setup Information Sheet and reserved for future use.
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set
[RSWH] to nO.

97 Press the SELECT key again The display will show [FSII]
to display [FSII]. and YES or nO.

98 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [FSII] This determines the setting
keys to set [FSII] to match and the new setting. of the Fuel Saver II [FSII].
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [FSII] to
nO.

9988A Press the SELECT key again The display will show
to display [RNUL]. This [RNUL] and YES or nO.
screen does not appear in all
versions of software.

10088B Use the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This determines the setting
keys to set [RNUL] to match [RNUL] and the new setting. of Running Null [RNUL].
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [RNUL]
to nO.

10188C Press the SELECT key again The display will show
to display [HCSP]. This [HCSP] and 0.5, 0.7, 1.0,
screen does not appear in all 1.5, 2.0.
versions of software.

P41KA04A A04A-12
 Service Procedure A04A

Step Action Results Comments

10288D Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Heat Cool Switch
keys, set [HCSP] to match [HCSP] and the new setting. Point [HCSP] setting.
the setting shown on the
Setup Information Sheet and
press ENTER to load. If no
setting is shown, set [HCSP]
to 1.5.

103 If the unit has This must be done any time

communications, complete power is removed from the
the clock/calendar setup as microprocessor.
shown in Service Procedure
A05A.

18 October 2001 A04A-13 P41KA04A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A05A
A05A Clock/Calendar Setup
Where Used
All units equipped with µP-IV Microprocessors with Communications

Purpose
This procedure must be used:
1. When placing a new unit in service.
2. When a microprocessor is replaced.
3. When the power is removed from the microprocessor.
4. When the microprocessor has been subject to a Cold Start.

Important Information
• If the microprocessor determines that power has been interrupted and the clock/calendar may be
incorrect, an Alarm Code 50 is recorded. When the CODE key is pressed the display will flash from
[ALRM 50] to [SEt TIME]. Alarm Code 50 cannot be cleared in the usual manner. Resetting the
clock/calendar automatically clears the alarm.
• On units equipped with DAS data loggers the clock/calendar cannot be set using the microprocessor
keypad. The DAS data logger automatically sets the microprocessor clock/calendar settings to match
the current DAS settings. The DAS data logger updates the microprocessor clock every time the unit
is turned on. If the time and/or date is not correct a PC computer equipped with WinTrac must be used
to reset the DAS data logger clock/calendar. See Service Bulletin T&T 261 for details.
• Always set the time to Standard Time in the time zone where the owners home base is located unless
advised otherwise.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and

on. standard display is shown.

2 Press and hold the T-K key The display will show [PrE
for at least 3 seconds. TRIP].

3 Press the SELECT key. The display will show If [PRNT] does not appear,
[PRNT] and nO. check the microprocessor
part number to be sure the
correct microprocessor is
installed.

4 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
software version at the top of
the display and [REV] at the
bottom of the display.

5 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
year and [YEAR].

18 October 2001 A05A-1 P41KA05A

Service Procedure A05A

Step Action Results Comments

6 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The selected year will be

keys to change the year as loaded. [LOAD] will be
required and press ENTER. temporarily displayed and
the display will then show
the selected year.

7 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
month and [MNTH].

8 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The selected month will be

keys to change the month as loaded. [LOAD] will be
required and press ENTER. temporarily displayed and
the display will then show
the selected month.

9 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
day and [DAY].

10 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The selected day will be

keys to change the day as loaded. [LOAD] will be
required and press ENTER. temporarily displayed and
the display will then show
the selected day.

11 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
date and [DATE].

12 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The selected date will be

keys to change the date as loaded. [LOAD] will be
required and press ENTER. temporarily displayed and
the display will then show
the selected date.

13 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
hour and [HOUR].

14 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The selected hour will be Set the time to Standard
keys to change the hour as loaded. [LOAD] will be Time in the time zone where
required and press ENTER. temporarily displayed and the owners home base is
the display will then show located unless advised
the selected hour. otherwise.

15 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show the
minute and [MIN].

16 Use the UP-DOWN arrow The selected minute will be

keys to change the minute loaded. [LOAD] will be
as required and press temporarily displayed and
ENTER. the display will then show
the selected minute.

17 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show [SOT]
and [nO].

18 Press an UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [SOT]

key. and [YES].

P41KA05A A05A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A05A

Step Action Results Comments

19 Press LOAD. [LOAD] and [YES] will be A start of trip marker will be
temporarily displayed. sent to the Data Logger.

20 Press the SELECT key again. The display will return to the
"Standard Display".

18 October 2001 A05A-3 P41KA05A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A06A
A06A Checking Software Revision
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure may be used to determine which revision software is being used in a microprocessor.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and If the microprocessor is not
on. standard display is shown. installed in a unit, connect it
to the microprocessor tester
to power it up.

2 Press and hold the T-K key The display will show [PrE
for three seconds. TRIP].

3 Press the SELECT key as The display will show the Record the revision number
required to display [REV]. software revision and [REV]. for later use.

18 October 2001 A06A-1 P41KA06A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A07A
A07A Performing a Cold Start
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
A Cold Start is a special procedure to be used to reset a microprocessor to its original standard (default)
settings. This procedure should only be used when specifically required.

Security Code Enabled Security Code Bypassed

Electric Standby Disabled Electric Standby Enabled

Cold Start Enabled Cold Start Disabled

Unit Configuration Jumpers

(located at the lower right corner of the relay board)

Steps
CAUTION: All programmable microprocessor functions will be returned to the original standard
(default) settings. They must be set up using Service Procedures A04A and A05A after performing a
Cold Start. Hourmeters will not be reset.

Step Action Results Comments

1 If possible, log existing This information will be used If information cannot be

microprocessor setting using to set up the microprocessor retrieved, standard settings
Service Procedure A02A. after performing the Cold or customer specified
Start. settings must be used.

2 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

3 Wear an ESD wrist strap. Proper Electro Static

Connect the lead from the Discharge procedures must
wrist strap to the unit chassis be followed.
ground.

4 Locate the jumpers on the They are located at the lower

relay board. right corner of the board.

5 Remove the bottom jumper

from the center pin and TP3
and place it over the center
pin and TP6.

18 October 2001 A07A-1 P41KA07A

Service Procedure A07A

Step Action Results Comments

6 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display screen will turn This performs the Cold Start.
and the microprocessor on and the Alarm Icon will
power switches on. blink.

7 Press the CODE key Alarm Code 74 must be Other alarms may also be
repeatedly to scroll thru present indicating a present. This is normal. If
alarms. successful "Cold Start" has Alarm Code 74 is not
been performed. present the Cold Start was
not successful and steps 3
thru 7 must be repeated.

8 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

9 Remove the bottom jumper

from the center pin and TP6
and place it over the center
pin and TP3.

10 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

11 Clear alarm codes using the Alarm Code 74 cannot be

CODE and CLEAR keys. cleared in the conventional
manner. It must be cleared
using Service Procedure
A04A.

12 Set up all programmable CAUTION: All

features using Service programmable
Procedure A04A. microprocessor functions
have been returned to the
original factory (default)
settings. They must be set
up using Service
Procedure A04A.

13 Set up the clock/calendar CAUTION: The

using Service Procedure clock/calendar settings
A05A. have been returned to the
original factory (default)
settings. They must be set
up using Service
Procedure A05A.

P41KA07A A07A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A08A
A08A Security Code Activation and Deactivation
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to install Security Codes to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering
Guarded Access and Super Guarded Access without first entering the designated code. It also allows the
access code to be set up or changed.

Important Information
If the Security Code is used, the code must be available to authorized personnel to allow setup and
maintenance.

Security Code Enabled Security Code Bypassed

Electric Standby Disabled Electric Standby Enabled

Cold Start Enabled Cold Start Disabled

Unit Configuration Jumpers

(located at the lower right corner of the relay board)

Activating a Security Code

NOTE: The Security Code must be entered before entering Guarded Access.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/ HOST

switch and the
microprocessor power
switches off.

2 Wear an ESD wrist strap. Connect the lead from the Proper Electro Static
wrist strap to the unit chassis Discharge (ESD) procedures
ground. must be followed.

3 Locate the jumpers on the They are located at the lower

relay board. right corner of the board.

18 October 2001 A08A-1 P41KA08A

Service Procedure A08A

Step Action Results Comments

4 Verify that the top jumper is Entry to Guarded Access is NOTE: When the jumper is
in position from the center allowed without any Security in place from the center pin
pin to TP1. If it is from the Code and the desired to TP1:
center pin to TP4, remove it Security Code can be set up. • The Security Code is not
and place it from the center active.
pin to TP1.
• Direct entry to Guarded
Access is allowed.
• The Security Code can
be set or changed.

5 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

6 On units with
communications, reset the
Clock/ Calendar using
Service Procedure A05A.

Entering a Security Code

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

2 Press the SELECT Key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER key. Allow the display
to return to the Standard
Display.

3 Clear any alarm codes using [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes cannot be
the CODE and CLEAR keys cleared, repair the problem
and allow the display to before proceeding.
return to the Standard
Display.

4 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show
and CLEAR keys for 5 or [H6TY].
more seconds.

5 Press the SELECT key

repeatedly to display
[DDUR].

6 Press and hold both the T-K This will place the controller
and CLEAR keys for 5 or in "Super Guarded Access"
more seconds. mode.

P41KA08A A08A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A08A

Step Action Results Comments

7 Press the SELECT key The display will show

repeatedly to display [NEWC].
[NEWC].

8 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show a A zero (0) or 1 indicates no
keys, until the desired number from 0 through Security Code is installed.
Security Code is shown in 9999.
the display.

9 When the desired Security The display will show The Security Code must be
Code number is shown on [LOAD] and then the new selected by the customer
the screen, press the ENTER Security Code. and retained in his records. It
key. is like the combination to a
safe.

10 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

11 Locate the jumpers on the They are located at the lower

relay board. right corner of the board.

12 Remove the jumper from the The Security Code is now When the jumper is in place
center pin and TP1 and active. When entering from the center pin to TP4:
place it over the center pin Guarded Access, the code The Security Code is active
and TP4. set up above must be and the [CODE] screen will
entered when requested by appear whenever entry to
[CODE]. Guarded Access is
attempted.
The correct Security Code
must be entered and loaded
to gain entry to Guarded
Access.
The [NEWC] screen will not
appear and the Security
Code cannot be set or
changed.

13 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the Microprocessor
Power switches on.

14 On units with
communications, reset the
Clock/ Calendar using
Service Procedure A05A.

18 October 2001 A08A-3 P41KA08A

Service Procedure A08A

Deactivating a Security Code

NOTE: This will remove the Security Code permanently. It must be reinstalled as shown above if it is to
be used again.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Locate the jumpers on the They are located at the lower

relay board. right corner of the board.

3 Remove the jumper from the Entry to Guarded Access is When the jumper is in place
center pin and TP4 and allowed without a Security from the center pin to TP1:
place it over the center pin Code and the Security Code The Security Code is not
and TP1. can be removed. active.
Direct entry to Guarded
Access is allowed.
The Security Code can be
set or changed.

4 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

5 Press the SELECT key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER Key. Allow the display
to return to the Standard
Display.

6 Clear any alarm codes by [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes cannot be
pressing the CODE and cleared, repair the problem
CLEAR keys and allow the before proceeding.
display to return to the
Standard Display.

7 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show
and CLEAR keys for 5 or [H6TY].
more seconds. This will
place the controller in
Guarded Access mode.

8 Press the SELECT key

repeatedly to display
[DDUR].

9 Press and hold both the T-K This will place the controller
and CLEAR keys for 5 or in "Super Guarded Access"
more seconds. mode.

P41KA08A A08A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A08A

Step Action Results Comments

10 Press the SELECT key The display will show

repeatedly to display [NEWC].
[NEWC].

11 Press the DOWN ARROW key The display will show [1]. A one (1) indicates no
until (1) appears in the Security Code is installed.
display.

12 Press the ENTER key. The display will show Entry to Guarded Access
[LOAD]. does not require a Security
Code.

13 Turn the ON-OFF switch The display will show the

"Off". Standard Display.

14 On units with
communications, reset the
clock/ calendar using
Service Procedure A05A.

18 October 2001 A08A-5 P41KA08A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A09A
A09A Entering Guarded Access when a Security Code is Active
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to enter Guarded Access when a Security Code is active.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

2 Press the SELECT key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER Key.

3 Clear any alarm codes by [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes except 7X
using the CODE and CLEAR series cannot be cleared,
keys. access to Guarded Access
may be restricted.

4 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show
and CLEAR keys for 5 or [CODE] and [0000].
more seconds.

5 Press the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show the The customer should know
keys to enter the correct Security Code. his Security Code number.
Security Code.

6 Press the ENTER key to load The display will show The microprocessor is now
the Security Code. [LOAD] and then [H6TY]. in Guarded Access mode.
If the wrong Security Code is
entered, the microprocessor
will return to the Standard
Display.

18 October 2001 A09A-1 P41KA09A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A10A
A10A Maintenance Alarm Setup and/or Clearing Code 73
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to reset the maintenance alarm accumulated time as required.

Steps
NOTE: When setting programmable hourmeters, the [HxLM] screen will not appear unless hourmeter
type 1, 2, 3 or 15 has been selected. Check Section 3 for all possible setup codes for the hourmeter type
settings. Determine what code the customer desires or is using and note them for use.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

2 Press the SELECT Key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER Key.

3 Clear any alarm codes by [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes except 7X
pressing the CODE and Codes 73 and/or 74 cannot series cannot be cleared,
CLEAR keys and allow the be cleared. access to Guarded Access
display to return to the may be restricted.
Standard Display.

4 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show the If the [H6TY] number is not
and CLEAR keys for 5 or hour meter type and [H6TY]. set as required or is
more seconds. If the display shows [CODE], incorrect, change it using the
you must first enter the UP-DOWN arrow keys and
correct Security Code or Press ENTER to load it.
bypass the Security Code.
See Service Procedures
A09A and A19A.

5 Press the SELECT key again The display will show When setting programmable
to display [H6LM]. [H6LM] and the limit hours or hourmeters, the [H6LM]
100 if the limit has not been screen will not appear
set. unless hourmeter type 1, 2,
3 or 15 has been selected. If
the number is not set as
required or is incorrect,
change it using the UP-DOWN
arrow keys and Press ENTER
to load it.

6 Press the SELECT key again The display will show If this number is greater than
to display [HRM.6]. [HRM.6] and the the number set for [H6LM] in
accumulated hours. the step above, Alarm Code
73 will be generated.

18 October 2001 A10A-1 P41KA10A

Service Procedure A10A

Step Action Results Comments

7 Press the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show The hours should be reset to
keys to change the hours as [HRM.6] and the changed "1" if resetting the hourmeter
required and press ENTER to accumulated hours. If this or to the old value if
load. number is greater than the replacing a microprocessor.
number set for [H6LM] in the
step above, Alarm Code 73
will be generated. (The unit
must be run first.)

8 Press the CODE key to The display will show

display any alarms that may [ALRM] and any alarm
be present. codes. If no alarms exist the
display will show [00].

9 If alarm code 73 exists, clear The display will show Alarm code 73 can only be
it by pressing the CLEAR key. [ALRM] and [00]. cleared while in Guarded
Access. Alarm code 74 can
only be cleared from Super
Guarded Access using
Service Procedure A04A.

P41KA10A A10A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A12A
A12A ESD (Electro Static Discharge) Procedures
Where Used
All solid state applications

Purpose
To prevent ESD (electro static discharge) damage while working on a microprocessor. ESD (electro
static discharge) is an invisible foe which can only be counteracted by using good procedures. Failure to
follow stated procedures will result in electronic component failure sooner or later. Additional
information may be found in the ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) TRAINING GUIDE
TK40282-1.

Connect to chassis
ground or CH terminal

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Obtain and use a wrist strap Service Part 204-622. Refer

when handling a to ESD Training Guide TK
microprocessor that is not 40282.
connected to the unit via the
plugs or is not in an
anti-static bag.

2 Store and ship

microprocessors in the
anti-static bags and
protective packaging.

3 Assume that if these steps

are not followed that
damage will be done to the
microprocessor.

18 October 2001 A12A-1 P41KA12A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A13A
A13A Microprocessor Software PROM Change
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to change the software EPROM.

Insertion
Tool

Removal
Tool

Connect to Chassis

18 October 2001 A13A-1 P41KA13A

Service Procedure A13A

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Use an ESD wrist strap. Do not attempt this

Connect the strap wire to a procedure without a wrist
chassis ground. If the strap and proper ESD
microprocessor is on the protection. See Service
bench, attach a Procedure A12A for details.
Microprocessor Tester to the
microprocessor and connect
the wrist strap to the black
tester lead.

3 Remove the four screws that Do not use excessive

secure the small cover to the downward force when
rear of the microprocessor removing the screws as the
body. threaded inserts for these
screws may be pressed out
of the microprocessor body.

4 Remove the cover. CAUTION: Do not touch

any of the exposed
circuitry.

5 Position the IC Chip

Removal Tool over the
exposed chip and press
gently on the tool handle to
grip the chip at the top and
bottom.

6 When the chip is firmly

gripped with the tool jaws,
pull straight back to remove
the chip. With the old style
remover, firmly squeeze the
handle to remove the chip.

7 Remove the replacement Handle the chip only by the

chip from the tube or ends. Do not touch the chip
anti-static foam. pins if at all possible. The
chip is vulnerable to damage
from ESD.

8 Locate the notched end of Failure to install the chip with

the chip. The notched end the notched end to the top of
must be installed to the top the microprocessor will
of the microprocessor. destroy the chip and may
damage the microprocessor.

P41KA13A A13A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A13A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Insert the chip in the IC This is necessary to allow

Installation Tool with the the tool to clear another chip
bottom of the chip (end with on the microprocessor
no notch) flush with the board.
bottom of the tool.

10 Visually examine the chip It may be necessary to bend

pins to be certain they are the pins to make them
perpendicular to the chip perpendicular to the chip
body and that both rows of body. This can be easily
pins are straight. done by pressing the row of
pins gently on a flat surface.

11 Carefully check the It may be necessary to bend

alignment of the pins with the pins to make them line
the socket. You may need a up with the socket. This can
small flashlight to see the be easily done by pressing
pins and socket. the row of pins gently on a
flat surface.

12 When the pins are properly

aligned with the socket,
press the chip gently into the
socket.

13 Remove the installation tool Be certain all pins are

and examine the pins with a inserted in the socket and
flashlight to be certain all that no pins are missed top
pins are inserted into the or bottom.
socket.

14 When the pins have all been Failure to install the chip with
inspected and are inserted the notched end to the top of
into the socket, check to be the microprocessor may
certain the notched end of destroy the chip and may
the chip is at the top of the damage the microprocessor.
microprocessor.

15 Grasp the chip at the top and The chip must be fully
bottom and press firmly to seated in the socket or it
seat it all the way into the may fall out in service.
socket.

16 Replace the small cover, Do not use excessive

using the four slotted downward force when
screws. installing the screws as the
threaded inserts for these
screws may be pressed out
of the microprocessor body.

17 If a label has been supplied

with the chip, affix it to the
back of the microprocessor.

18 October 2001 A13A-3 P41KA13A

Service Procedure A13A

Step Action Results Comments

18 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The "Standard Display"

and the microprocessor should appear.
power switches on.

19 Clear alarm codes using the Display should show [ALRM] If the microprocessor has
CODE and CLEAR keys. and [00]. Code 74 cannot be communications, Alarm
cleared in the conventional Code 50 will be present. It
manner. It must be cleared will disappear when the
using Service Procedure clock/calendar is reset.
A04A.

20 Check the software version Be certain the correct

using Service Procedure version software has been
A06A. installed.

21 Perform the Microprocessor

Setup using Service
Procedure A04A.

22 Set the clock/calendar on

units with communications
using Service Procedure
A05A.

23 Set the up the Data Logger

on units with
communications using
Service Procedure A20A.

24 Confirm proper unit

operation with a full pretrip
using Service Procedure
A17A.

P41KA13A A13A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A14A
A14A Microprocessor Faceplate Change
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure should be used to change a damaged microprocessor keypad/lens faceplate assembly.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Remove the microprocessor Use ESD Wrist Strap and

from the unit using Service adhere to ESD procedures
Procedure A03A. as outlines in Service
Procedure A12A.

2 Identify and remove the six Four of these screws are The small cover on the rear
Phillips head screws from located in the four corners, of the microprocessor should
the rear of the the other two are located be left in place.
microprocessor that are near the center of the
inserted through a small microprocessor. Do not
raised square molded into remove the other Phillips
the back cover. head screws as the
microprocessor connectors
may be damaged.

3 Carefully separate the CAUTION: Do not touch Do not allow any dust,
faceplate from the any of the electrical moisture or foreign material
microprocessor. circuitry exposed when to enter the microprocessor
the faceplate is removed. body.

4 Check to be sure that the

sealing gasket in the groove
of the microprocessor body
is in place and intact.

5 Locate the replacement Be certain the display lens is

faceplate on the clean. If necessary, clean it
microprocessor body. gently with a soft, clean
cloth.

6 Replace the six Phillips head Do not overtighten the

screws to secure the Phillips head screws.
faceplate to the
microprocessor body.

7 Reinstall the microprocessor

in the unit using Service
Procedure A03A.

18 October 2001 A14A-1 P41KA14A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A15A
A15A Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure must be used to set the sensor grades when replacing a graded sensor.

Important Information
Units with 2011 and later software support 27 grade sensors. In addition, units equipped with DAS data
loggers must use 27 grade sensors to perform to design standards.

Sensor Grade

Graded Sensor Used For:

Returned Air and Discharge Air

Ungraded Sensor Used For:

Coil and Ambient

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Verify the sensor grades by Exercise care to be sure the

physically checking the correct grade is recorded for
sensor. Record the grades of the sensors in each zone.
the return air and/or
discharge air sensors for
each zone as required.

2 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

3 Press the SELECT Key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER Key. Allow the display
to return to the Standard
Display.

18 October 2001 A15A-1 P41KA15A

Service Procedure A15A

Step Action Results Comments

4 Clear any alarm codes using [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes cannot be
the CODE and CLEAR keys cleared, repair the problem
and allow the display to before proceeding.
return to the Standard
Display.

5 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show the
and CLEAR keys for 5 or hour meter type and [H6TY].
more seconds. If the display shows [CODE],
you must first enter the
correct Security Code or
bypass the Security Code.
See Service procedures
A09A and A19A. Record the
Security Code for later use.

6 Press the SELECT key This will place the controller

repeatedly to display in "Super Guarded Access"
[DDUR]. Now press and hold mode. The display will show
both the T-K and CLEAR keys [CRA1] and the grade of the
for 5 or more seconds. sensor (1 thru 9) or (1L thru
9H).

7 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Calibrate Return
keys, set [CRA1] to match [CRA1] and the new grade. Air Sensor Zone 1 [CRA1]
the grade of the Return Air setting. Verify that this grade
Sensor in Zone 1 and press number matches the grade
ENTER to load. number shown on the decal
in the electrical box. If any
question exists, confirm the
grade by physically checking
the Zone 1 return air sensor.

8 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CDA1]. [CDA1] and the grade of the
Zone 1 Discharge Air Sensor
(1 thru 9) or (1L thru 9H).

9 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Calibrate
keys, set [CDA1] to match [CDA1] and the new grade. Discharge Air Sensor Zone 1
the grade of the Discharge [CDA1] setting. Verify that
Air Sensor in Zone 1 and this grade number matches
press ENTER to load. the grade number shown on
the decal in the electrical
box. If any question exists,
confirm the grade by
physically checking the Zone
1 discharge air sensor.

10 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CRA2]. [CRA2] and the grade of the
Zone 2 Return Air Sensor (1
thru 9) or (1L thru 9H).

P41KA15A A15A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A15A

Step Action Results Comments

11 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Calibrate Return
keys, set [CRA2] to match [CRA2] and the new grade. Air Sensor Zone 2 [CRA2]
the grade of the Return Air setting. Verify that this grade
Sensor in Zone 2 and press number matches the grade
ENTER to load. number shown on the decal
in the electrical box. If any
question exists, confirm the
grade by physically checking
the Zone 2 return air sensor.

12 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CDA2]. This [CDA2] and the grade of the
screen will only appear if the Zone 2 Discharge Air Sensor
unit is configured with the (1 thru 9) or (1L thru 9H).
relay board jumpers as an
SB-III DE-2 or SB-III DE-3.

13 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Calibrate
keys, set [CDA2] to match [CDA2] and the new grade. Discharge Air Sensor Zone 2
the grade of the Discharge [CDA2] setting. Verify that
Air Sensor in Zone 2 (if this grade number matches
present) and press ENTER to the grade number shown on
load. the decal in the electrical
box. If any question exists,
confirm the grade by
physically checking the Zone
2 discharge air sensor.

14 Press the SELECT key again The display will show

to display [CRA3]. This [CRA3] and the grade of the
screen will only appear if the Zone 3 Return Air Sensor (1
unit is configured with the thru 9) or (1L thru 9H).
relay board jumpers as a
three zone unit.

15 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show This is the Calibrate Return
keys, set [CRA3] to match [CRA3] and the new grade. Air Sensor Zone 3 [CRA3]
the grade of the Return Air setting. Verify that this grade
Sensor for Zone 3 (if number matches the grade
present) and press ENTER to number shown on the decal
load. in the electrical box. If any
question exists, confirm the
grade by physically checking
the Zone 3 return air sensor.

16 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display will return to the
off and then back on. Standard Display of
temperature and setpoint.

17 Record the new sensor(s) Be sure the information is

grade on the Sensor correct.
Calibration and Access
Parameter Nameplate.

18 October 2001 A15A-3 P41KA15A

Service Procedure A15A

Step Action Results Comments

18 Procedure is complete. If sensor problems are still

present, consult Service
Procedure D01A for sensor
test procedure.

P41KA15A A15A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A16A
A16A Battery Connection and Disconnection
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure should be followed when connecting or disconnecting the battery to the unit. Failure to do
so may result in an inadvertent Alarm Code 74. If this happens, all programmable features must be
reprogrammed.

Important Information
If Alarm Code 74 is present, the microprocessor has been reset to all Standard (default) settings. All
programmable features must be reprogrammed using Service Procedure A04A.

Before Connecting Battery

NOTE: When installing and removing the battery terminals, erratic voltages may be sent to the
microprocessor. This can cause an inadvertent Alarm Code 74 or other undesired alarms. See
Important Information above.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Connect both battery cables

and tighten securely.

3 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

4 Press the CODE"key to The display should show CAUTION: If Code 74

display alarm codes. Watch [ALRM] and any alarm exists, the microprocessor
carefully for Alarm Code 74. codes present. If no alarms has reset to standard
are present the display will (default) values. All
show [00]. programmable features
must be reprogrammed
using the following Service
Procedures:
A04A
A05A
A20A

5 Set up clock/calendar using The clock/calendar must be

Service Procedure A05A. reset any time the battery is
disconnected from the unit. It
is only present on micro-
processors equipped with
communications.

18 October 2001 A16A-1 P41KA16A

Service Procedure A16A

Before Removing Battery

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Remove battery cables as

required.

P41KA16A A16A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A17A
A17A Full PreTrip
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to perform a "Full Pretrip". A "Full Pretrip" will check the current draw of
control devices in all zones that are turned on to determine that they are connected and are drawing the
proper amount of current. The unit is then started and the refrigeration capacity is checked in both "Cool"
and "Heat" modes in all zones that are turned on. A defrost check and return to cool check is also
performed in all zones that are turned on. The test results are then reported as either PASS, CHEC or
FAIL.

Important Information
• If the Pretrip Test is initiated with the engine stopped a Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If the
engine is running the amps check portion of the test is skipped and only the Engine Running Pretrip
Test is performed. See Service Procedure A18A for details of the Engine Running Pretrip Test.
• Any alarms generated during a pretrip will be preceded by a dash (-).
• If the pretrip test must be halted, turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch off. This will generate one or more
alarms including a #28 Pretrip Abort Alarm. This is normal.
• For additional details consult "Initiating a Full Pretrip Test" in Section 4 of this manual.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the Do NOT start the unit. If the
and all other Zone switches Standard Display appears. unit is running turn the
on. ON-OFF switch "Off" to stop
the engine before starting
the test.

2 Clear any alarm codes using The display will show [00]. If all alarm codes cannot be
the CODE and CLEAR keys. cleared, repair the problem
before proceeding.

3 Allow the display to return to The display will show [PrE

the Standard Display. Press TRIP].
and hold the T-K key for
three seconds.

4 Press the ENTER key. The display will momentarily The pretrip test should not
show [PrE LOAD] and will be interrupted unless
then show [PrE AMPS]. absolutely necessary. If the
pretrip test must be halted,
turn the Zone 1/Host switch
off. This will generate one or
more alarms including a #28
Pretrip Abort Alarm. This is
normal.

18 October 2001 A17A-1 P41KA17A

Service Procedure A17A

Step Action Results Comments

5 The microprocessor begins Each electrical control

the Pretrip amps checks. component will be energized
and the current measured. If
the current is high or low an
alarm will be generated.

6 If desired, the Amps Check The display will show the

may be displayed. Press the current draw of each device
AMPS key and then press being tested.
ENTER to lock the display in
"Amps".

7 When the Amps check is

complete, the engine will
start.

8 The engine will start and run. The display will show all the
icons and segments to
visually verify operation of
the display.

9 The display will briefly show Values for each function will
the programmed values of be briefly displayed, and
many of the programmable may be noted as necessary.
functions. They should be visually
checked by the operator as
required.

10 The "Low" and "High" engine

speeds are checked.

11 The "Cooling Capacity" test For an explanation of

will be initiated by the Temperature Differential or
microprocessor. The display TPDF, see Section 7.
will show [PrE TRIP] and the To view the temperature
"Cool" icon will be "On". differential during the test,
press the SELECT key and
then press the ENTER key to
lock the display.
In order to pass the "Cooling
Capacity" test, the
temperature differential must
reach a variable value up to
-10 F (-5 C) within a
specified time.

P41KA17A A17A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A17A

Step Action Results Comments

12 After the "Cooling Capacity" To view the temperature

test has been successfully differential during the test,
passed, the "Heating press the SELECT key and
Capacity" test will be then press the ENTER key to
initiated by the lock the display.
microprocessor. The display In order to pass the "Heating
will show [PrE TRIP] and the Capacity" test, the
"Heat" icon will be "On". temperature differential must
return to a value of 0 from
the value reached in the step
above within a specified
time.

13 Next, the "Defrost" test will The defrost cycle is checked

be initiated by the for operation. This test takes
microprocessor. The display place within a few seconds.
will show [PrE TRIP] and the
"Defrost" icon will be "On".

14 After the "Defrost" test has The unit returns to "Cool"

been successfully mode to test the pilot
completed, the "Return to solenoid and three way
Cool Mode" test will be valve.
initiated by the
microprocessor. The display
will show [PrE TRIP] and the
"Cool" icon will be "On".

15 Steps 11 thru 14 are Only zones that are turned

repeated for all zones that on are tested.
are turned on.

18 October 2001 A17A-3 P41KA17A

Service Procedure A17A

Step Action Results Comments

16 At the conclusion of the test, [PASS TRIP] - Indicates no [PASS TRIP] will remain on
the test results will be alarms were sensed by the the display until a display
reported as follows: microprocessor. key is pressed. The unit will
be running in the mode
required by setpoint and
trailer temperature.

[CHEC TRIP] - Indicates one [CHEC TRIP] will remain on

or more Check Alarms were the display until a display
sensed by the key is pressed. See the
microprocessor. These Alarm Code Diagnostics in
alarms should be corrected Section 5 for suggested
as soon as possible. corrective actions.

[FAIL TRIP] - Indicates one [FAIL TRIP] will remain on

or more Shutdown Alarms the display until a display
were sensed by the key is pressed. See the
microprocessor. These Alarm Code Diagnostics in
alarm conditions must be Section 5 for suggested
corrected immediately, the corrective actions.
alarms cleared and the
pretrip test restarted at
Step 1.
If a Shutdown Alarm is
sensed a #28 Pretrip Abort
Alarm is generated, the
Pretrip test is terminated and
the unit is shut down.

17 If [PASS TRIP] is displayed, The unit must pass the

the unit may be considered pretrip test before being
suitable for service. If alarms released for service. See the
have been sensed, review Alarm Code Diagnostics in
them by pressing the "CODE" Section 5 for suggested
key and correct as required. corrective actions as
required.

P41KA17A A17A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A18A
A18A Engine Running PreTrip
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to perform a "Engine Running Pretrip". A "Engine Running Pretrip" will
check the refrigeration capacity in both "Cool" and "Heat" modes. The refrigeration capacity is checked
in both "Cool" and "Heat" modes in all zones that are turned on. A defrost check and return to cool check
is also performed in all zones that are turned on. The Amps check is bypassed during this test. The test
results are then reported as either PASS, CHEC or FAIL.

Important Information
• The pretrip performed by this procedure is done with the engine running. The engine must be running
before entering the Pretrip Test.
• Any alarms generated during a pretrip will be preceded by a dash (-).
• If the pretrip test must be halted, turn the unit "On/Off" switch "Off". This will generate one or more
alarms including a #28 Pretrip Abort Alarm. This is normal.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

and all other Zone switches Standard Display appears.
on.

2 Clear any alarm codes using The display will show [00]. If all alarm codes cannot be
the CODE and CLEAR keys. cleared, repair the problem
before proceeding.

3 Allow the engine to start. The engine must be running If a setpoint is changed be
Adjust a setpoint if before entering the test. sure to note the original
necessary to allow the setting and be sure to return
engine to start. the setpoint to the original
setting before returning the
unit to service.

4 With the engine running, The display will show [PrE

press and hold the T-K key TRIP].
for three seconds.

5 Press the ENTER key. The display will momentarily The pretrip test should not
show [PrE LOAD]. be interrupted unless
absolutely necessary. If the
pretrip test must be halted,
turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch
off. This will generate one or
more alarms including a #28
Pretrip Abort Alarm. This is
normal.

18 October 2001 A18A-1 P41KA18A

Service Procedure A18A

Step Action Results Comments

6 The display will show all the

icons and segments to
visually verify operation of
the display.

7 The display will briefly show Values for each function will
the programmed values of be briefly displayed, and
many of the programmable may be noted as necessary.
functions. They should be visually
checked by the operator as
required.

8 The "Low" and "High" engine

speeds are checked.

9 The "Cooling Capacity" test For an explanation of

will be initiated by the Temperature Differential or
microprocessor. The display TPDF, see Section 7.
will show [PrE TRIP] and the To view the temperature
"Cool" icon will be "On". differential during the test,
press the SELECT key and
then press the ENTER key to
lock the display. In order to
pass the "Cooling Capacity"
test, the temperature
differential must reach a
variable value up to -10 F
(-5 C) within a specified
time.

10 After the "Cooling Capacity" To view the temperature

test has been successfully differential during the test,
passed, the "Heating press the SELECT key and
Capacity" test will be then press the ENTER key to
initiated by the lock the display.
microprocessor. The display
In order to pass the "Heating
will show [PrE TRIP] and the
Capacity" test, the
"Heat" icon will be "On".
temperature differential must
return to a value of 0 from
the value reached in the step
above within a specified
time.

11 Next, the "Defrost" test will The defrost cycle is checked

be initiated by the for operation. This test takes
microprocessor. The display place within a few seconds.
will show [PrE TRIP] and the
"Defrost" icon will be "On".

P41KA18A A18A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A18A

Step Action Results Comments

12 After the "Heating Capacity" The unit returns to "Cool"

test has been successfully mode to test the pilot
completed, the "Return to solenoid and three way
Cool Mode" test will be valve.
initiated by the
microprocessor. The display
will show [PrE TRIP] and the
"Cool" icon will be "On".

13 Steps 9 thru 12 are repeated Only zones that are turned

for all zones that are turned on are tested.
on.

14 At the conclusion of the test, [PASS TRIP] - Indicates no [PASS TRIP] will remain on
the test results will be alarms were sensed by the the display until a display
reported as follows: microprocessor. key is pressed. The unit will
be running in the mode
required by setpoint and
trailer temperature.

[CHEC TRIP] - Indicates one [CHEC TRIP] will remain on

or more Check Alarms were the display until a display
sensed by the key is pressed. See the
microprocessor. These Alarm Code Diagnostics in
alarms should be corrected Section 5 for suggested
as soon as possible. corrective actions.

[FAIL TRIP] - Indicates one [FAIL TRIP] will remain on

or more Shutdown Alarms the display until a display
were sensed by the key is pressed. See the
microprocessor. These Alarm Code Diagnostics in
alarm conditions must be Section 5 for suggested
corrected immediately, the corrective actions.
alarms cleared and the
pretrip test restarted at
Step 1.
If a Shutdown Alarm is
sensed a #28 Pretrip Abort
Alarm is generated, the
Pretrip test is terminated and
the unit is shut down.

15 If [PASS TRIP] is displayed, The unit must pass the

the unit may be considered pretrip test before being
suitable for service. If alarms released for service. See the
have been sensed, review Alarm Code Diagnostics in
them by pressing the CODE Section 5 for suggested
key and correct as required. corrective actions as
required.

18 October 2001 A18A-3 P41KA18A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A19A
A19A Security Code Bypass
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to temporarily bypass the Security Code without changing it.

Important Information
The Security Code must be reactivated at the completion of the maintenance routine.

Security Code Enabled Security Code Bypassed

Electric Standby Disabled Electric Standby Enabled

Cold Start Enabled Cold Start Disabled

Unit Configuration Jumpers

(located at the lower right corner of the relay board)

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display backlight will

and the microprocessor turn "Off".
power switches off.

2 Verify that the jumper is in Entry to Guarded Access is NOTE: When the jumper is
position from the center pin allowed without a Security in place from the center pin
to TP1. If it is from the center Code. to TP1:
pin to TP 4, remove it and • The Security Code is not
place it from the center pin to active.
TP1.
• Direct entry to Guarded
Access is allowed.
• The Security Code can
be set or changed.
Entry to Guarded Access is
now possible without the use
of the Security Code.

3 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

18 October 2001 A19A-1 P41KA19A

Service Procedure A19A

Step Action Results Comments

4 Enter Guarded Access and The [CODE] screen will not

perform the required appear.
maintenance.

5 After service is complete the If a Security Code is used it

Security Code must be must be reactivated before
reactivated. releasing the unit for use.

6 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display backlight will

and the Microprocessor turn off.
Power switches off.

7 Remove the jumper from the The Security Code is now NOTE: When the jumper is
center pin and TP1 and active. When entering in place from the center pin
place it over the center pin Guarded Access, the code to TP4:
and TP4. must be entered when • The Security Code is
requested by [CODE]. active and the [CODE]
screen will appear
whenever entry to
Guarded Access is
attempted.
• The correct Security
Code must be entered
and loaded to gain entry
to Guarded Access.
• The [NEWC] screen will
not appear and the
Security Code cannot be
set or changed.

P41KA19A A19A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A26A
A26A Welding on Units Equipped with Microprocessors
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To prevent damage to the microprocessor during welding operations. Electric welding generates
extremely high amperage currents which can damage electrical and electronic components. In order to
minimize the possibility of damage the following procedures must be followed.

Before Welding
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display should be

and the microprocessor "dead".
power switches off.

2 Remove negative battery

cable.

3 Remove all connectors from

the rear of the
microprocessor.

4 If welding close enough to

the microprocessor that
sparks could damage it the
microprocessor should be
removed.

5 Close the control box.

6 Connect the welder ground

cable as close as possible to
the area where the welding
is to be performed. Move
the welder ground cable as
required.

18 October 2001 A26A-1 P41KA26A

Service Procedure A26A

After Welding is Completed

Step Action Results Comments

1 Reinstall microprocessor if it
was removed.

2 Connect the microprocessor

connectors.

3 Reconnect the battery cable.

4 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The "Standard Display"

and the microprocessor should appear.
power switches on.

5 Clear all alarms by pressing The display will show [00]

the CODE and CLEAR keys. when all alarms are cleared.

6 Reset the clock/calendar

using Service Procedure
A05A.

7 Run a Full Pretrip as shown

in Service Procedure A17A
to check operation.

P41KA26A A26A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A28A
A28A Setting Running Time Hourmeters
TLHR, ENHR, ELHR, TLZ2, and TLZ3
Where Used
All new replacement Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors Only

Purpose
This procedure should be followed to set the unit running time hourmeters TLHR (Total Hours), ENHR
(Engine Hours), ELHR (Electric Hours) TLZ2 (Zone 2 Hours) and TLZ3 (Zone 3 Hours) after replacing a
microprocessor with a new replacement microprocessor.

Important Information
This procedure will only work with new replacement microprocessors.

Steps
NOTE: This Procedure will only work with new replacement microprocessors

Step Action Results Comments

1 Obtain a completed copy of This information on this copy

the Setup Information Sheet will be used to set up the
using Service Procedure hourmeters.
A02A.

2 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

3 Press the SELECT key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER key.

4 When Zone 1 is shown in the The Standard Display will

display press and hold the show the new Zone 1
UP ARROW key until the setpoint (as defined by the
setpoint flashes between a setting of Setpoint Limit High
setpoint and [SETH] and [SETH]).
then press ENTER to load this
new setpoint.

5 Press the HOURS key to The display will show [TLHR]

display Total Unit Hours and 0.
[TLHR].

18 October 2001 A28A-1 P41KA28A

Service Procedure A28A

Step Action Results Comments

6 Using the UP-DOWN ARROW The display will show [TLHR]

keys, set [TLHR] to match and the new number of Total
the number shown on the Hours.
Information sheet and press
ENTER to load the new value.
If no number is shown on the
information sheet, consult
the customer for a record of
unit hours.

7 Press the HOURS key again The display will show

to display Engine Running [ENHR] and 0.
Hours [ENHR].

8 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [ENHR] cannot be set to a
keys, set [ENHR] to match [ENHR] and the new number larger number than that of
the number shown on the of Engine Hours. [TLHR].
Information sheet and press
ENTER to load the new value.

9 If the unit features electric The display will show Applies only to units
standby, press the HOURS [ELHR] and 0. equipped with Electric
key again to display Electric Standby.
Motor Running Hours
[ELHR]. If the unit does not
have electric standby, leave
this hourmeter set at 0.

10 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show Applies only to units
keys, set [ELHR] to match [ELHR] and the new number equipped with Electric
the number shown on the of Engine Hours. Standby.
Information sheet and press [ELHR] cannot be set to a
ENTER to load the new value. larger number than that of
[TLHR].

11 Press the HOURS key again The display will show [TLZ2]
to display Total Zone 2 and 0.
Hours [TLZ2].

12 Using the UP-DOWN arrow The display will show [TLZ2] [TLZ2] can not be set to a
keys, set [TLZ2] to match the and the new number of larger number than that of
number shown on the Engine Hours. [TLHR].
Information sheet and press
ENTER to load the new value.

13 If the unit features three The display will show [TLZ3] Applies only to units
zone operation, press the and 0. equipped with three zones.
HOURS key again to display
Total Zone 3 Hours [TLZ3]. If
the unit does not have a third
zone, leave this hourmeter
set at 0.

P41KA28A A28A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A28A

Step Action Results Comments

14 Using the UP-DOWN ARROW The display will show [TLZ3] Applies only to units
keys, set [TLZ3] to match the and the new number of equipped with three zones.
number shown on the Engine Hours. [TLZ3] can not be set to a
Information sheet and press larger number than that of
ENTER to load the new value. [TLHR].

Lock the Hourmeters

NOTE: This "locks" the hourmeters so they can no longer be changed.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Press the HOURS key The display will show

repeatedly to display [ELHR].
[ELHR].

2 With the display still showing The hourmeters are now

[ELHR], press the ENTER. "locked" and can no longer
When [LOAD] disappears, be changed.
press the ENTER key again.
When [LOAD] disappears,
press the ENTER key a third
time and wait for [LOAD] to
disappear.

18 October 2001 A28A-3 P41KA28A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A31A
A31A Clearing Alarm Codes from Super Guarded Access
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be followed to clear alarm codes that will not clear in the usual manner. In some
instances, these alarm codes will clear from Super Guarded Access.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

2 Press the SELECT Key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER key. Allow the display
to return to the Standard
Display.

3 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show the If the display shows [CODE],
and CLEAR keys for 5 or hour meter type and [H6TY]. you must first enter the
more seconds. This will proper security code or
place the controller in bypass the security code.
"Guarded Access" mode.
See Service Procedures
A09A and A19A.

4 Press the SELECT key This will place the controller CAUTION: Follow the
repeatedly to display in "Super Guarded Access" remaining steps carefully.
[DDUR]. Now press and hold mode. Failure to do so may result
both the T-K and CLEAR keys in unintentional changes to
for 5 or more seconds. other programmable
features.

5 Press the CODE key to The display will show

display the alarm code. [ALRM] and the alarm code.

6 Press the CLEAR key to clear The display will show

the alarm. [ALRM] and the next alarm
code or [00].

7 Repeat the previous step An alarm code of [00] means

until the display shows all alarms have been
[ALRM] and [00]. cleared.

8 Turn the unit ON-OFF switch The display will show Check the unit as required to
"off" and back "on" to return temperature and setpoint. be certain the alarm codes
to the Standard Display of just cleared do not reoccur.
temperature and setpoint.

18 October 2001 A31A-1 P41KA31A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A32A
A32A Operating Sleep Mode
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to operate the Sleep Mode features.

Important Information
• Sleep Mode allows the unit to operate in Diesel CYCLE-SENTRY Mode to maintain the engine block
temperature for easy starts and to keep the battery in a charged condition. The unit does not control to
setpoint when in Sleep Mode.
• When the unit is in Sleep Mode, the display will show [SLEEP] [MODE] instead of the Standard
Display of Return Air Temperature and Setpoint.
• The unit will start if the engine temperature falls below 35 F (1.7 C) or if the battery voltage falls
below the limit set by CYCLE-SENTRY Battery Voltage [CSBV].
• The unit will stop when the engine temperature rises above 90 F (32.2 C) and the charging current
falls below the limit set by CYCLE-SENTRY Amps [CS A].
• All keypad keys function normally when in Sleep Mode. After a function is displayed by pressing a
key, the display will return to [SLEEP] [MODE].
• If the unit is not equipped with a Data Logger, only Sleep Mode is available. If the unit is equipped
with a Data Logger, the programmable Sleep Mode Exit Time (or time to start controlling the trailer
temperature to setpoint) is also available. A Sleep Mode Exit time and date may be loaded before
entering Sleep Mode. The unit will operate in Sleep Mode until the Sleep Mode Exit Time is reached.
The unit will then exit Sleep Mode, perform a Pretrip Test and operate in the originally selected mode
and controlling to the selected setpoint.

Preparation
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the The unit cannot be in a
on. Standard Display appears. Pretrip or Defrost Mode.

2 Clear any alarm codes by The display will show [00]

using the CODE and CLEAR and [ALRM], then return to
keys. the Standard Display.

18 October 2001 A32A-1 P41KA32A

Service Procedure A32A

Units Not Equipped with Communications

NOTE: Only Sleep Mode is available on units that are not equipped with communications. The
programmable Sleep Mode Exit Time is not available.

Entering Sleep Mode

NOTE: If the unit is already in Sleep Mode the display will show [SLEEP] and [MODE].

Step Action Results Comments

1 Press and hold the T-K key [PrE TRIP] will appear in the
for at least 3 seconds. display.

2 Press the SELECT key. The display will show the

software revision at the top
of the display and [REV] at
the bottom of the display.

3 Press and hold the T-K key The display will show
for at least 3 seconds. [SLEEP] and [nO].

4 Press the UP ARROW key to The display will show The unit is now in Sleep
change the display from [nO] [SLEEP] and [MODE]. Mode.
to [YES] and press ENTER to The unit will not control to
load. setpoint.
The unit will start and run as
necessary to charge the
battery or warm the engine.
The unit will remain in Sleep
Mode until the ZONE 1/HOST
switch is turned off.

Exiting Sleep Mode

NOTE: If the unit is in Sleep Mode the display will show [SLEEP] and [MODE].

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display will show the The unit will operate
off. Standard Display of Return normally. Sleep Mode has
Air Temperature and been canceled.
Setpoint.

P41KA32A A32A-2
 Service Procedure A32A

Units Equipped with Communications - Programmable Sleep Mode Exit

Time
NOTE: Both the programmable Sleep Mode Exit Time and Sleep Mode are available on units with
communications.

Entering Sleep Mode with a Sleep Mode Exit Time

NOTE: The Clock/Calendar must be correctly set for proper operation
.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Press and hold the T-K key [PrE TRIP] will appear in the
for at least 3 seconds. display.

2 Press the SELECT key. The display will show

[PRNT] and [nO].

3 Press the SELECT key

repeatedly to check the
clock/calendar screens. Be
sure the clock is set to the
correct date and time.

4 Press the SELECT key The display will show [SOT] [SOT] is after the
repeatedly to display [SOT] and [nO]. clock/calendar screens. Be
and [nO]. sure the Clock Calendar is
properly set.

5 While [SOT] is shown on the If no alarms are present the If alarms are present, the
display, press and hold the display will show [SLEEP] display will show the [ALRM]
T-K key for at least 3 and [YES]. and the alarm code(s) to
seconds. allow the operator to clear
the alarms. After the alarm
codes are cleared, the
display will show [SLEEP]
and [YES].

6 Press the ENTER key. The display will show This screen allows the Sleep
[STR.T] and [YES] or [nO]. Mode Exit date and time to
be set. This is the start time
to return to setpoint control.

7 Using the UP and/or DOWN The display will show [SdAY] This is the day the unit is to
ARROW keys, select [YES] and [SUN]. exit Sleep Mode and return
and press the ENTER key to to normal CYCLE-SENTRY
load. operation. This time can be
no more than one week in
the future.

8 Using the UP and/or DOWN The display will show [SdAY]

ARROW keys, select the day and the new day.
for the unit to exit Sleep
Mode and press ENTER to
load.

18 October 2001 A32A-3 P41KA32A

Service Procedure A32A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show [SHR] This is the hour of the day
and [0]. that the unit is to exit Sleep
Mode and start normal
CYCLE-SENTRY operation.

10 Using the UP and/or DOWN The display will show [SHR] Hours after noon must be
ARROW keys, select the hour and the new hour. entered based on a 24 hour
for the unit to exit Sleep clock. For example, 2 pm
Mode and press ENTER to would be entered as 14.
load.

11 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show [SMN] This is the minutes of the
and [0]. hour that the unit is to exit
Sleep Mode and start normal
CYCLE-SENTRY operation.

12 Using the UP and/or DOWN The display will show [SMN]

ARROW keys, select the and the new minutes.
minutes of the hour for the
unit to exit Sleep Mode and
press ENTER to load.

13 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show The unit is now in Sleep
[SLEEP] [MODE]. Mode. The unit will remain in
Sleep Mode until the Day,
Hour and Minute selected
above. It will then exit Sleep
Mode, perform a Pretrip Test
and return to the previously
selected mode of operation.
The unit will not control to
setpoint.
The unit will start and run as
necessary to charge the
battery or warm the engine.
The unit may be removed
from Sleep Mode at any time
by turning the Zone 1/Host
switch off.

Exiting Sleep Mode Before the Day and Time Set as Sleep Mode Exit Time
NOTE: If the unit is in Sleep Mode, the display will show [SLEEP] and [MODE].

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display will show the The unit will operate
off. Standard Display of Return normally. Sleep Mode has
Air Temperature and been canceled.
Setpoint.

P41KA32A A32A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A32A

Units Equipped with Communications - Sleep Mode Only

Entering Sleep Mode Only, with no Sleep Mode Exit Time
NOTE: If the unit is already in Sleep Mode the display will show [SLEEP] and [MODE]. See Exiting
Sleep Mode Only below.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Press and hold the T-K key [PrE TRIP] will appear in the
for at least 3 seconds. display.

2 Press the SELECT key. The display will show

[PRNT] and [nO].

3 Press the SELECT key The display will show [SOT] [SOT] is after the
repeatedly to display [SOT] and [nO]. clock/calendar screens. Be
and [nO]. sure the Clock Calendar is
properly set.

4 While [SOT] is shown in the If no alarms are present the If alarms are present, the
display, press and hold the display will show [SLEEP] display will show the [ALRM]
T-K key for at least 3 and [YES]. and the alarm code(s) to
seconds. allow the operator to clear
the alarms. After the alarm
codes are cleared, the
display will show [SLEEP]
and [YES].

5 Press the ENTER key. The display will show

[STR.T] and [YES].

6 Press the UP ARROW key to The display will show The unit is now in Sleep
change the display from [SLEEP] and [MODE]. Mode. The unit may start
[YES] to [nO] and press and run if necessary to
ENTER to load. charge the battery or warm
the engine.
The unit will remain in Sleep
Mode until the ZONE 1/HOST
switch is turned off.

Exiting Sleep Mode Only, with no Sleep Mode Exit Time

NOTE: If the unit is in Sleep Mode the display will show [SLEEP] and [MODE].

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display will show the The unit will operate
off. Standard Display of Return normally. Sleep Mode has
Air Temperature and been canceled.
Setpoint.

18 October 2001 A32A-5 P41KA32A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A34A
A34A Operating Service Test Mode
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to operate the Service Test Mode feature.

Important Information
• Service Test Mode should be used by qualified technicians and should not be used for
temperature control or emergency operation.
• The Service Test Mode allows the unit to be forced to a known operating condition regardless of
setpoint or temperature sensor inputs. This allows service personnel to troubleshoot the system under
defined conditions.
• The unit will remain in any Service Test Mode function except [VAC] for 15 minutes if no other Test
Mode function is selected. At the end of 15 minutes, if no other Test Mode is selected the unit will
shut down and record Alarm Code 54 (Service Test Shut Down).
• The unit will remain in the [VAC] mode until another function is selected or the ZONE 1/HOST switch
is turned off.
• The engine may be either stopped or running before entering Service Test Mode. If the engine is
running when entering Service Test Mode, it will remain running. If the engine is not running when
entering Service Test Mode it will remain off.
• All keypad keys function normally when in Service Test Mode. After a function is displayed by
pressing a key, the display will return to [TEST].
• The protection circuits such as low oil pressure, high engine temperature and high discharge pressure
function normally when in Service Test Mode.
• The unit will not enter Service Test Mode if it is in Pretrip Mode, Defrost Mode or Sleep Mode.
• If a Shut Down Alarm occurs, the unit will record the alarm, shut down and exit Service Test Mode.
• If the ZONE 1/HOST switch is turned off the unit will exit Service Test Mode.

18 October 2001 A34A-1 P41KA34A

Service Procedure A34A

Enter and Operate Service Test Mode

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the Only zones that are turned
and all other zone switches Standard Display appears. on can be tested.
on.

2 If desired, allow the unit to The tests will function with

start. the engine stopped or
running as required.

3 Clear any alarm codes by The display will show [00]

using the CODE and CLEAR and [ALRM], then return to
keys and allow the display to the Standard Display.
return to the Standard
Display.

4 Press and hold the T-K key The display will show [PrE
continuously for 3-5 TRIP].
seconds.

5 Press the SELECT key as The display will show [REV]

required to display [REV]. and the software revision
number.

6 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show [tESt] The controller has entered
and CLEAR keys and [VAC] or[C1]. the Service Test Mode. If no
continuously for 3-5 test is selected, the
seconds. microprocessor will return to
normal operation in about 30
seconds.

7 The Test Mode functions The unit will remain in any

listed below can be selected Service Test Mode function
by pressing the ENTER key except [VAC] for 15 minutes
when the test is shown in the if no other Test Mode
display. function is selected. At the
A different Test Mode end of 15 minutes, if no
function can be entered by other Test Mode is selected
pressing the UP or DOWN the unit will shut down and
ARROW keys to select the record Alarm Code 54
new function and then (Service Test Shut Down).
pressing the ENTER key.

8 The display will show [tESt] [VAC] will only appear if the
and [VAC] or [C1]. engine is not running. This is
an evacuation mode. If
[VAC] appears, press the UP
ARROW key to display [C1].

P41KA34A A34A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A34A

Step Action Results Comments

9 The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Cool

and [C1] Cool Zone 1. Press Mode in Zone 1. If this is the
ENTER to activate this mode. first entry the evaporator
fans in all remotes will also
start. The run relay and Zone
1 liquid line solenoid are
energized.
The high speed relay will be
energized if allowed by
discharge pressure.

10 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Heat
again to display [H1] Heat and [H1]. Mode in Zone 1. The run
Zone 1. Press ENTER to relay, Zone 1 liquid line
activate this mode. solenoid and Zone 1 hot gas
solenoid are energized.
If Cool Mode is selected in
another zone on TCI
systems the suction line
solenoid will also be
energized (reverse cycle
operation).
The condenser inlet solenoid
will be energized unless the
discharge pressure is high.
The high speed relay, the
purge valve and the receiver
tank pressure solenoid will
be energized if allowed by
discharge pressure.

11 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Defrost
again to display [DEF1] and [DEF1]. Mode in Zone 1. The run
Defrost Zone 1. Press ENTER relay, Zone 1 liquid line
to activate this mode. solenoid, Zone 1 hot gas
solenoid and damper
solenoid are energized.
The condenser inlet solenoid
will be energized unless the
discharge pressure is high.
The purge valve and the
receiver tank pressure
solenoid will be energized
if allowed by discharge
pressure.

18 October 2001 A34A-3 P41KA34A

Service Procedure A34A

Step Action Results Comments

12 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Null
again to display [NUL1] Null and [NUL1]. Mode in Zone 1. The run
Zone 1 as long as another relay is energized since
zone has been placed in another zone has been
Cool, Heat or Defrost. If no placed in Cool, Heat or
selection has been made for Defrost.
any other zone this screen The liquid line solenoid, hot
will not appear. Press ENTER gas solenoid and suction line
to activate this mode. solenoid in Zone 1 are all
de-energized.

13 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Cool
again to display [C2] Cool and [C2]. Mode in Zone 2. If this is the
Zone 2. Press ENTER to first entry the evaporator
activate this mode. fans in all remotes will also
start. The run relay and Zone
2 liquid line solenoid are
energized.
If not a DE-2 or DE-3 the
Zone 2 remote evaporator
fans will be energized.
The High Speed Relay will
be energized if allowed by
discharge pressure.

14 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Heat
again to display [H2] Heat and [H2]. Mode in Zone 2. The run
Zone 2. Press ENTER to relay, Zone 2 liquid line
activate this mode. solenoid and Zone 2 hot gas
solenoid are energized.
If the unit is not a DE-2 or
DE-3 the Zone 2 remote
evaporator fans will be
energized.
If Cool Mode is selected in
another zone on TCI
systems the suction line
solenoid will also be
energized (reverse cycle
operation).
The condenser inlet solenoid
will be energized unless the
discharge pressure is high.
The high speed relay, the
purge valve and the receiver
tank pressure solenoid will
be energized if allowed by
discharge pressure.

P41KA34A A34A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A34A

Step Action Results Comments

15 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Defrost
again to display [DEF2] and [DEF2]. Mode in Zone 2. The run
Defrost Zone 2. Press ENTER relay, Zone 2 liquid line
to activate this mode. solenoid and Zone 2 hot gas
solenoid are energized. On a
DE-2 and DE-3 units the
Zone 2 damper solenoid is
energized. On all other units
the Zone 2 remote
evaporator fans are
de-energized.
The condenser inlet solenoid
will be energized unless the
discharge pressure is high.
The purge valve and the
receiver tank pressure
solenoid will be energized if
allowed by discharge
pressure.

16 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Null
again to display [NUL2] Null and [NUL2]. Mode in Zone 2. The run
Zone 2 as long as another relay is energized since
zone has been placed in another zone has been
Cool, Heat or Defrost. If no placed in Cool, Heat or
selection has been made for Defrost.
any other zone this screen The liquid line solenoid, hot
will not appear. Press ENTER gas solenoid and suction line
to activate this mode. solenoid in Zone 2 are all
de-energized.

17 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Cool
again to display [C3] Cool and [C3]. Mode in Zone 3. If this is the
Zone 3. Press ENTER to first entry the evaporator
activate this mode. fans in all remotes will also
start. The run relay and Zone
3 liquid line solenoid are
energized.
The Zone 3 remote
evaporator fans will be
energized.
The high speed relay will be
energized if allowed by
discharge pressure.

18 October 2001 A34A-5 P41KA34A

Service Procedure A34A

Step Action Results Comments

18 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Heat
again to display [H3] Heat and [H3]. Mode in Zone 3. The run
Zone 3. Press ENTER to relay, Zone 3 liquid line
activate this mode. solenoid and Zone 3 hot gas
solenoid are energized.
The Zone 3 remote
evaporator fans will be
energized.
If Cool Mode is selected in
another zone on TCI
systems the suction line
solenoid will also be
energized (reverse cycle
operation).
The condenser inlet solenoid
will be energized unless the
discharge pressure is high.
The high speed relay, the
purge valve and the receiver
tank pressure solenoid will
be energized if allowed by
discharge pressure.

19 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Defrost
again to display [DEF3] and [DEF3]. Mode in Zone 3. The run
Defrost Zone 3. Press ENTER relay, Zone 3 liquid line
to activate this mode. solenoid and Zone 3 hot gas
solenoid are energized.
The Zone 3 remote
evaporator fans are
de-energized.
The condenser inlet solenoid
will be energized unless the
discharge pressure is high.
The purge valve and the
receiver tank pressure
solenoid will be energized
if allowed by discharge
pressure.

20 Press the UP ARROW key The display will show [tESt] The unit is forced to Null
again to display [NUL3] Null and [NUL3]. Mode in Zone 3. The run
Zone 3 as long as another relay is energized since
zone has been placed in another zone has been
Cool, Heat or Defrost. If no placed in Cool, Heat or
selection has been made for Defrost.
any other zone this screen The liquid line solenoid, hot
will not appear. Press ENTER gas solenoid and suction line
to activate this mode. solenoid in Zone 3 are all
de-energized.

P41KA34A A34A-6 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A34A

Exit Service Test Mode

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the Zone 1/Host switch The display will return to the The unit will operate
off and back on. Standard Display. normally.

18 October 2001 A34A-7 P41KA34A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure A44A
A44A Operating Relay Board Test Mode
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure should be used to operate the Relay Board Test Mode feature.

Important Information
• Relay Board Test Mode should be used by qualified technicians.
• Relay Board Test Mode can be used only with the engine stopped. Relay Board Test Mode can not be
entered with the engine running. The unit will not enter Relay Board Test Mode if it is in a Pretrip
Test, Sleep Mode or Defrost Mode.
• The Relay Board Test Mode allows the selected relay or output to be forced "on" regardless of
setpoint or temperature sensor inputs. This allows service personnel to troubleshoot the system under
defined conditions.
• When selecting a function, briefly pressing the ENTER key will energize the relay or output only as
long as the ENTER key is held down. Holding the ENTER key for more than 5 seconds will lock relay
or output "on". The display will briefly show [LOCK] when the device is locked on. The Preheat and
Starter functions are momentary only; they can not be locked on. Pressing either ARROW key releases
any locked function.
• The unit will remain locked in any Relay Board Test Mode function for 15 minutes if no other Test
Mode function is selected. At the end of 15 minutes, if no other Relay Board Test Mode is selected the
unit will shut down and record Alarm Code 54 (Test Mode Timeout).
• If the ZONE 1/HOST switch is turned off the unit will exit Relay Board Test Mode.

Enter and Operate Relay Board Test Mode

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

and all other zone switches Standard Display appears.
on.

2 Do not allow the unit to start. The tests will only function
with the engine stopped.

3 Clear any alarm codes by The display will show [00]

using the CODE and CLEAR and [ALRM], then return to
keys and allow the display to the Standard Display.
return to the Standard
Display.

4 Press and hold the T-K key The display will show [PrE
continuously for 3-5 TRIP].
seconds.

18 October 2001 A44A-1 P41KA44A

Service Procedure A44A

Step Action Results Comments

5 Press the SELECT key as The display will show [REV]

required to display [REV]. and the software revision
number.

6 Press and hold both the The display will show [tESt] The controller has entered
T-Kand CLEAR keys and [VAC] or[C1]. the Service Test Mode.
continuously for 3-5
seconds.

7 Press the SELECT key again. The display will show [rbt01] The controller has entered
and [PREH]. the Relay Board Test Mode.
If no test is selected, the
microprocessor will return to
normal operation in about 30
seconds.

8 The Relay Board Test Mode A different Relay Board Test

functions listed below can be Mode function can be
selected by pressing the selected by pressing the UP
ENTER key when the test is or DOWN ARROW keys to
shown in the display. chose the new function and
When selecting a function, then pressing the ENTER key.
briefly pressing the ENTER The unit will remain in any
key will energize the relay or Relay Board Test Mode
output only as long as the function for 15 minutes if no
ENTER key is held down. other Test Mode function is
Holding the ENTER key for selected. At the end of 15
more than 5 seconds will minutes, if no other Relay
lock the relay or output Board Test Mode is selected
energized. The display will the unit will shut down and
briefly show [LOCK] when a record Alarm Code 54 (Test
function is locked in the Mode Timeout).
energized state. The
function can be
de-energized by pressing
the UP or DOWN ARROW keys.

9 When Relay Board Test Press the ENTER key to

Mode is entered, the display momentarily energize the
will show [rbt01] and preheat relay. The preheat
[PREH]. This is the preheat relay cannot be locked
relay. energized.

10 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the run relay is locked
display [rbt02] and [RUN.R]. momentarily energize the energized pressing the UP or
This is the run relay. run relay. Press and hold the DOWN ARROW key will
ENTER key for more than 5 de-energize it.
seconds to lock the run relay
energized.

P41KA44A A44A-2
 Service Procedure A44A

Step Action Results Comments

11 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 1 defrost damper
display [rbt03] and [DEF]. momentarily energize the is locked energized pressing
This is the Zone 1 defrost Zone 1 defrost damper. the UP or DOWN ARROW key
damper. Press and hold the ENTER will de-energize it.
key for more than 5 seconds
to lock the Zone 1 defrost
damper energized.

12 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 3 remote fan is
display [rbt04] and [FAN]. momentarily energize the locked energized pressing
This is the Zone 3 remote Zone 3 remote fan. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key
fan. and hold the ENTER key for will de-energize it.
more than 5 seconds to lock
the Zone 3 remote fan
energized.

13 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the high speed solenoid is
display [rbt05] and [7D]. This momentarily energize the locked energized pressing
is the high speed solenoid. high speed solenoid. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key
and hold the ENTER key for will de-energize it.
more than 5 seconds to lock
the high speed solenoid
energized.

14 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 2 damper or
display [rbt06] and [DEF] or momentarily energize the remote fan is locked
[FAN]. This is the Zone 2 Zone 2 damper or remote energized pressing the UP or
damper or remote fan. fan. Press and hold the DOWN ARROW key will
ENTER key for more than 5 de-energize it.
seconds to lock the Zone 2
damper or remote fan
energized.

15 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 2 liquid line
display [rbt09] and [LLS2]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 2 liquid line Zone 2 liquid line solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 2 liquid line
solenoid energized.

16 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 2 suction line
display [rbt10] and [SLS2]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 2 suction Zone 2 suction line solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
line solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 2 suction
line solenoid energized.

17 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 2 hot gas
display [rbt11] and [HGS2]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 2 hot gas Zone 2 hot gas solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 2 hot gas
solenoid energized.

18 October 2001 A44A-3 P41KA44A

Service Procedure A44A

Step Action Results Comments

18 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the alarm light is locked
display [rbt12] and [ALLT]. momentarily energize the energized pressing the UP or
This is the alarm light. (This alarm light. Press and hold DOWN ARROW key will
screen only appears in the ENTER key for more than de-energize it.
software revision 2003 and 5 seconds to lock the alarm
later). light energized.

19 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 3 suction line
display [rbt13] and [SLS3]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 3 suction Zone 3 suction line solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
line solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 3 suction
line solenoid energized.

20 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 3 hot gas
display [rbt14] and [HGS3]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 3 hot gas Zone 3 hot gas solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 3 hot gas
solenoid energized.

21 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 3 liquid line
display [rbt15] and [LLS3]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 3 liquid line Zone 3 liquid line solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 3 liquid line
solenoid energized.

22 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the receiver tank pressure
display [rbt16] and [RTPS]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the receiver tank receiver tank pressure pressing the UP or DOWN
pressure solenoid. solenoid. Press and hold the ARROW key will de-energize
ENTER key for more than 5 it.
seconds to lock the receiver
tank pressure solenoid
energized.

23 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the purge valve is locked
display [rbt17] and [PV]. This momentarily energize the energized pressing the UP or
is the purge valve. purge valve. Press and hold DOWN ARROW key will
the ENTER key for more than de-energize it.
5 seconds to lock the purge
valve energized.

24 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the condenser inlet
display [rbt18] and [CIS]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the condenser inlet condenser inlet solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the condenser inlet
solenoid energized.

P41KA44A A44A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure A44A

Step Action Results Comments

25 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 1 suction line
display [rbt19] and [SLS1]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 1 suction Zone 1 suction line solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
line solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 1 suction
line solenoid energized.

26 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 1 hot gas
display [rbt20] and [HGS1]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 1 hot gas Zone 1 hot gas solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 1 hot gas
solenoid energized.

27 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to If the Zone 1 liquid line
display [rbt21] and [LLS1]. momentarily energize the solenoid is locked energized
This is the Zone 1 liquid line Zone 1 liquid line solenoid. pressing the UP or DOWN
solenoid. Press and hold the ENTER ARROW key will de-energize
key for more than 5 seconds it.
to lock the Zone 1 liquid line
solenoid energized.

28 Press the UP ARROW key to Press the ENTER key to

display [rbt22] and [8S]. This momentarily energize the
is the starter relay. starter relay. The starter
relay can not be locked
energized.

29 Pressing the UP or DOWN

ARROW keys allows the
operator to continue to scroll
forward or backward through
the tests in the order shown
above.

Exit Relay Board Test Mode

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the Zone 1/Host switch The display will return to the The unit will operate
off and back on. Standard Display. normally.

18 October 2001 A44A-5 P41KA44A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure B02A
B02A Relay Board Removal and Replacement
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Applications

Purpose
This procedure should be followed when replacing a relay board.

RELAYS
K2 High Speed Relay
K3 Damper Relay Zone 1
K4 Preheat Relay
K5 Starter Relay
K7 Run Relay
DFR Damper/Fan Relay Zone 3
FR3 Fan Relay Zone 3

FUSES
F1 3A Zone 1 Electric Heat
F2 5A Electric Motor Contactor
F3 15A Zone 1 Damper
F4 15A High Speed Solenoid
F5 3A Not Used
F6 15A Zone 1 Controls
F7 3A Alternator Resistor Bypass
F8 3A Not Used
F10 3A Microprocessor Power
F11 3A Zone 3 Electric Heat
F12 25A Zone 3 Fan Motors
F13 10A Zone 3 Controls
F14 3A Zone 2 Electric Heat
F15 25A Zone 2 Fan Motor/Damper
F16 10A Zone 2 Controls
F17 3A Shunt 1
F18 3A Shunt 2
F19 3A Shunt 3
F20 40A Control Circuit Power
F21 3A Oil Level Sw/Door Sw
F22 15A Unit Controls
F23 40A Starter Circuit
F32 3A Spare
F33 5A Spare
F34 15A Spare
F35 25A Spare
F36 40A Spare
F37 10A Spare

Relay Board Jumper Pins

Unit Configuration Jumpers

18 October 2001 B02A-1 P41KB02A

Service Procedure B02A

The jumper in
the upper
position = 1
The jumper in
the lower
position = 0

Unit Type Selection Jumpers

(located at the center of the relay board)

0001 SBIII DE-2 and Spectrum™ DE-2

0010 SBIII DE-3 and Spectrum™ DE-3
1000 SB-III, Super-II, Spectrum™ SB, Spectrum™ Super-II or SMX/SL TCI-2
1001 SB-III, Super-II, Spectrum™ SB, Spectrum™ Super-II or SMX/SL TCI-3
1010 SB-III, Super-II, Spectrum™ SB, Spectrum™ Super-II or SMX/SL TCI-2PE *
0100 SB-III, Super-II or SMX/SL TC-2
0101 SB-III, Super-II or SMX/SL TC-3
0110 SB-III, Super-II or SMX/SL TC-2PE *
1100 Single Zone TC
1101 Single Zone TCI

* = Parallel Remote Evaporators

Unit Type Selection Table

Security Code Enabled Security Code Bypassed

Electric Standby Disabled Electric Standby Enabled

Cold Start Enabled Cold Start Disabled

Unit Configuration Jumpers

(located at the lower right corner of the relay board)

P41KB02A B02A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure B02A

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the microprocessor The display should be

power switch off. "dead".

2 Disconnect the unit battery. This ensures that all control

circuits are "dead".

3 Disconnect the rectangular

AMP connectors at the
bottom of the relay board.

4 Remove the surface Exercise care when

mounted relay board removing the connectors to
connectors by releasing the avoid pinched fingers.
side latch and pulling them
straight back.

5 Disconnect the 2, 2A and

2AA wires from the terminal
board at the upper right
corner of the board.

6 Remove the screws securing Protect the output module

the input/output module to from static electricity. See
the relay board and remove Service Procedure B04A for
the output module by pulling details.
straight back.

7 Remove the screws securing

the relay board to the control
box.

8 Remove the relay board.

9 Check the unit type selection Set the unit type selection Be certain all jumpers are
jumpers on the old relay jumpers on the replacement correct.
board. These jumpers are relay board to match the
located near the center of settings on the old relay
the relay board. board.

10 Check the unit configuration Set the unit configuration Be certain all jumpers are
jumpers on the old relay jumpers on the replacement correct.
board. These jumpers are relay board to match the
located near the lower right settings on the old relay
corner of the relay board. board.

11 Install the new relay board

and secure with the old
screws.

12 Install the Input/Output Protect the output module

module on the relay board from static electricity. See
and secure with the old Service Procedure B04A for
screws. details.

18 October 2001 B02A-3 P41KB02A

Service Procedure B02A

Step Action Results Comments

13 Reattach the AMP

rectangular connectors at
the bottom of the relay
board.

14 Reconnect the 2, 2A and

2AA wires to the terminal
board at the upper right
corner of the board.

15 Install the remaining circuit Double check the position of

board connectors in the these connectors. It is may
proper locations. be possible to plug them in
upside down or offset to
miss a row of pins.

16 Verify that all fuses and

relays are installed.

17 Reconnect the unit battery.

18 Turn the microprocessor The "Standard Display"

power switch and Zone should appear.
1/Host switches on.

19 Clear alarm codes using the

CODE and CLEAR keys.

20 Route control box harnesses

as required and replace any
tie bands that were
removed.

21 Confirm proper operation by

running a Full Pretrip as
shown in Service Procedure
A17A.

P41KB02A B02A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure B03A
B03A Unit Configuration Jumper Setup
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure is used to set up and confirm unit configuration.

The jumper in
the upper
position = 1
The jumper in
the lower
position = 0

Unit Type Selection Jumpers

(located at the center of the relay board)

0001 SBIII DE-2 and Spectrum™ DE-2

0010 SBIII DE-3 and Spectrum™ DE-3
1000 SB-III, Super-II, Spectrum™ SB, Spectrum™ Super-II or SMX/SL TCI-2
1001 SB-III, Super-II, Spectrum™ SB, Spectrum™ Super-II or SMX/SL TCI-3
1010 SB-III, Super-II, Spectrum™ SB, Spectrum™ Super-II or SMX/SL TCI-2PE
*
0100 SB-III, Super-II or SMX/SL TC-2
0101 SB-III, Super-II or SMX/SL TC-3
0110 SB-III, Super-II or SMX/SL TC-2PE *
1100 Single Zone TC
1101 Single Zone TCI

* = Parallel Remote Evaporators

Unit Type Selection Table

18 October 2001 B03A-1 P41KB03A

Service Procedure B03A

Security Code Enabled Security Code Bypassed

Electric Standby Disabled Electric Standby Enabled

Cold Start Enabled Cold Start Disabled

Unit Configuration Jumpers

(located at the lower right corner of the relay board)

Preparation
Step Action Results Comments

1. Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

Units with Suction Line Solenoids

Step Action Results Comments

1 Physically confirm the If the unit has a suction line If this jumper is not set
presence or absence of a solenoid the relay board type properly Alarm Code 111 will
suction line solenoid at the selection jumpers must be occur.
host unit evaporator. set for a TCI unit even if the
unit is a TC unit.

2 Set the type selection

jumpers as shown in the Unit
Type Selection Table on the
previous page.

Two Zone Units with Single Remote Evaporator

Step Action Results Comments

1 If the unit is a two zone unit This connector is in the

with a single remote harness at the left side of the
evaporator, locate the relay board in the control
8-3/8S-3 wire connector. box.

2 Unplug the connector and This removes power from If the unit has parallel remote
securely tape the connector the top left connector on the evaporators, this connector
halves to the harness. relay board. must be left plugged in.

P41KB03A B03A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure B04A
B04A Input/Output Module Replacement
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure must be followed to remove and replace the Input/Output Module.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the microprocessor The display should be

power switch off. "dead".

2 Disconnect the unit battery. This ensures that all control

circuits are "dead".

3 Remove the screws securing Protect the output module

the Input/Output module to from static electricity.
the relay board and remove
the output module by pulling
straight back.

4 Install the new input/output

module on the relay board
and secure with the old
screws.

5 Reconnect the unit battery.

6 Turn the microprocessor The "Standard Display"

power switch and Zone should appear.
1/Host switches on.

7 Clear alarm codes using the

CODE and CLEAR keys.

8 Confirm proper operation by

running a Full Pretrip as
shown in Service Procedure
A17A.

18 October 2001 B04A-1 P41KB04A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure C01A
C01A Shunt Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure should be followed when it is necessary to verify the operation of the shunt (ammeter) and
it's associated circuitry. This procedure is designed to test the operation of the shunt and the related
microprocessor current circuits. It should be used when a series of problems or fault codes indicate a
problem in the shunt circuit or multiple current test failures are experienced during a full pretrip.
There are two shunt resistors located on the upper right corner of the relay board. The upper shunt resistor
is the resistor currently being used and the lower shunt resistor is reserved for future use.
The shunt resistors have a resistance of 0.005W and a voltage drop across them of 0.005 volts per ampere
of current passing thru them.

Meter Checks
Step Action Results Comments

1 Obtain a quality digital The voltmeter must be

multimeter such as a FLUKE capable of reading voltage to
21, 23, 73 or 77. 0.001 volts.

2 Connect the red lead from The meter leads must be

the meter to the right side of connected directly to the
the shunt resistor at the resistor lead.
resistor lead.

3 Connect the black lead from The meter leads must be

the meter to the left side of connected directly to the
the shunt resistor at the resistor lead.
resistor lead.

18 October 2001 C01A-1 P41KC01A

Service Procedure C01A

Step Action Results Comments

4 With the ZONE 1/HOST switch Meter = 0.000 ± 0.001 DC

and all other zone switches volts.
turned off, the meter should
read zero.

5 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Meter = 0.005 to 0.020 DC If meter reading is not in this
on. The display must be on, volts. range the shunt may be
the backlight must be on and defective or the voltmeter is
no alarm codes should be not accurate.
present. The meter should
read between 0.005 and
0.020 volts. Record this
reading here.

6 Calculate the Example: volts.009 volts x The current must be

microprocessor ammeter 200 = 1.8 amps. calculated from the shunt
reading using the formula: voltage to determine if the
Volts ____ x 200 = ___ amps microprocessor is accurate
and calibrated.

7 Press the AMPS key and then

press the ENTER key to lock
the Amps display on the
screen.

8 Read the Amps on the Microprocessor Display = If the readings agree with the
microprocessor and the volts Calculated value plus or calculated value but the
on the meter. The amps minus 10%. amps reading is too high
reading on the when compared with a
microprocessor must be the known good ammeter,
calculated value from step 6 replace the relay board
plus or minus 10%. using Service Procedure
B02A.

9 If the readings are still out of If the microprocessor passes

range, the microprocessor the test replace the relay
must be tested to determine board using Service
if its ammeter reading is Procedure B02A.
satisfactory using Service
Procedure A01A.

10 As a final test, perform a Full

Pretrip as shown in Service
Procedure A17A to verify
unit performance.

P41KC01A C01A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure C02A
C02A Shunt Calibration
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors and Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
This procedure can be used to calibrate the current shunt.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the

on. Standard Display appears.

2 Press the SELECT Key to The unit must be in

display [CYCLS], use the UP Continuous Mode.
or DOWN ARROW keys to
chose [nO] and press the
ENTER key. Allow the display
to return to the Standard
Display.

3 Clear any alarm codes using [00] is shown in the display. If all alarm codes cannot be
the CODE and CLEAR keys cleared, repair the problem
and allow the display to before proceeding.
return to the Standard
Display.

4 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show the
and CLEAR keys for 5 or hour meter type and [H6TY].
more seconds. If the display shows [CODE],
you must first enter the
correct Security Code or
bypass the Security Code.
See Service procedures
A09A and A19A.

5 Press the SELECT key This will place the controller

repeatedly to display in "Super Guarded Access"
[DDUR]. Now press and hold mode. The display will show
both the T-K and CLEAR keys [CRA1] and the grade of the
for 5 or more seconds. sensor (1 thru 9).

6 Allow the microprocessor to The shunt is now calibrated. If problems still exist test the
time out and return to the shunt as shown in Service
Standard Display. This will Procedure C01A.
take about 15 seconds.

18 October 2001 C02A-1 P41KC02A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure D01A
D01A Temperature Sensor Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure can be used to confirm the proper operation of the return air, discharge air, coil and/or
ambient sensors. This test can also be used on the water temperature sensor.

Graded Sensor Used For:

Return Air and Discharge Air

Ungraded Sensor Used For:

Coil and Ambient

Steps
NOTE: Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are
connected backwards, the display will show four dashes (----).

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Disconnect the appropriate

sensor at the plug next to the
sensor.

3 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

18 October 2001 D01A-1 P41KD01A

Service Procedure D01A

Step Action Results Comments

4 Select the appropriate The display for the If all sensors show [----]
sensor by pressing the disconnected sensor should without being disconnected,
SELECT key. show [----]. the microprocessor may be
defective. Test the
microprocessor using
Service Procedure A01A
and check the sensor wiring
for correct polarity.

5 Using a high quality digital The voltage must be from If the voltage is correct,
multimeter, check the 4.90 to 5.10 volts DC. replace the sensor.
voltage at the sensor plug on
the plug half that is still
connected to the
microprocessor.

6 If the voltage measured in The voltage must be from If the voltage is correct at the
Step 5 above is incorrect, 4.90 to 5.10 volts DC. microprocessor, check the
recheck the voltage at the sensor harness for
same circuits on the 37 pin problems.
connector on the back of the
microprocessor.

7 If the voltage measured in If the voltage is now correct

Steps 5 and 6 above are the discharge pressure
both incorrect, disconnect transducer is shorted and
the discharge pressure should be replaced.
transducer and recheck the
voltage.

8 If the voltage measured in If a bad microprocessor is

Step 6a above is still indicated, replace the
incorrect, check the microprocessor as shown in
microprocessor with a Service Procedure A03A.
Microprocessor Tester as
shown in Service Procedure
A01A.

9 If the microprocessor and Substitute or replace sensor Return air and discharge air
harness appear to be OK, if needed. sensors must be replaced
but a sensor is still with graded sensors and
suspected of reading calibrated as shown in
incorrectly, check the grade Service Procedure A15A.
calibration using Service Coil and ambient sensors
Procedure A15A. are ungraded sensors and
do not require calibration.

P41KD01A D01A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure D02A
D02A Checking Graded Sensor Calibration
with an Ice Water Bath
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure must be used when it is necessary to confirm sensor calibration of graded return air or
discharge air sensors.

Important Information
To be effective, an ice water bath must be constructed as shown in this procedure. Using a bag or
cup of ice instead of an insulated container and/or failing to stir the bath during the test will result
in erroneous readings.

Steps
NOTE: Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are
connected backwards, the display will show four dashes (----). Consult the schematic diagram or
wiring diagram for the correct connections.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Obtain a clean, well

insulated container with a
capacity of at least one
quart.

2 Clean the insulated NOTE: Contamination of

container. the container with
antifreeze or other
substances will result in
false readings.

3 Completely fill the insulated

container with crushed ice.

4 Add cold water to the top of

the ice in the insulated
container.

5 Allow the container to

stabilize for at least 15
minutes. Stir the contents of
the container briskly several
times during this period.

6 Remove the sensor to be The graded return air and

tested and its harness as discharge air sensors are
required to immerse them in the only sensors requiring
the ice water bath. ice water calibration.

18 October 2001 D02A-1 P41KD02A

Service Procedure D02A

Step Action Results Comments

7 Be certain the unit display is

showing the Standard
Display.

8 After the bath has stabilized

for 15 minutes, insert the
sensor completely into the
ice and water mixture. Stir
the bath briskly.

9 Allow the sensor to remain in

the bath for at least 5
minutes. Stir the bath briskly
several times.

10 Stir the bath briskly and The display must show a

press the Select key if temperature of 32 F ± 0.6 F
necessary to display the (0 C ± 0.3 C).
sensor being tested.

11 If the display is not within the

required range, recheck the
return air sensor calibration
as shown in Service
Procedure A15A.

12 If the sensor is still not within The display must show a

the required range as shown temperature of 32 F ± 0.6 F
it must be replaced. (0 C ± 0.3 C).

13 Reinstall the sensor in the Be certain the return air and

appropriate location. discharge air sensors are
not interchanged. If they are
interchanged the unit will fail
the pretrip.

14 Secure sensor harnesses

and replace cable ties as
required.

15 Perform an Engine Running

Pretrip as shown in Service
Procedure A18A to confirm
operation.

P41KD02A D02A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure D03A
D03A Pressure Transducer Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure can be used to confirm the proper operation of the discharge pressure transducer.

Discharge Pressure Transducer

Steps
NOTE: Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are
connected backwards, the display will show dashes (----) or display inaccurate pressures.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Disconnect pressure
transducer at the transducer
plug.

3 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

4 Select the pressure The display for the If all sensors show [----]
transducer by pressing the disconnected transducer without being disconnected,
SELECT key to show [HED.P]. should show [----]. the microprocessor may be
defective, a sensor lead may
be shorted to chassis ground
or the sensor polarities may
be reversed. Test the
microprocessor using
Service Procedure A01A
and check the sensor wiring
for correct polarity.

18 October 2001 D03A-1 P41KD03A

Service Procedure D03A

Step Action Results Comments

5 Using a high quality digital The voltage between pins

multimeter, check the "B" and "A" must be from
voltage at the sensor plug on 4.90 to 5.10 volts DC.
the plug half that is still
connected to the
microprocessor.

6 Check the continuity of Check continuity from pin If the voltage in step 5
harness wire "PTO" using "C" of the transducer checks good and continuity
Service Procedure H04A. connector and pin 19 of the exists from pin "C" to pin 19,
37 pin connector. replace the transducer.

7 If the voltage measured in The voltage between pins 28 If the voltage is correct at
Step 5 above is incorrect, and 25 of the 37 pin Step 7 and incorrect at Step
recheck the voltage at the connector must be from 4.90 5, the problem is in the
same circuits on the 37 pin to 5.10 volts DC. wiring. Check for shorts and
connector on the back of the continuity using Service
microprocessor. Procedure H04A.

8 If the voltage is incorrect in

both Steps 5 and 6, check
the microprocessor with the
Microprocessor Tester as
shown in Service Procedure
A01A.

P41KD03A D03A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure F01A
F01A Engine Oil Level Switch Testing and Replacement
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To test the oil level switch for proper operation. The switch is open with the float up indicating full oil
level. The switch is closed with the float down indicating low oil level. Disconnecting the switch
connector will disable the circuit and prevent Alarm Code 66.

Deutsch
Connector

Press-In
Fitting

Float

Testing the Switch

Step Action Results Comments

1 Disconnect the Deutsch

connector at the sensor.

2 Use an ohmmeter to check With the oil above the "add" This check can be
switch continuity. mark, the switch should be performed while changing
open. If the engine is 10 or oil.
more quarts low the switch
should be closed.

3 Reconnect the Deutsch

connector after service is
complete.

F01A-1 P41KF01A
Service Procedure F01A

Replacing the Switch

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Disconnect the switch

Deutsch connector.

3 Carefully pry the switch up

using a screwdriver and light
hand pressure. Twist and
rock the switch as necessary
to release it from the rubber
seal.

4 Remove the old switch seal

from the mounting hole.

5 Remove the rubber seal NOTE: Do not attempt to

from the replacement switch install the switch and seal
and insert it lip up in the at the same time. The seal
opening in the mounting must be installed first.
hole. When the switch is
installed it expands the
seal to create a leak proof
installation.

6 Lightly oil the seal to aid in

installing the switch.

7 Press the switch into place

using hand pressure only.

8 Reconnect the Deutsch

switch connector.

P41KF01A F01A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure F03A
F03A Oil Pressure Sensor Testing and Replacement
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To test the oil pressure sensor for proper operation. The oil pressure sensor is connected to the engine oil
system and uses oil pressure to present a variable resistance to the microprocessor.

Testing the Oil Pressure Sensor

Step Action Results Comments

1 Disconnect the OPS wire

from the oil pressure sensor.

2 Press the OIL PRESSURE key The display should show

and then press the ENTER [----].
key to lock the display.

3 Using a digital voltmeter, The voltage must be +7 volts

check the voltage from the or more.
OPS wire to chassis ground.

4 If the display showed [----] Replace the sensor. Be sure and reconnect the
and the voltage is +7 volts or OPS wire after service is
above, the sensor is complete.
defective.
If the display showed other Test the microprocessor
than [---] or the +7 volts is using Service Procedure
not present, the problem lies A01A. Check the harness
in the harness or the OPS circuit using Service
microprocessor. Procedure H04A.

18 October 2001 F03A-1 P41KF03A

Service Procedure F03A

Replacing the Oil Pressure Sensor

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Disconnect the OPS and

WTN wires from the sensor.

3 Remove the sensor.

4 Install the new sensor.

5 Replace the OPS and WTN

wires.

6 Start the engine and press The display should show

the OIL PRESS key to check engine oil pressure from 50
operation. to 90 PSI.

P41KF03A F03A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure F05A
F05A Oil Pressure Switch Testing and Replacement
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To test the oil pressure shutdown switch for proper operation.

Single Terminal
Style

Double Terminal
Style

Oil Pressure Shutdown Switch

Testing the Oil Pressure Switch

Step Action Results Comments

1 Connect a FLUKE The voltage with the engine

multimeter between the 20 not running should be 0. If
wire at the oil pressure there is voltage present the
shutdown switch and switch is defective.
chassis ground.

2 Start the engine and observe The battery voltage should

the meter reading. be present when the engine
is running. If the voltage is
low or is 0, proceed to
Step 3.

18 October 2001 F05A-1 P41KF05A

Service Procedure F05A

Step Action Results Comments

3 With the unit running, If the battery voltage is The oil pressure switch
disconnect the 20 wire from present on the wire, the should be installed
the switch. Measure the switch is defective and horizontally to minimize
voltage from the 20 wire to should be replaced. possible water penetration.
chassis ground. If the voltage on the 20 wire
is low or 0, there is a
problem in the 20 circuit or
the microprocessor. Test the
20 circuit using Service
Procedure H04A. Test the
microprocessor using
Service Procedure A01A.

Replacing the Oil Pressure Switch

Step Action Results Comments

1 Disconnect the 20 wire, Both single and double

remove the old switch and terminal switches may be
install the new switch in the used. The 20 wire can be
same position. Reconnect connected to either terminal
the 20 wire. on the double terminal
switch.

P41KF05A F05A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure F07A
F07A Coolant Level Sensor Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To test the coolant level sensor for proper operation. The sensor is a stainless steel probe immersed in the
coolant. It does not fail or wear out, but may fail to conduct if it is dirty.

Coolant Level Sensor

Testing the Coolant Level Switch

Step Action Results Comments

1 Ground the sensor to If the alarm clears, clean the CAUTION: Do not remove
chassis ground with a sensor. the radiator cap if the
jumper and attempt to clear engine is hot.
the alarm.

2 If the alarm fails to clear after

cleaning the sensor test the
harness CLS circuit using
Service Procedure H04A.
Also test the microprocessor
using Service Procedure
A01A.

18 October 2001 F07A-1 P41KF07A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure F08A
F08A Coolant Temperature Sensor Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To test the coolant temperature sensor for proper operation.

Coolant Temperature Sensor

Testing the Coolant Temperature Switch

NOTE: Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are
connected backwards, the display will show four dashes (----).

Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Disconnect the sensor at the

plug next to the sensor.

3 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch

and the microprocessor
power switches on.

4 Press the WATER TEMP key The display for the If all sensors show [----]
and then press the ENTER disconnected sensor should without being disconnected,
key to lock the display. show [----]. the microprocessor may be
defective or the sensor
polarity may be reversed.
Test the microprocessor
using Service Procedure
A01A and check the sensor
wiring for correct polarity.

5 Using a high quality digital The voltage must be from If the voltage is correct,
multimeter, check the 4.90 to 5.10 volts DC. disassemble and check the
voltage at the sensor plug on coolant sensor plug. If there
the plug half that is still are no broken wires or
connected to the pushed pins in the plug,
microprocessor. replace the sensor.

18 October 2001 F08A-1 P41KF08A

Service Procedure F08A

Step Action Results Comments

6 If the voltage measured in The voltage must be from If the voltage is correct at
Step 5 above is incorrect, 4.90 to 5.10 volts DC. Step 6 and incorrect at Step
recheck the voltage at the 5, the problem is in the
same circuit at pins 1 and 2 wiring. If the voltage is
of the 19 pin connector on incorrect in both Steps 5 and
the back of the 6, the problem is in the
microprocessor. microprocessor. Test it using
Service Procedure A01A.

P41KF08A F08A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure F09A
F09A RPM Sensor Test and Adjustment
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To test and adjust the RPM sensor. The sensor rarely fails but may require adjustment.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The display must be blank.

and the microprocessor
power switches off.

2 Remove the FS1 and FS2

wires from the sensor.

3 Check the sensor resistance The sensor resistance

using a high quality should be 250 to 300 ohms
multimeter. with the wires removed.

4 Start the unit and check the The voltage in low speed Set the meter to read AC
voltage across the sensor should read from 2.5 to 4.0 volts.
terminals. volts ac.
The voltage in high speed
should read from 4.5 to 6.0
volts ac.

5 If the voltage is off, loosen If the sensor does not show NOTE: For initial
the sensor lock nut. Turn the the proper voltage after adjustment, turn sensor in
sensor in slightly to increase adjustment it must be until it contacts the ring
voltage. replaced. gear on the flywheel, then
back it out ½ turn and
CAUTION: Be careful not
tighten the locknut.
to turn the sensor in so far
that it contacts the ring
gear.

6 Tighten locknut and recheck

voltage.

7 Reattach the FS1 and FS2 Polarity is not important.

wires to the sensor.

18 October 2001 F09A-1 P41KF09A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure F10A
F10A Checking and Adjusting Engine RPM
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Purpose
To check and adjust the engine RPM using the microprocessor display.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Start the engine and allow it

to warm up.

2 Using Service Test Mode, Adjust the setpoint so the For information on Service
place the unit in [C1] Cool unit runs in high speed. Test Mode consult Service
Mode Zone 1. Procedure A34A.

3 Press the SELECT key until

[RPM] is displayed and then
press ENTER to lock the
display.

4 Adjust the high speed High speed should be For specific instructions on
engine speed as required. adjusted as follows: adjusting engine RPM,
consult the unit Maintenance
US domestic and HC units
Manual.
2200 ± 25 RPM
SMX and HC units
1600 ± 25 RPM
SL and SMX HC units
2200 ± 25 RPM

5 Using Service Test Mode, The unit should run in low

place the unit in [DEF1] speed.
Defrost Zone 1.

6 Press the SELECT key until

[RPM] is displayed and then
press ENTER to lock the
display.

7 Adjust the setpoint to run the Low speed should be For specific instructions on
unit in low speed cool and adjusted as follows: adjusting engine RPM,
adjust the engine speed as consult the unit Maintenance
US domestic and HC units
required. Manual.
1450 ± 25 RPM
SMX and SL except HC
units
1200 ± 25 RPM
SL and SMX HC units
1450 ± 25 RPM

18 October 2001 F10A-1 P41KF10A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Service Procedure H01A
H01A Connector Repair Using Pigtail
Where Used
All Units Equipped with µP-IV Multi-Temp Microprocessors

Purpose
This procedure should be used to repair a broken pin in the wiring harness connectors.

Replacement Pins
Replacement pins with a short piece of wire crimped on them are available as follows:

Description Type Service Part Number

AMP rectangular connectors used on the relay board Female 44-9855
AMP round connectors used on the rear of the microprocessor Male 44-9699
DEUTSCH connectors used throughout the wiring harness Female 44-9700
DEUTSCH connectors used throughout the wiring harness Male 44-9701

Amp Rectangular Connectors

Step Action Results Comments

1 Carefully remove the AMP

connector.

2 Examine the male pins on

the relay board half of the
connector with a small
mirror. Be certain none of the
pins are bent.

3 Isolate the defective pin on

the harness connector.

4 Release the defective pin

and remove it from the
connector shell.

5 Insert the replacement pin

with short lead into the
connector from the back of
the shell.

6 Check to be sure the pin is

fully seated and locked in the
shell.

7 Proceed with splicing

harness wires on page 5 of
this Service Procedure.

18 October 2001 H01A-1 P41KH01A

Service Procedure H01A

Amp Round Connectors

Plunger

Shaft

Amp Pin
Body

Shaft

Step Action Results Comments

1 Identify the defective pin.

2 Obtain the required

replacement pin.

3 Grasp the AMP connector

tool by the body and place it
over the defective pin.

4 Seat the tool fully over the

pin by gently pressing and
twisting the tool.

5 When the tool is fully seated

over the pin, press the tool
plunger to remove the pin
from the connector shell.

6 Cut the wire leading to the

defective pin as close to the
pin as possible.

7 Insert the replacement pin

with short lead into the
connector from the back of
the shell.

8 Check to be sure the pin is

fully seated and locked in the
shell.

P41KH01A H01A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure H01A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Proceed with splicing

harness wires on page 5.

Deutsch Connectors

Deutsch Connector Tool

Insert Screwdriver
Insert Hook

Locking Tab

Wedge Hook

NOTE: Polarity must be considered when connecting temperature sensors. If the sensors are
connected backwards, the display will show (----). Consult the wiring diagram for the correct
connections.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Identify the defective pin and

determine if it is male or
female.

2 Obtain the required

replacement pin.

3 Using the Deutsch connector

tool, remove the orange
locking wedge from the front
of the connector shell.

4 Using the Deutsch connector

tool, a small pick or a
miniature screwdriver,
release the locking tab in the
shell of the connector and
remove the pin from the
back of the connector.

5 Cut the wire leading to the

defective pin as close to the
pin as possible.

18 October 2001 H01A-3 P41KH01A

Service Procedure H01A

Step Action Results Comments

6 Insert the replacement pin

with short lead into the
connector from the back of
the shell.

7 Check to be sure the pin is

fully seated and locked in the
shell.

8 Reinstall the orange locking

wedge from the front side of
the connector shell.

9 Proceed with splicing

harness wires on page 5 of
this Service Procedure.

P41KH01A H01A-4 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure H01A

Splicing Harness Wires

Figure 1: Cut and slide shrink tubing on wire.

Figure 2: Strip wire insulation back 1/2 inch.

Figure 3: Twist wires together as shown.

Figure 4: Apply solder to twisted wire.

Take care not to damage

shrink wrap with heat source.

Figure 5: Slide shrink tubing over soldered joint. Apply

heat near shrink tube. DO NOT place direct heat to
shrink tube as it will become damaged.

Step Action Results Comments

1 Insert the shrink tubing over See Figure 1.

the harness wire and
position it far enough away
from the joint that it does not
shrink prematurely when
soldering.

2 Carefully strip ½ inch of Trim wire lengths as required

insulation from the end of the to properly fit harness.
pin wire and the matching
See Figure 2.
harness wire.

18 October 2001 H01A-5 P41KH01A

Service Procedure H01A

Step Action Results Comments

3 Twist the ends of the wire See Figure 3.

together to create a
compact, mechanically
strong connection.

4 Using a small soldering iron, See Figure 4.

solder the connection using
rosin core solder.

5 Position the shrink tubing See Figure 5.

over the connection.

6 Shrink the tubing in place See Figure 5.

using the small soldering The connection may be
iron. additionally insulated with
electrical tape if desired.

7 Reinstall the connector on

the mating connector.

8 Carefully reposition the

harness and replace cable
ties as required.

P41KH01A H01A-6 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure H04A
H04A Checking Harness Continuity
Where Used
All Solid State Controller Applications

Purpose
To illustrate the required procedures for checking harness continuity on equipment utilizing solid state
devices.

Digital Multimeter

Caution Statements
Step Action Results Comments

1 Do not use battery and light Using such devices may

combinations to check present excessive voltage or
continuity. current to solid state
devices. In most cases the
device will be damaged or
destroyed.

2 Use a high quality digital Older analog (needle type

multimeter such as Service meter movement) meters
Part Number 204-615. and some inexpensive
"mechanic tool box" meters
present a large load to the
circuit being tested. This can
significantly alter the meter
reading, especially when
measuring small voltages or
currents.

18 October 2001 H04A-1 P41KH04A

Service Procedure H04A

Step Action Results Comments

3 Do not test a circuit to see if This will damage solid state

it is energized by tapping the components or blow a fuse
circuit wire to ground and or circuit.
watching for a spark.

4 Always wear a grounded Failure to use a grounded

wrist strap such as Service wrist strap and/or failure to
Part Number 204-622 when observe other ESD (Electro
working on exposed solid Static Discharge)
state circuits (such as procedures can result in
changing a software PROM). damage to solid state
components. This damage
may not be immediately
noticeable. See Service
Procedure A12A for
additional information on
ESD procedures.

Connect to Chassis
Ground or CH Terminal

Grounded Wrist Strap

P41KH04A H04A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Procedure H04A

General Procedures
Step Action Results Comments

1 Locate the suspect circuit

on the appropriate wiring
diagram.

2 Isolate both ends of the Harness connections are

circuit using the following determined by consulting the
methods as required. wiring diagrams.
• Disconnect the NOTE: Failure to isolate
appropriate connector at both ends may cause
the microprocessor. misleading results.
• Disconnect the device
connector at the device.
• Disconnect the
appropriate connector at
the relay board.
• Remove the wire from the
device terminal.

3 Using jumpers as required, The meter must show a very Be certain the ohmmeter
connect each end of the low resistance (less than 1.0 battery is good and the
circuit to a high quality ohm), indicating circuit meter zeros with the leads
multimeter. continuity. If not, the circuit is held together to prevent
open or has excessive misleading results.
resistance. Troubleshoot the
circuit to determine the
cause using the wiring
diagrams.

4 After determining that the The meter should indicate

circuit passes a continuity an open circuit. If not, the
test, remove one lead and circuit is shorted to ground.
connect it to chassis ground Troubleshoot the circuit to
to check for a short to determine the cause using
ground. the wiring diagrams.

18 October 2001 H04A-3 P41KH04A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Section 7
Service Information
A16A Software Features, Interchange and
Service Parts Numbers
A17A Microprocessor Features and
Interchange
Three (3) Wire Magnetic Door Switch
 Service Information A16A
A16A Software Features, Interchange
and Service Parts Numbers
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors with Revision 20xx Software

Purpose
To identify the features, interchange information and service part numbers for each software revision.

Important Information
• If the software PROM must be changed use Service Procedure A13A.
• To identify the software revision, use Service Procedure A06A.
• The software on a "used" microprocessor should always be determined using Service Procedure
A06A as the software may have been changed and therefore different from that shown on the label.

Software Interchange and Service Parts Numbers

Software Revision Features Interchange With Service Parts Number

2001 All US domestic None 40-560

applications - production
release

2101 TESCO only (EEC) - None 40-612

production release

2002 All US domestic Replaces 2000 40-611

applications - minor
changes

2102 TESCO only (EEC) - Replaces 2102 40-647

minor changes

2003 Defrost and other Replaces 2001 and None Assigned

enhancements 2002

2004 SL TCI & Elec Restarts, Replaces 2001, 2002 40-662

other enhancements and 2003

2010 DAS, 27 grade sensors, Replaces all above 40-704

Print from Select Key
menu

2011 Change delay on fan Replaces all above 40-729

current check for pretrip
so TLE fans are up to
speed

2012 Changed pretrip current Replaces all above 40-750

limits

18 October 2001 A16A-1 I41KA16A

Service Information A16A

Software Revision Features Interchange With Service Parts Number

2013 Additions for TLE Current as of 09/01 40-772

evaporators and other
enhancements

2020 Spectrum™ Multi-Temp Spectrum™ Multi-Temp 40-792

Units only. Features Units only.
include increased
capacity, faster pulldown
and recovery, tighter
temperature control and
reduced run time.

I41KA16A A16A-2 18 October 2001

 Service Information A17A
A17A Microprocessor Features and Interchange
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors

Important Information
• Do not use microprocessors without communications to replace microprocessors with
communications.
• Replacement Service Parts microprocessors are supplied without software. If replacement software is
required, consult Service Information A16A for interchange and Service Parts numbers.
• On international units, check the service part number to determine if the replacement microprocessor
must bear the CE Mark.
• Service part numbers are shown for both type front panels. See Section 4, Front Panel Versions for
details.

Engineering Features Where Used Interchange With Service Parts

Number Number

5D44260G01 Original front panel Domestic Units Domestic Units 45-1609

No software— All Multi-Temp µP-IV Can be replaced
microprocessor only applications without with
communications microprocessors
Without with
communications communications

5D44260G02 Original front panel Domestic Units Domestic Units 45-1610

No software— All Multi-Temp µP-IV Cannot be replaced
microprocessor only applications with with
communications microprocessors
With without
communications communications

5D49174G01 Original front panel CE Mark CE Mark 45-1784

No software— All Multi-Temp µP-IV Can be replaced
microprocessor only applications without with
communications microprocessors
Without with
communications communications

5D49174G02 Original front panel CE Mark CE Mark 45-1785

No software— All Multi-Temp µP-IV Cannot be replaced
microprocessor only applications with with
communications microprocessors
With without
communications communications

5D54782G01 Current production Domestic Units Domestic Units 45-1960

front panel All Multi-Temp µP-IV Can be replaced
No software— applications without with
microprocessor only communications microprocessors
with
Without communications
communications

18 October 2001 A17A-1 I41KA17A

Service Information A17A

Engineering Features Where Used Interchange With Service Parts

Number Number

5D54782G02 Current production Domestic Units Domestic Units 45-1961

front panel All Multi-Temp µP-IV Cannot be replaced
No software— applications with with
microprocessor only communications microprocessors
without
With communications
communications

5D54784G01 Current production CE Mark CE Mark 45-1962

front panel All Multi-Temp µP-IV Can be replaced
No software— applications without with
microprocessor only communications microprocessors
with
Without communications
communications

5D54784G02 Current production CE Mark CE Mark 45-1963

front panel All Multi-Temp µP-IV Cannot be replaced
applications with with
No software—
communications microprocessors
microprocessor only
without
With communications
communications

I41KA17A A17A-2 18 October 2001

 Three Wire Door Switch
Three (3) Wire Magnetic Door Switch
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Door Switch Applications

Purpose
The 3 wire magnetic door switch is required for all Multi-Temp µP-IV door switch applications. When
the zone door is open, air flow in that zone stops to reduce air exchange. Zones with closed doors
continue to operate normally. This information is used to install and connect the 3 wire door switch.

Door Switch
(Service Part
Number 41-1311)

Magnet
(Service Part
Number 44-8584)

This distance to be no more

than 3/4 inches

Operating Features
• Door switches on SR units are three wire design and are wired to the host unit.
• Each door switch will control the zone it is connected to (Zone 1, 2 or 3).
• When a zone door is closed the door switch white DS wire is at 0 volts. When a zone door is opened
the door switch supplies 12 volts to the controller on the white DS wire. The controller then forces
that zone into a null mode and stops air flow by either closing the damper door or turning off the
remote fans.
• If only one zone is running in CYCLE-SENTRY and that zone door is opened the unit will shut down.
The unit will restart if another zone requires operation or when the door is closed.
• If all zones are operating and all doors are open the unit will shut down. If any door is closed the unit
will start to maintain temp in that zone.

18 October 2001 Page-1

Three Wire Door Switch

• If a zone is tuned on and the door is left open continuously for 1 hour the unit will generate alarm code
108 (Door Open Time-Out) and restart normal zone operation.
NOTE: Once Alarm Code 108 (Door Open Time-Out) occurs the code can only be cleared after the
door is closed or the defective wiring or switch is repaired.
• If the unit is equipped with a Data Logger, the door switch input will log the time the door is opened
(Door Open) and the time the door is closed (Door Closed).

Verifying Door Switch Operation

1. Check for 12 volts between the red switch wire and black switch wire.
2. With the door closed there should be less than ½ volt between the white switch wire and black switch
wire.
3. With the door open there should be battery voltage between the white switch wire and black switch
wire.
NOTE: The switch can be bench tested by connecting +12 volts to the red switch wire and chassis
ground to the black switch wire. With the door magnet next to the switch there should be less than ½
volt between the white switch wire and black switch wire. Removing the magnet should cause battery
voltage to be present between the white switch wire and black switch wire.

Page-2 18 October 2001

Section 8
Refrigeration Service Information, Service
Procedures and Evaporator Diagrams
Service Information
R01A Multi-Temp SR Refrigeration
Principles and Components

Service Procedures
R01A Full System Evacuation, Charging
and Checking Refrigerant Charge
R02A Low Side Pumpdown Test
R03A Hot Gas Solenoid Test
R04A Liquid Line Solenoid and Liquid
Return Check Valve Test
R05A Suction Line Solenoid Test
R06A Suction Line Check Valves
and Condenser Inlet Check Valves
Tests
R07A Purge Valve Test
R08A Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver
Pressure Tank Solenoid and Purge
Check Valve Test
R09A Low Side Service Pumpdown
R10A Multi-Temperature Refrigerant
Recovery
R11A Low Side Evacuation

Evaporator Diagrams
TCI 3 Zone with Two (2) Single TLE
Evaporators
TCI 3 Zone with Parallel and Single TLE
Evaporators
 Refrigeration Service Information R01A
R01A Multi-Temp SR Refrigeration Principles and Components
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Microprocessors with Revision 20xx Software

Requirements of a Multi-Temperature System

Improved TC Systems: In an Improved TC system the host unit (Zone 1) must serve the coldest
compartment. All zones can cool at the same time. The host unit can cool while the remote zones are
heating, but the remotes cannot cool while the host unit is heating.
TCI (Invertable) Systems : If a zone is capable of reverse cycle operation it is said to be invertable.
Reverse cycle means that the evaporator coil in that zone is used as the condenser coil during heat
operation as long as at least one other zone is operating in cool mode. All TCI systems are capable
maintaining any temperature in any zone and can also heat or cool in any zone at any time. These systems
include conventional host units as well as dual evaporator (DE) systems.

Definitions of Multi-Temperature SR Unit Solenoids and Valves

Components Common to All Zones
These three components are located in the condenser section of the host unit and serve all zones. They are
controlled by zone requirements and are affected by the discharge pressure transducer.
Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS): This valve controls the flow of refrigerant to the condenser. This solenoid
is energized (closed) when any compartment is operating in heat or defrost mode. It will be de-energized
if the discharge pressure becomes excessive to prevent unit shutdown. This is a normally open valve.
Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid (RTPS): This valve is energized (open) during heat or defrost when
discharge pressure is low to be sure adequate refrigerant is available to heat or defrost the zone. The
receiver tank pressure solenoid is controlled in parallel with the purge valve. This valve is normally
closed.
Purge Valve (PV): The purge valve operates in parallel with the receiver tank pressure solenoid. This valve
is energized (open) during heat or defrost when discharge pressure is low to be sure adequate refrigerant
is available to heat or defrost the zone. This valve is also a normally closed valve.

Components Common to Individual Zones

The following valves are required for each zone. They are located in the evaporator section of each zone
and are controlled by zone requirements.
Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS): This valve is energized (open) any time cooling, heating or defrosting is
required in its zone. The valve is de-energized when the zone is in null to stop refrigerant flow in that
zone. This is normally closed valve.
Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS): This valve is energized (open) any time heating or defrosting is required in the
zone. This is also a normally closed valve.
Suction Line Solenoid (SLS): The suction line solenoid is only present in zones that are invertable. If
present, the suction line solenoid is energized (closed) when its compartment is operating in heat mode as
long as at least one other zone is operating in cool mode. This is a normally open valve.

18 October 2001 R01A-1 I66KR01A

Refrigeration Service Information R01A

Multi-Temp Refrigeration System Operation

All Zones Cooling

When all zones are cooling, the
host unit condenser is used to
eliminate the heat from all
zones. This is a Conventional
Cooling Cycle.

One Zone Cooling

One Zone Heating
When at least one zone is
cooling and another zone is
heating, the evaporator in the
heating zone is used as a
condenser to remove the heat
from the zone that is cooling. the
host unit condenser is not used.
This is Reverse Cycle operation.

All Zones Heating

When all zones are heating, the
host unit condenser is not used.
This is Hot Gas Heat operation.

Any Zone Defrosting

When any zone enters defrost,
zones that are cooling or heating
are placed in Delayed Cool/Heat
mode. The host unit condenser
is not used. Defrost is
accomplished by Hot Gas Heat.

I66KR01A R01A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Information R01A

Operation of Multi-Temperature SR Unit Solenoids and Valves

NOTE: Energized means that the microprocessor is supplying a ground path for the device.

Item ID Type Cool Heat Defrost Reverse

Cycle

Condenser Inlet Solenoid CIS NO Energized Energized Energized

(Note 1) (closed) (closed) (closed)

Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid RTPS NC Energized Energized Energized

(Note 1) (open) (open) (open)

Purge Valve PV NC Energized Energized Energized

(Note 1) (open) (open) (open)

Liquid Line Solenoid LLS NC Energized Energized Energized Energized

(open) (open) (open) (open)

Hot Gas Solenoid HGS NC Energized Energized Energized

(open) (open) (open)

Suction Line Solenoid SLS NO Energized

(closed)

Note 1 = Influenced by the Discharge Pressure Transducer

Summary
• When a zone is cooling the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open).
• When a zone is heating or defrosting the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open) and the Hot
Gas Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open).
• When a zone is in reverse cycle heat the Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) is energized (open), the Hot Gas
Solenoid (HGS) is energized (open) and the Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) is energized (closed).

18 October 2001 R01A-3 I66KR01A

Refrigeration Service Information R01A

Transducers and Switches

Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer: This transducer supplies the discharge pressure at the
compressor to the microprocessor. This information is used by the software to determine operating
conditions.
High Pressure Cutout Switch: This switch monitors the discharge pressure at the compressor. The switch
is closed with normal pressures and open with excessive pressures. The switch will open and close at
pressures determined by the refrigerant used in the unit. The high pressure cutout switch is located on the
compressor discharge manifold.
High Pressure Switch: This switch is a backup switch for the discharge pressure transducer. It confirms
operation of the receiver tank pressure solenoid and purge valve to control the amount of refrigerant
available for Heat and Defrost mode operation. This is a normally closed switch.

Transducer Pressure Control

Multi-Temperature µP-IV microprocessors monitor the discharge pressure of the compressor using the
discharge pressure transducer. This information is used to control unit operation as shown below.

High Speed Solenoid (All Zones Cool)

When all zones are in cool mode the microprocessor will enable the unit to run in high speed if required
until the discharge pressure exceeds 425 PSI. At that time the unit will be forced to low speed to prevent a
shutdown on high discharge pressure. This is a prevent shutdown for high ambient temperature
operations. When the discharge pressure drops below 375 PSI the microprocessor will enable the unit to
go back to high speed if required.

High Speed Solenoid - All Zones Cool

I66KR01A R01A-4 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Information R01A

Purge Valve and Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoids

When any zone is in heat or defrost mode the microprocessor will energize the purge valve and receiver
tank solenoid until the discharge pressure exceeds 300 PSI. At that time the unit will de-energize the
solenoids. This controls the amount of refrigerant that is available during heat or defrost operation. When
the discharge pressure drops below 225 PSI the microprocessor will again energize the purge valve and
receiver tank solenoid to add additional refrigerant to the system.

Purge Valve & Receiver Tank Solenoids

High Speed Solenoid (Any Zone Heating)

When any zone is in heat mode the microprocessor will enable the unit to run in high speed heat if
required until the discharge pressure exceeds 375 PSI. At that time the unit will be forced to low speed
heat to prevent a shutdown on high discharge pressure. When the discharge pressure drops below 300 PSI
the controller will enable the unit to go back to high speed heat if required.

High Speed Solenoid—Any Zone Heating

18 October 2001 R01A-5 I66KR01A

Refrigeration Service Information R01A

Invertable (Reverse Cycle Heat) Control - Non Spectrum Units

When one zone(s) is heating and another zone(s) is cooling the microprocessor will put the cooling
zone(s) in null mode and the heating zone(s) in hot gas heat until the discharge pressure exceeds 150 PSI.
At that time the unit will operate inverted or reverse cycle heat.
This allows the system to develop proper pressures to insure adequate performance when the heating
zones evaporator coil is acting as the condenser coil for the zone(s) that is cooling. When the discharge
pressure drops below 100 PSI the microprocessor will again put the cooling zone(s) in null and the
heating zone(s) in hot gas heat.

Invertable (Reverse Cycle Heat) Control

Invertable (Reverse Cycle Heat) Control - Spectrum Units

When one zone(s) is heating and another zone(s) is cooling the microprocessor will put the cooling
zone(s) in null mode and the heating zone(s) in hot gas heat until the discharge pressure exceeds 150 PSI.
At that time the unit will operate inverted or reverse cycle heat. To control capacity, Spectrum units also
consider setpoint and ambient temperature. If the zone requesting heat has a setpoint more than 20 F
lower than ambient temperature and low speed heat is required the Condenser Inlet Solenoid will remain
open during reverse cycle heat. This allows both the remote avaporator of the zone in heat and the unit
condenser to be utilized by the zone(s) that are cooling.
If the discharge pressure drops below 100 PSI the microprocessor will again put the cooling zone(s) in
null and the heating zone(s) in hot gas heat.

I66KR01A R01A-6
 Refrigeration Service Information R01A

Condenser Inlet Solenoid

When any zone is in heat or defrost mode the microprocessor will energize the condenser inlet solenoid
until the discharge pressure exceeds 400 PSI. At that time the condenser inlet solenoid is de-energized to
prevent a shutdown on high discharge pressure. This is a prevent shutdown for high discharge pressure
during heat or defrost operation. When the discharge pressure drops below 250 PSI the controller will
again energize the condenser inlet solenoid if required.

Condenser Inlet Solenoid

18 October 2001 R01A-7 I66KR01A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A
R01A Full System Evacuation, Charging
and Checking Refrigerant Charge
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To evacuate and charge a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Evacuating the System

Step Action Results Comments

1 Be sure all refrigerant has

been recovered from the
unit. Connect vacuum pump
and dual gauge manifold for
3 point evacuation from
suction service valve,
discharge service valve and
receiver tank outlet valve.

2 Verify proper operation of

the Evacuation Station as
shown in the Evacuation
Station Operation Manual
(TK 40612).

3 Connect the Evacuation

Station for 3 point
evacuation from the suction
service valve, discharge
service valve and receiver
tank outlet valve.

4 Connect a battery charger to The battery charger must be The microprocessor’s

the unit battery. capable of at least 15 Service Test Mode is used to
amperes output. This will open unit valves as required
maintain the charge level of for evacuation. Failure to
the battery during the time connect a battery charger
required to evacuate and may result in the battery
charge the unit. voltage falling too low to
reliably operate the
microprocessor and valves.

5 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch The backlight turns on and

and all other Zone switches the Standard Display
on. appears. Do NOT allow the
unit to start.

18 October 2001 R01A-1 P66KR01A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A

Step Action Results Comments

6 With the engine shut off, The display should show The engine must not be
enter Service Test Mode [TEST] and [VAC]. running or [VAC] will not
[TEST] using Service appear.
Procedure A34A shown in
the µP-IV Multi-Temp
Diagnostic Manual (TK
50033).

7 Press the ENTER key to load The display should show If the display shows [SET]
Evacuation Mode [VAC]. All [TEST] and [VAC]. and [VAC], a higher rate of
normally closed valves will battery charge is required.
be energized. Alarm Code 109 will be
generated. This is normal.

8 Start the evacuation pump

and mid-seat the suction
service valve, discharge
service valve and receiver
tank outlet valves.

9 Install service valve stem

caps with seals and tighten.
Valve stems should remain
capped while evacuating
unit.

10 Evacuate the unit to 500

microns.

11 Continue to evacuate for one

additional hour after
reaching 500 microns. This
insures complete evacuation
of the remote evaporators
and lines.

12 Close the Evacuation Station

valve nearest the vacuum
pump to isolate the pump
from the system. Turn the
pump off.

13 Observe the vacuum gauge. The system pressure should If the pressure does not hold
remain below 2000 microns check for leaks (if a leak is
for 5 minutes. suspected) or continue
evacuation (if system is not
dry).

14 Restart the pump, open the

Evacuation Station valve
nearest the pump and repeat
Steps 10, 12 and 13 as
required until the system
pressure remains below
2000 microns for 5 minutes.

P66KR01A R01A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A

Step Action Results Comments

15 When system pressure Do not exercise the service

remains below 2000 microns valves with the unit in a deep
for 5 minutes, restart the vacuum unless the
pump, open the Evacuation evacuation pump is
Station valve nearest the operating.
pump and back seat the
suction service valve while
the evacuation pump is still
operating. Replace the valve
cap, close the Evacuation
Station valve "D" (nearest
the pump) and stop the
evacuation pump.

R01A-3 P66KR01A
Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A

Charging the System

Step Action Results Comments

1 Ensure that all compartment Ceiling mounted bulkheads

bulkheads are open. should not be stored close to
the evaporator outlets as this
will restrict airflow.

2 Determine the correct This information is shown in

charge for the unit as the Maintenance Manual for
configured. the unit. Actual weight of
charge may vary somewhat
due to length of refrigerant
lines.

3 The unit should still be in

Evacuation Mode. Add as
much of the charge as
possible as liquid through
the discharge service valve
and receiver outlet valve.

4 Backseat and crack the

discharge service valve.

5 Backseat the receiver outlet

service valve.

6 Crack the suction service

valve.

7 Exit Evacuation Mode by

turning the unit off and back
on.

8 Turn all zones on and set all

zone setpoints for the lowest
possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode. Allow the unit to
start.

9 Cover the condenser as

required to maintain
discharge pressure from 325
PSIG to 400 PSIG and add
the remaining charge by
weight as liquid through the
Suction Service Valve.

P66KR01A R01A-4 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A

Step Action Results Comments

10 If necessary, continue to add

refrigerant until the ball in the
receiver tank sight glass is
floating but is no higher than
½ way up the glass. If the
system is overcharged,
remove refrigerant until the
ball in the receiver tank sight
glass is floating but is no
higher than ½ way up the
glass.

11 Continue to operate the unit

and monitor the sight glass
until all compartment
temperatures are at or below
0 F (-18 C).

12 If the receiver tank sight

glass level drops add
additional refrigerant as
required to maintain
refrigerant in the bottom ½ of
the sight glass.

13 When refrigerant level is

correct back seat all service
valves, remove gauges and
securely replace valve stem
covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

18 October 2001 R01A-5 P66KR01A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R01A

Checking the Refrigerant Charge

Step Action Results Comments

1 Make sure all compartment Ceiling mounted bulkheads

bulkheads are open. should not be stored close to
the evaporator outlets as this
will restrict airflow.

2 Turn all zones on and set all

zone setpoints for the lowest
possible temperature to
insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode. Allow the unit to
start.

3 Cover the condenser as

required to maintain
discharge pressure from
325 psig to 400 psig.
4 If necessary, add refrigerant
until the ball in the receiver
tank sight glass is floating
but is no higher than ½ way
up the glass. If the system is
overcharged, remove
refrigerant until the ball in the
receiver tank sight glass is
floating but is no higher than
½ way up the glass.

5 Continue to operate the unit

and monitor the sight glass
until all compartment
temperatures are at or below
0 F (-18 C).
6 If the receiver tank sight
glass level drops add
additional refrigerant as
required to maintain
refrigerant in the bottom ½ of
the sight glass.

7 When refrigerant level is

correct back seat all service
valves, remove gauges and
securely replace valve stem
covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure, return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR01A R01A-6 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R02A
R02A Low Side Pumpdown Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To perform a low side pumpdown on a Multi-Temp refrigeration system to test internal seals.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Low Side Pumpdown

Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in Failure to operate unit to

Cool Mode for 10 minutes. normal temperature and
Discharge pressure should pressure may yield
be greater than 325 psig with unreliable results.
R-502/R-404a.

4 Frontseat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to 20 -
25 inch vacuum.

5 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, Purge
2 minutes. Solenoid and the
compressor valve plates.

6 If low side pressure holds

proceed with desired test.

18 October 2001 R02A-1 P66KR02A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Refrigeration Service Procedure R03A
R03A Hot Gas Solenoid Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To test the hot gas solenoid on a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes.
Discharge pressure should
be greater than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.

4 Front seat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to
20 - 25 inch vacuum.

5 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low hold, check: hot gas
side should not rise above a solenoids in all zones, purge
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoid and the compressor
2 minutes. If low side valve plates.
pressure holds, proceed with
desired test.

6 Enter Relay Board Test

Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

7 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 11] and [HGS2]
hot gas solenoid Zone 2.

18 October 2001 R03A-1 P66KR03A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R03A

Step Action Results Comments

8 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should

key for 1/2 second. rise slightly. If low side
pressure does not rise,
check the hot gas solenoid
for Zone 2. If the low side
pressure rises, proceed with
test.

9 If the unit is equipped with If the third zone is not

three zones press the Up present, proceed with step
arrow key to choose [rbt 14] 11.
and [HGS3] Hot Gas
Solenoid Zone 3.

10 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should

key for 1/2 second. rise slightly. If low side
pressure does not rise,
check the hot gas solenoid
for Zone 3. If the low side
pressure rises, proceed with
test.

11 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 20] and [HGS1]
hot gas solenoid Zone 1.

12 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should

key for 1/2 second. rise slightly. If low side
pressure does not rise,
check the hot gas solenoid
for Zone 1. If the low side
pressure rises, proceed with
test.

13 Exit the Relay Board Test by

turning the Zone 1/Host
switch off.

14 If no further testing is
required remove gauges,
backseat all service valves
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR03A R03A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R04A
R04A Liquid Line Solenoid and Liquid Return Check Valve Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To test the Liquid Line Solenoid on a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes.
Discharge pressure should
be greater than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.

4 Frontseat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to 20 -
25 inch vacuum.

5 Shut the unit down and If the low side pressure does
observe gauges. The low not hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, purge
2 minutes. If the low side solenoid and the compressor
pressure holds proceed with valve plates.
desired test.

6 Open receiver tank outlet The low side should not rise. Leaking liquid return check
valve and observe gauges. If If low side pressure does not valves will cause cooling
the low side pressure holds hold check: liquid line problems. Leaking liquid line
proceed with test. solenoids & liquid return solenoids may allow cooling
check valves in all zones. during null operation.

7 Enter Relay Board Test

Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

8 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 09] and [LLS2]
Liquid Line Solenoid Zone 2.

18 October 2001 R04A-1 P66KR04A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R04A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should

key for no more than 1/2 rise slightly. If low side
second. pressure does not rise check
the liquid line solenoid for
Zone 2. If the low side
pressure rises proceed with
test.

10 If the unit is equipped with If the third zone is not

three zones press the UP present proceed with step
ARROW key to choose [rbt 12.
15] and [LLS3] liquid line
solenoid zone 3. If the third
zone is not present proceed
with step 12.

11 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should

key for no more than 1/2 rise slightly. If low side
second. pressure does not rise check
the liquid line solenoid for
Zone 3. If the low side
pressure rises proceed with
test.

12 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 21] and [LLS1]
liquid line solenoid Zone 1.

13 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should

key for 1/2 second. rise slightly. If low side
pressure does not rise check
the liquid line solenoid for
Zone 1. If the low side
pressure rises proceed with
test.

14 Exit the Relay Board Test by

turning the ZONE 1/HOST
switch off.

15 If no further testing is
required remove gauges,
backseat all service valves
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR04A R04A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R05A
R05A Suction Line Solenoid Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To test the suction line solenoid on a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes or
until stable. Discharge
pressure should be greater
than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.

4 Front seat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to
20 - 25 inch vacuum.

5 Shut the unit down and If the low side pressure does
observe gauges. The low not hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, purge
2 minutes. If the low side solenoid and the compressor
pressure holds proceed with valve plates.
desired test.

6 Open receiver tank outlet The low side should not rise.
valve and observe gauges. If If low side pressure does not
low side pressure holds hold check: liquid line
proceed with desired test. solenoids and liquid return
check valves in all zones.

7 Enter Relay Board Test

Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

18 October 2001 R05A-1 P66KR05A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R05A

Step Action Results Comments

8 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 10] and [SLS2]
suction line solenoid Zone 2.

9 Press and hold the ENTER The display will briefly show
key for 5 seconds. [LOCK]. This indicates that
the Zone 2 suction line
solenoid has been locked
energized (closed).

10 Press and hold the T-K and

CLEAR keys until the display
shows [SPt 10] and [LLS2]
Zone 2 liquid line solenoid.

11 Momentarily press the ENTER Refrigerant will enter the

key for no more than 2-3 Zone 2 evaporator coil
seconds to open the Zone 2 against the Zone 2 suction
liquid line solenoid. line solenoid.

12 If the low side pressure rises This indicates that the Zone
check the Zone 2 suction 2 suction line solenoid did
line solenoid. not close or is leaking.

13 If the low side pressure does This indicates that the Zone
not rise proceed with test. 2 suction line solenoid is
closed and not leaking.

14 Monitor the low side The low side pressure The Zone 2 suction line
pressure and press the UP should increase when the solenoid is de-energized
ARROW key to choose [rbt Up Arrow key is pressed. (open) when the UP ARROW
13] and [SLS3] suction line This indicates that the Zone key is pressed, allowing
solenoid Zone 3. 2 suction line solenoid is refrigerant in the Zone 2
open. evaporator coil to escape to
the low side.

15 If low side pressure does not This indicates that the Zone
rise check the Zone 2 2 suction line solenoid or
suction line solenoid. Zone 2 liquid line solenoid
did not open.

16 If low side pressure rises It may be necessary to pump

proceed with test. down the system again if the
low side pressure rises
above 50 psig.

17 Press and hold the ENTER The display will briefly show
key for 5 seconds. [LOCK]. This indicates that
the Zone 3 suction line
solenoid has been locked
energized (closed).

18 Press and hold the T-K and

CLEAR keys until the display
shows [SPt 13] and [LLS3]
Zone 3 liquid line solenoid.

P66KR05A R05A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R05A

Step Action Results Comments

19 Momentarily press the ENTER Refrigerant will enter the

key for 2-3 seconds to open Zone 3 evaporator coil
the Zone 3 liquid line against the Zone 3 suction
solenoid. line solenoid.

20 If the low side pressure rises This indicates that the Zone
check the Zone 3 suction 3 suction line solenoid did
line solenoid. not close or is leaking.

21 If the low side pressure does This indicates that the Zone
not rise proceed with test. 3 suction line solenoid is
closed and not leaking.

22 Monitor the low side The low side pressure The Zone 3 suction line
pressure and press the UP should increase when the UP solenoid is de-energized
ARROW key to choose [rbt ARROW key is pressed. This (open) when the UP ARROW
19] and [SLS1] suction line indicates that the Zone 3 key is pressed, allowing
solenoid Zone 1. suction line solenoid is open. refrigerant in the Zone 3
evaporator coil to escape to
the low side.

23 If low side pressure does not This indicates that the Zone
rise check the Zone 3 3 suction line solenoid or
suction line solenoid. Zone 3 liquid line solenoid
did not open.

24 If low side pressure rises It may be necessary to pump

proceed with test. down the system again if the
low side pressure rises
above 50 psig.

25 Press and hold the ENTER The display will briefly show
key for 5 seconds. [LOCK]. This indicates that
the Zone 1 suction line
solenoid has been locked
energized (closed).

26 Press and hold the T-K and

CLEAR keys until the display
shows [SPt 19] and [LLS1]
Zone 1 liquid line solenoid.

27 Momentarily press the ENTER Refrigerant will enter the

key for at least 2-3 seconds Zone 1 evaporator coil
to open the Zone 1 Liquid against the Zone 1 suction
Line Solenoid. line solenoid.

18 October 2001 R05A-3 P66KR05A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R05A

Step Action Results Comments

28 Non Spectrum Units: If the Non Spectrum Units: This NOTE: It may be
low side pressure rises indicates that the Zone 1 necessary to pump down
check the Zone 1 suction suction line solenoid did not the system again if the low
line solenoid. close or is leaking. side pressure rises above
50 psig.
Spectrum Units: The low Spectrum Units: A slow
side pressure will rise rise is normal due to the
slightly due to the bleed bleed orifice in the suction
orifice in the Zone 1 suction line solenoid. A rapid rise
line solenoid. indicates that the Zone 1
suction line solenoid did not
close or is leaking.

29 If the low side pressure does This indicates that the Zone
not rise (Non Spectrum 1 suction line solenoid is
Units) or rises very slowly closed and not leaking.
(Spectrum Units) proceed Spectrum Units will rise
with test. slowly due to the bleed
orifice in the Zone 1 suction
line solenoid.

30 Monitor the low side The low side pressure The Zone 1 suction line
pressure and exit Relay should rise rapidly when the solenoid is de-energized
Board Test Mode by turning ZONE 1/HOST switch is turned (open) when the ZONE
the ZONE 1/HOST switch off. off. This indicates that the 1/HOST switch is turned off,
Zone 1 suction line solenoid allowing refrigerant in the
has opened. Zone 1 evaporator coil to
escape to the low side.

31 If low side pressure does not This indicates that the Zone
rise rapidly check the Zone 1 1 suction line solenoid or
suction line solenoid. Zone 1 liquid line solenoid
did not open.

32 If no further testing is
required remove gauges,
backseat all service valves
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR05A R05A-4 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R06A
R06A Suction Line Check Valves
and Condenser Inlet Check Valves Tests
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To test the Suction Line Check Valves and Condenser Inlet Check Valves on a Multi-Temp refrigeration
system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes or
until stable. Discharge
pressure should be greater
than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.

4 Front seat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to
20 - 25 inch vacuum.

5 Shut the unit down and If the low side pressure does
observe gauges. The low not hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, purge
2 minutes. If the low side solenoid and the compressor
pressure holds proceed with valve plates.
desired test.

6 Front seat the bypass

service valve on the receiver
tank.

7 Bleed through the gauge

manifold to the low side and
establish a pressure of 5 - 20
psig. Close the hand valves
on the gauge set.

18 October 2001 R06A-1 P66KR06A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R06A

Step Action Results Comments

8 Observe the low pressure If the pressure drops within

gauge. 2 minutes check the suction
line check valves for leaks
under low pressure.

9 If the low side pressure

holds for 2 minutes proceed
with test.

10 Equalize the system through

the gauge manifold to the
low side. Close the hand
valves on the gauge set.

11 Observe the low pressure If pressure drops within

gauge, 2 minutes check the suction
line check valves for leaks
and under high pressure.

Observe the high pressure If pressure increases within

gauge. 2 minutes the condenser
inlet check valve is leaking
or the bypass service valve
on receiver tank is open or
leaking.

12 If the pressure holds for

2 minutes proceed with test.

13 Enter Relay Board Test

Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

14 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 11] and [HGS2]
Zone 2 hot gas solenoid.

15 Momentarily press the ENTER If the high side pressure

key for 1/2 second. The high does not fall check the Zone
side gauge should fall 2 suction line check valve.
slightly. If the high side
pressure falls proceed with
test.

16 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 14] and [HGS3]
Zone 3 hot gas solenoid.

17 Momentarily press the ENTER If the high side pressure

key for 1/2 second. The high does not fall check the Zone
side gauge should fall 3 suction line check valve.
slightly. If the high side
pressure falls proceed with
test.

P66KR06A R06A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R06A

Step Action Results Comments

18 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 20] and [HGS1]
Zone 1 hot gas solenoid.

19 Momentarily press the ENTER If the high side pressure

key for 1/2 second. The high does not fall check the Zone
side gauge should fall 1 suction line check valve.
slightly. If the high side
pressure falls proceed with
test.

20 Exit the Relay Board Test by

turning the ZONE 1/HOST
switch off.

21 If no further testing is
required remove gauges,
backseat all service valves
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

18 October 2001 R06A-3 P66KR06A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Refrigeration Service Procedure R07A
R07A Purge Valve Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To test the purge valve on a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes or
until stable. Discharge
pressure should be greater
than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.

4 Front seat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to
20 - 25 inch vacuum.

5 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, purge
2 minutes. If low side solenoid and the compressor
pressure holds proceed with valve plates.
desired test.

6 Enter Relay Board Test

Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

7 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 17] and [PV]
purge valve.

8 Momentarily press the ENTER If the low side pressure does

key for 1/2 second. The low not rise check the purge
side gauge should rise valve.
slightly.

18 October 2001 R07A-1 P66KR07A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R07A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Exit the Relay Board Test by

turning the ZONE 1/HOST
switch off.

10 If no further testing is
required remove gauges,
backseat all service valves
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR07A R07A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R08A
R08A Condenser Inlet Solenoid, Receiver Pressure Tank Solenoid
and Purge Check Valve Test
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To test the condenser inlet solenoid, receiver pressure tank solenoid and purge check valve on a
Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
• This test will require the removal of some refrigerant using a recovery machine.
• When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal
operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service
Procedure.

Initial Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Attach a recovery machine

to the receiver outlet service
valve port using a manifold
gauge set to allow
monitoring receiver tank
pressure.

3 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

4 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes or
until stable. Discharge
pressure should be greater
than 325 psig with
R-502/R-404a.

5 Front seat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to
20 - 25 inch vacuum.

6 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, purge
2 minutes. If low side solenoid and the compressor
pressure holds proceed with valve plates.
desired test.

18 October 2001 R08A-1 P66KR08A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R08A

Condenser Inlet Solenoid Test

Step Action Results Comments

1 Front seat the bypass

service valve on receiver
tank.

2 Enter Relay Board Test

Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

3 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 18] and [CIS]
condenser inlet solenoid.

4 Press and hold the ENTER The display will briefly show The condenser inlet solenoid
key for 5 seconds. [LOCK]. This indicates that will remain energized for a
the condenser inlet solenoid maximum 15 minute timeout
has been locked energized - if the test time is expected
(closed). to exceed 15 minutes this
step must be repeated about
every ten minutes to prevent
timeout.

5 Start the recovery machine If high side pressure does

to remove refrigerant from not hold check the
the condenser and receiver condenser inlet solenoid.
tank and observe the high
side gauge. The pressure
should not change.

6 If the high side pressure

holds proceed with the test.

P66KR08A R08A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R08A

Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid Test

Step Action Results Comments

1 Backseat the bypass service If the high side pressure

valve on the receiver tank does not hold check the
and observe the high side receiver tank pressure
gauge. The pressure should solenoid.
not change.

2 If the high side pressure

holds proceed with the test.

3 Use a jumper wire to jump If the high side pressure

the RTPS wire at the does not fall check the
receiver tank pressure receiver tank pressure
solenoid to ground for at solenoid.
least 1/2 second and
observe the high side gauge.
The pressure should fall.

4 If the high side pressure falls

proceed with the test.

5 Press the UP ARROW key to If the high side pressure

de-energize the condenser does not fall check the
inlet solenoid and observe condenser inlet solenoid.
high side gauge. The
pressure should fall.

6 If the high side pressure falls

proceed with the test.

Purge Check Valve Test

Step Action Results Comments

1 Press UP ARROW key to

again choose [rbt 18] and
[CIS] condenser inlet
solenoid.

2 Press and hold the ENTER The display will briefly show The condenser inlet solenoid
key for 5 seconds. [LOCK]. This indicates that will remain energized for a
the condenser inlet solenoid maximum 15 minute timeout
has been locked energized - if the test time is expected
(closed). to exceed 15 minutes this
step must be repeated about
every ten minutes to prevent
timeout.

3 Pressurize the low side of If the receiver tank pressure

the system using the changes check the purge
refrigerant recovered earlier check valve.
and observe the receiver
tank pressure gauge. The
pressure should not change.

18 October 2001 R08A-3 P66KR08A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R08A

Step Action Results Comments

4 Exit the Relay Board Test by

turning the ZONE 1/HOST
switch off.

5 If no further testing is
required remove gauges,
backseat all service valves
and securely replace valve
stem covers with seals and
service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR08A R08A-4 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R09A
R09A Low Side Service Pumpdown
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To perform a service pumpdown on a Multi-Temp refrigeration system to allow service of all low side
components, compressor, discharge manifold, discharge vibrasorber, receiver tank pressure solenoid,
condenser inlet solenoid and purge check valve.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Low Side Pumpdown

Step Action Results Comments

1 Attach gauge set.

2 Set all zone setpoints for the

lowest possible temperature
to insure that all zones run in
Cool Mode.

3 Start and run all zones in

Cool Mode for 10 minutes or
until stable.

4 Front seat the receiver tank

outlet valve and perform a
low side pumpdown to
20 - 25 inch vacuum.

5 Front seat the receiver tank

bypass service valve.

6 Shut the unit down and If low side pressure does not
observe gauges. The low hold check: receiver tank
side should not rise above a outlet valve, hot gas
15 inch vacuum in less than solenoids in all zones, purge
2 minutes. solenoid and the compressor
valve plates.

7 If low side pressure holds

enter Relay Board Test
Mode using Service
Procedure A44A.

8 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 11] and [HGS2]
hot gas solenoid Zone 2.

18 October 2001 R09A-1 P66KR09A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R09A

Step Action Results Comments

9 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should This increases the pressure
key for no more than ½ rise slightly. If low side in Zone 2 evaporator and
second. pressure does not rise press checks the opening of the
the ENTER key again for no Zone 2 hot gas solenoid. If
more than ½ second. pressure does not rise check
the Zone 2 hot gas solenoid.

10 If the unit is equipped with If the third zone is not

three zones press the UP present proceed with
ARROW key to choose [rbt step 12.
14] and [HGS3] hot gas
solenoid Zone 3. If the third
zone is not present proceed
with step 12.

11 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should This increases the pressure
key for no more than ½ rise slightly. If low side in Zone 3 evaporator and
second. pressure does not rise press checks the opening of the
the ENTER key again for no Zone 3 hot gas solenoid. If
more than ½ second. pressure does not rise check
the Zone 3 hot gas solenoid.

12 Press the UP ARROW key to

choose [rbt 20] and [HGS1]
hot gas solenoid Zone 1.

13 Momentarily press the ENTER The low side gauge should This increases the pressure
key for no more than ½ rise slightly. If low side in Zone 3 evaporator and
second. pressure does not rise press checks the opening of the
the ENTER key again for no Zone 3 hot gas solenoid. If
more than ½ second. pressure does not rise check
Continue to press the ENTER the Zone 3 hot gas solenoid.
key for no more than
½ second at a time until the
low side pressure is slightly
above 0 psig.

14 Exit the Relay Board Test by

turning the ZONE 1/HOST
switch off.

15 Before opening the system

for service repeat steps 7
through 13 to ensure that all
pressures are balanced.

16 If all zones are slightly If the low side pressure can

greater than 0 psig, work can not be maintained below
proceed on low side 15 psig, the refrigerant must
components, compressor, be recovered as shown in
discharge manifold, Refrigeration Service
discharge vibrasorber, Procedure R10A before
receiver tank pressure opening the system.
solenoid, condenser inlet
solenoid and purge check
valve.

P66KR09A R09A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R09A

Step Action Results Comments

17 When service is complete

perform a low side
evacuation per Refrigeration
Service Procedure R11A,
backseat all service valves,
remove gauges and securely
replace valve stem covers
with seals and service port
caps before returning unit to
service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

18 October 2001 R09A-3 P66KR09A

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY BLANK
 Refrigeration Service Procedure R10A
R10A Multi-Temperature Refrigerant Recovery
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To recover the refrigerant charge from a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Recovering Refrigerant from a Unit with an Operating Compressor

Step Action Results Comments

1 Connect recovery machine

for recovery from discharge
service valve and receiver
tank outlet valve.

2 If the compressor is
operable, perform a low side
pumpdown per Refrigeration
Service Procedure R02A.

3 Recover the liquid refrigerant

from the receiver tank.

4 Midseat the suction service

valve, discharge service
valve and receiver tank
outlet valve.

5 Connect the unit battery and This will maintain the charge The Service Test Mode is
install battery charger on level of the battery during the used to open valves as
battery. The battery charger time required to evacuate required for evacuation.
must be capable of at least and charge the unit. Failure to connect a battery
15 amperes output. charger may result in the
battery voltage falling too
low to reliably operate the
microprocessor.

6 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the Do NOT start the unit. If the
and all other zone switches Standard Display appears. unit is running turn the
on. Zone 1/Host switch off to
stop the engine.

7 With the engine shut off, The display should show The engine must not be
enter Service Test Mode [TEST] and [VAC]. running or [VAC] will not
using Service Procedure appear.
A34A.

18 October 2001 R10A-1 P66KR10A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R10A

Step Action Results Comments

8 Press ENTER to load The display should show Alarm Code 109 will be
Evacuation Mode [VAC]. [TEST] and [VAC]. All generated. This is normal.
normally closed valves will
be energized. If the display
shows [SET] and [VAC], a
higher rate of battery charge
is required.

9 Continue to recover the

refrigerant as a vapor from
all three points.

Recovering Refrigerant from a Unit with an Inoperative Compressor

Step Action Results Comments

1 Connect recovery machine

for recovery from suction
service valve and discharge
service valve.

2 Midseat the suction service

valve and discharge service
valve.

3 Connect the unit battery and This will maintain the charge The Service Test Mode is
install battery charger on level of the battery during the used to open valves as
battery. The battery charger time required to evacuate required for evacuation.
must be capable of at least and charge the unit. Failure to connect a battery
15 amperes output. charger may result in the
battery voltage falling too
low to reliably operate the
microprocessor.

4 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the Do NOT start the unit. If the
and all other Zone switches Standard Display appears. unit is running turn the ZONE
on. 1/HOST switch off to stop the
engine.

5 With the engine shut off, The display should show The engine must not be
enter Service Test Mode [TEST] and [VAC]. running or [VAC] will not
using Service Procedure appear.
A34A.

6 Press ENTER to load The display should show Alarm Code 109 will be
Evacuation Mode [VAC]. [TEST] and [VAC]. All generated. This is normal.
normally closed valves will
be energized. If the display
shows [SET] and [VAC], a
higher rate of battery charge
is required.

7 Continue to recover the

refrigerant as a vapor from
all three points.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

P66KR10A R10A-2 18 October 2001

 Refrigeration Service Procedure R11A
R11A Low Side Evacuation
Where Used
All Multi-Temp µP-IV Units

Purpose
To evacuate the low side of a Multi-Temp refrigeration system.

Important Information
When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the normal operating
positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration Service Procedure.

Steps
Step Action Results Comments

1 After low side service is

complete, connect
evacuation pump to gauge
set.

2 Install valve stem covers

with seals and tighten—
valve stems should remain
capped while evacuating
unit.

3 Connect the unit battery and This will maintain the charge The microprocessor's
install battery charger on level of the battery during the Service Test Mode is used to
battery. The battery charger time required to evacuate open valves as required for
must be capable of at least and charge the unit. evacuation. Failure to
15 amperes output. connect a battery charger
may result in the battery
voltage falling too low to
reliably operate the
microprocessor.

4 Turn the ZONE 1/HOST switch Backlight turns on and the Do NOT start the unit. If the
and all other zone switches Standard Display appears. unit is running turn the ZONE
on. 1/HOST switch off to stop the
engine.

5 With the engine shut off, The display should show The engine must not be
enter Service Test Mode [TEST] and [VAC]. running or [VAC] will not
using Service Procedure appear.
A34A.

6 Press and hold both the T-K The display will show [TEST]
and CLEAR keys for 5 or and [LSVC].
more seconds.

18 October 2001 R11A-1 P66KR11A

Refrigeration Service Procedure R11A

Step Action Results Comments

7 While [TEST] and [LSVC] is The display should show Alarm Code 109 may be
shown in the display, press [TEST] and [LSVC]. All liquid generated. This is normal.
the ENTER key. This will enter line solenoids will be
the Low Side Evacuation energized. If the display
Mode. shows [SET] and [LSVC], a
higher rate of battery charge
is required.

8 Start the evacuation pump

and evacuate the unit to 500
microns.

9 Release refrigerant from

receiver tank.

10 Check refrigerant charge

and unit operation.

11 If no further testing is
required, backseat all
service valves, remove
gauges and securely replace
valve stem covers with seals
and service port caps before
returning unit to service.

NOTE: When finished with this Refrigeration Service Procedure return all service valves to the
normal operating positions before releasing the unit for service or performing another Refrigeration
Service Procedure.

P66KR11A R11A-2 18 October 2001

TCI 3 Zone with Two (2) Single TLE Evaporators

Front Unit Components Rear Unit Components

1 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) 1R Rear Liquid Line Solenoid (RLLS)
2 Liquid Return Check Valve 2R Rear Liquid Return Check Valve
3 Suction Line Check Valve 3R Rear Suction Line Check Valve
4 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) 4R Rear Suction Line Solenoid (RSLS)
5 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS) 5R Rear Hot Gas Solenoid (RHGS)
6 Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)
7 Condenser Inlet Check Valve
8 Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid
9 Condenser Check Valve
10 Bypass Hand Valve
11 Purge Valve (PV)
12 Purge Check Valve

Curbside or Center Unit Components

1C Curbside Liquid Line Solenoid (CLLS)
2C Curbside Liquid Return Check Valve
3C Curbside Suction Line Check Valve
4C Curbside Suction Line Solenoid (CSLS)
5C Curbside Hot Gas Solenoid (CHGS)
TCI 3 Zone with Parallel and Single TLE Evaporators
TCI 3 Zone with Parallel and Single TLE Evaporators (continued)

Zone 1 Unit Components Zone 3 Unit Components

1 Liquid Line Solenoid (LLS) 1R Rear Liquid Line Solenoid (RLLS)
2 Liquid Return Check Valve 2R Rear Liquid Return Check Valve
3 Suction Line Check Valve 3R Rear Suction Line Check Valve
4 Suction Line Solenoid (SLS) 4R Rear Suction Line Solenoid (RSLS)
5 Hot Gas Solenoid (HGS) 5R Rear Hot Gas Solenoid (RHGS)
6 Condenser Inlet Solenoid (CIS)
7 Condenser Inlet Check Valve Note:
8 Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid Unit A Components in Engine
9 Condenser Check Valve Side Evaporator
10 Bypass Hand Valve
11 Purge Valve (PV) Unit B Components in Compressor
12 Purge Check Valve Side Evaporator

Zone 2 Unit A Components

1A Liquid Line Solenoid (ALLS)
2A Liquid Return Check Valve
3A Suction Line Check Valve
4A Suction Line Solenoid (ASLS)
5A Hot Gas Solenoid (AHGS)

Zone 2 Unit B Components

1B Liquid Line Solenoid (BLLS)
2B Liquid Return Check Valve
3B Suction Line Check Valve
4B Suction Line Solenoid (BSLS)
5B Hot Gas Solenoid (BHGS)
Section 9
Drawings, Schematics and Wiring Diagrams
For Use in NAD
Relay Board Interface SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE
5D42980 Rev L Drawing Evaporators
5D53386 Rev C Schematic Diagram
SB-III DE 5D54597 Rev A Wiring Diagram
5D44346 Rev G Schematic Diagram
5D44280 Rev M Wiring Diagram SB-III DE Whisper
5D54968 Rev A Schematic Diagram
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI 5D54664 Rev B Wiring Diagram
5D46544 Rev H Schematic Diagram
5D46620 Rev J Wiring Diagram SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54972 Rev A Schematic Diagram
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50 5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram
5D47582 Rev F Schematic Diagram
5D47592 Rev H Wiring Diagram Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55924 Rev A Schematic Diagram
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Parallel 5D55923 Rev A Wiring Diagram
Evaporators
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D45891 Rev D Schematic Diagram
5D45950 Rev F Wiring Diagram 5D56152 Rev A Schematic Diagram
5D56153 Rev A Wiring Diagram
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS
and TLE Evaporators Spectrum 6/3
5D54970 Rev A Schematic Diagram 5D55926 Rev A Schematic Diagram
5D54668 Rev A Wiring Diagram 5D55925 Rev A Wiring Diagram
Relay Board Interface
5D42980 Rev L Drawing - Sheet 4 only

9-1
SB-III DE
5D44346 Rev G Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9-2
SB-III DE
5D44346 Rev G Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9-3
SB-III DE
5D44280 Rev M Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 4

9-4
SB-III DE
5D44280 Rev M Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 4

9-5
SB-III DE
5D44280 Rev M Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 4

9-6
SB-III DE
5D44280 Rev M Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 4

9-7
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI
5D46544 Rev H Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9-8
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI
5D46544 Rev H Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9-9
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI
5D46620 Rev J Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 4

9 - 10
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI
5D46620 Rev J Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 4

9 - 11
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI
5D46620 Rev J Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 4

9 - 12
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI
5D46620 Rev J Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 4

9 - 13
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47582 Rev F Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 14
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47582 Rev F Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 15
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47592 Rev H Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 5

9 - 16
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47592 Rev H Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 5

9 - 17
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47592 Rev H Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 5

9 - 18
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47592 Rev H Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 5

9 - 19
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Model 50
5D47592 Rev H Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 5

9 - 20
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Parallel Evaporators
5D45891 Rev D Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 21
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Parallel Evaporators
5D45891 Rev D Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 22
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Parallel Evaporators
5D45950 Rev F Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 3

9 - 23
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Parallel Evaporators
5D45950 Rev F Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 3

9 - 24
SB-III and Super-II TC/TCI Parallel Evaporators
5D45950 Rev F Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 3

9 - 25
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54970 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 26
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54970 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 27
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54668 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 5

9 - 28
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54668 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 5

9 - 29
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54668 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 5

9 - 30
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54668 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 5

9 - 31
SB-III and Super-II TC-3 Whisper with DAS and TLE Evaporators
5D54668 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 5

9 - 32
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D53386 Rev C Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 33
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D53386 Rev C Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 34
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D54597 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 5

9 - 35
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D54597 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 5

9 - 36
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D54597 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 5

9 - 37
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D54597 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 5

9 - 38
SB-III TCI-3 Whisper with DAS and 6/3 TLE Evaporators
5D54597 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 5

9 - 39
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54968 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 40
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54968 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 41
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54664 Rev B Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 5

9 - 42
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54664 Rev B Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 5

9 - 43
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54664 Rev B Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 5

9 - 44
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54664 Rev B Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 5

9 - 45
SB-III DE Whisper
5D54664 Rev B Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 5

9 - 46
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54972 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 47
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54972 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 48
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 6

9 - 49
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 6

9 - 50
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 6

9 - 51
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 6

9 - 52
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 6

9 - 53
SB-III 50 Whisper
5D54660 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 6 of 6

9 - 54
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55924 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 55
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55924 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 56
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55923 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 4

9 - 57
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55923 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 4

9 - 58
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55923 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 4

9 - 59
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 30
5D55923 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 4

9 - 60
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56152 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 61
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56152 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 62
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56153 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 5

9 - 63
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56153 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 5

9 - 64
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56153 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 5

9 - 65
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56153 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 5

9 - 66
Spectrum SB & Spectrum Super-II 50
5D56153 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 5

9 - 67
Spectrum 6/3
5D55926 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2

9 - 68
Spectrum 6/3
5D55926 Rev A Schematic Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2

9 - 69
Spectrum 6/3
5D55925 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 1 of 5

9 - 70
Spectrum 6/3
5D55925 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 2 of 5

9 - 71
Spectrum 6/3
5D55925 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 3 of 5

9 - 72
Spectrum 6/3
5D55925 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 4 of 5

9 - 73
Spectrum 6/3
5D55925 Rev A Wiring Diagram - Sheet 5 of 5

9 - 74
 Changes and Comments
You are invited to comment on this manual so it can be updated and improved to better meet your needs.
Any corrections or comments are welcome. Please complete the following information:

Manual Name: _____________________________________________________________________

Page Number(s): ___________________________________________________________________

Your Name: ________________________________________________________________________

Company Name:____________________________________________________________________

Phone Number: ____________________________________________________________________

Corrections and Comments:__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

Return Form To: Thermo King Corporation

314 West 90th Street
Mail Stop 38
Bloomington, MN 55420
Attn: Darrell Storlie